678263
40
Zoom out
Zoom in
Vorherige Seite
1/272
Nächste Seite
OWNER´S MANUAL
Vehicle and Infotainment
ŠKODA FABIA
Documentation of vehicle delivery
Date of vehicle delivery
a)
ŠKODA Partner
Stamp and signature of the vendor
I confirm that I have taken delivery of the specified vehicle in good condi-
tion, have received information on how to operate it correctly, and have
had the terms of the warranty explained to me.
Signature of the customer
Does the vehicle have an extended warranty? Yes
No
Limitations of the ŠKODA extended warranty
b)
Years: or km/mile-
age:
or.
miles:
a)
Due to the requirements of the country-specific regulations which are generally
binding, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date of the ve-
hicle handover.
b)
Depending on which comes first.

6V0012720AH
1st vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
(filled in by the vendor)
belongs to:
Title, Name/Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:
2nd vehicle owner
This vehicle with the official registration
number
belongs to:
Title, Name/Company:
Address:
Telephone:
ŠKODA Partner
Service consultant:
Telephone:

6V0012720AH
Useful links
Before starting off
Adjusting the seat » page 69
Adjusting the steering wheel » page 19
Exterior mirrors » page 68
Headlights/lights » page 61
Windscreen wipers and washers » page 67
Heating and ventilation » page 91
Heated windscreen » page 65
Instrument cluster
Warning lights » page 37
Display operation » page 47
Time setting » page 46
Unlocking and opening
Key-free unlocking (KESSY) » page 53
Luggage compartment lid » page 58
Power windows » page 58
Bonnet » page 210
Connectivity
Online Services – ŠKODA Connect » page 12
SmartLink+ » page 141
Connecting Infotainment to the Internet » page 139
Hotspot (WLAN) » page 140
Making telephone calls » page 132
Configuration wizard » page 102
Driving
Automatic gearbox » page 170
Braking and stabilizing systems » page 175
START-STOP system » page 166
Adaptive cruise control » page 184
Parking
Parking the vehicle » page 169
Parking aid » page 177
Reversing camera » page 180
Care and maintenance
Service intervals » page 51
Tyre pressure » page 216
Washing the vehicle » page 203
Folding the windscreen wiper arms securely » page 231
Checking and refilling
Refuelling » page 207
Engine oil » page 211
Windscreen washer fluid » page 211
Emergencies
Emergency call » page 15
Vehicle tool kit » page 221
Lamp replacement » page 236
Replacing fuses » page 233
Changing a wheel » page 221
Jump-starting » page 227
Towing the vehicle » page 228
Interesting tips
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual » page 9
Tutorial videos » page 10
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for
new cars 6
Radio equipment - Information on Directive
2014/53/EU 8
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information 9
General 9
Printed Owner's Manual 9
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual 9
Tutorial videos 10
Application MyŠKODA App
10
Notes
11
Online Services
ŠKODA Connect
12
Service packageŠKODA Connect 12
ŠKODA Connect website
12
User and vehicle registration, activation of
online services
12
Managing online services
14
Emergency call 15
Care Connect Services 15
Infotainment Online services
16
Safety
Passive Safety 18
General information 18
Correct and safe seating position 18
Seat belts
21
Wearing seat belts 21
Inertia reel and belt pre-tensioners
23
Airbag system 24
Description of the airbag system 24
Airbag deactivation 26
Transporting children safely 28
Child seat 28
Fastening systems 31
Operation
cockpit 35
Overview 34
Instruments and warning lights 36
Instrument cluster 36
Warning lights
37
Information system
46
Driver information system
46
Operation of the information system 47
Driving data (Multifunction display)
48
MAXI DOT display
50
Service intervals
51
Unlocking and opening
52
Unlocking and locking 52
Anti-theft alarm system
57
Boot lid
58
Window operation 58
Lights and visibility
61
Light 61
Interior lighting 64
Visibility
65
Windscreen wipers and washers 66
Rear view mirror
68
Seats and head restraints 69
Front seats 69
Rear seats
70
Headrests 71
Front seat heater 72
Useful features 73
Passenger compartment features 73
Electrical sockets 78
Ashtray and cigarette lighter 79
Tablet holder
80
Transport of cargo 81
Luggage compartment and transporting
objects 81
Variable loading floor in the luggage
compartment 87
Bicycle carrier in the luggage compartment
88
Transportation on the roof rack
90
Heating and ventilation 91
Heating, manual air conditioning system,
Climatronic
91
Infotainment
Introductory information
95
Important information 95
Infotainment overview
95
Infotainment operation
98
Infotainment operation 98
Voice control
103
Updating the Infotainment software 105
Infotainment settings – Amundsen, Bolero 106
Infotainment system settings
106
Radio menu settings 109
Media menu settings
109
Image menu settings 109
Telephone menu settings 110
SmartLink+ menu settings
110
Navigation menu settings 110
3
Table of Contents
Infotainment settings – Swing 112
Infotainment system settings 112
Radio menu settings 113
Media menu settings 114
Telephone menu settings 114
Infotainment settings – Blues 115
Infotainment system settings
115
Radio menu settings 116
Media menu settings 116
Radio 117
Operation 117
Media
121
Operation
121
Audio sources
124
Images 128
Image viewer
128
Media Command
130
Using the system
130
Telephone
132
Introductory information 132
Pairing and connecting
133
Telephone functions
134
Text messages (SMS) 138
Data connection
139
Internet connection 139
Connecting via the CarStick device 139
Connecting via WLAN
140
SmartLink+ 141
Introductory information
141
Android Auto 142
Apple CarPlay 143
MirrorLink
®
143
ApplicationŠKODA OneApp 144
Navigation 145
Introductory information 145
Search for destination and enter 147
Saved destinations 151
Import custom destinations 152
Map 154
Route guidance 156
Route
159
Traffic reports 161
Vehicle systems 163
CAR - Vehicle settings 163
Driving
Starting-off and driving
164
Starting and stopping the engine
164
START-STOP system 166
Braking and parking
168
Manual gear shifting and pedals
169
Automatic transmission
170
Running in and economical driving
172
Avoiding damage to your vehicle 173
Assist systems
174
General information
174
Braking and stabilisation systems
175
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
177
Reversing camera 180
Cruise Control System 181
Speed limiter
183
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) 184
Front Assist
189
Fatigue detection system 191
Tyre pressure monitoring 192
Towing device and trailer
193
Hitch 193
Using hitch
198
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance 201
Service work, adjustments and technical
alterations 201
Cleaning and care 202
Inspecting and replenishing 207
Fuel
207
Engine compartment 209
Engine oil 211
Coolant 212
Brake fluid 213
Vehicle battery
213
Wheels
216
Wheels and tyres
216
Operating in winter conditions 218
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment, and self-help
220
Emergency equipment
220
Changing a wheel
221
Breakdown kit 225
Jump-starting
227
Towing the vehicle
228
Remote control – Changing the battery 229
Emergency unlocking/locking of doors
230
Replacing windscreen wiper blades 231
Fuses and light bulbs 233
Fuses
233
Bulbs 236
Technical data
Technical data 244
Basic vehicle data 244
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
249
4
Table of Contents
Index
5
Table of Contents
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Materials defect liability
Your ŠKODA Partner, as a vendor, is liable to you for material damage to your
new ŠKODA car, ŠKODA Genuine Parts or ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in ac-
cordance with statutory regulations and the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA warranty for new cars
As well as the materials defect liability, ŠKODA AUTO grants you the ŠKODA
warranty for new cars (hereinafter referred to as “ŠKODA warranty),” accord-
ing to the conditions described below.
As part of the ŠKODA warranty, ŠKODA AUTO will provide the following serv-
ices.
Free repair of faulty components or vehicle defects that occur within two
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of paint work defects on your vehicle that occur within three
years from the start of the ŠKODA warranty.
Free repair of corrosion caused by rust on the bodywork of your vehicle that
occurs within twelve years from the start of the warranty. Only corrosion of
body panels from the inside to the outside is included in the definition of cor-
rosion caused by rust on the bodywork and covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
The start of warranty is the date on which the new car is handed over to the
initial purchaser by the ŠKODA Partner
1)
. This date must be noted down by the
ŠKODA Partner in the Owner's Manual for your vehicle » in the section on the
documentation of the vehicle handover.
Vehicle repairs may be carried out either by replacing the faulty part or by re-
pairing it. Replaced parts become the property of the ŠKODA Service Partner.
There shall be no further claims arising from the ŠKODA warranty. In particu-
lar, there shall be no claims for replacement, cancellation, provision of a cour-
tesy vehicle for the duration of repairs or compensation for damages.
The ŠKODA warranty is valid at any ŠKODA service partner.
A prerequisite for carrying out work under the ŠKODA warranty is that all
service work has been carried out in a timely and technically correct manner
and in accordance with the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions. It must be proven that
service work has been carried out properly and in accordance with the ŠKODA
AUTO's provisions when making a claim on the ŠKODA warranty. In the event
of a missed service or failure to carry out a service according to the ŠKODA
AUTO's provisions, you may still be entitled to warranty claims as long as you
can prove that the missed service or the failure to carry out a service accord-
ing to the ŠKODA AUTO's provisions was not the cause of the defect.
Natural wear and tear to your vehicle is not covered by the ŠKODA warranty.
The ŠKODA warranty also does not cover faults to bodywork, installations or
conversions provided by third parties, or vehicle faults caused as a result. The
same applies to accessories that were not installed and/or delivered ex-facto-
ry.
In addition, this warranty does not apply if the defect was caused by one of the
following.
Unauthorised use, improper handling (e.g. use in racing competitions or over-
loading), improper care and maintenance or unauthorised modifications to
your vehicle.
Non-compliance with instructions in the Owner's Manual or other factory-
supplied instructions.
External causes or influences (e.g. accidents, hail, flooding etc.).
Parts fitted or connected on or in the vehicle whose use has not been ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO, or modification of the vehicle in a manner not ap-
proved by ŠKODA AUTO (e.g. tuning).
Damage caused by you that was not immediately seen to by a specialist ga-
rage or was not rectified properly.
It is the customer’s responsibility to prove that he/she is not the cause of the
damage.
This ŠKODA warranty does not affect the purchaser's statutory rights from
materials defect liability from the vehicle vendor and other potential claims
from product liability laws.
1)
Due to the requirements of the country-specific regulations which are gen-
erally binding, the date of first registration can be given instead of the date
of the vehicle handover.
6
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Mobility warranty
The mobility warranty provides a sense of security when travelling in your ve-
hicle.
If your vehicle should break down during a journey due to an unexpected de-
fect, you can claim services to ensure your continued mobility under the terms
of the mobility warranty, including the following services: Breakdown assis-
tance at the site of the breakdown and towing to a ŠKODA Service Partner,
technical assistance on the phone or on-site commissioning.
If your vehicle is not repaired on the same day, the ŠKODA Service Partner
may provide further services as required, such as replacement transportation
(bus, train etc.) or a courtesy vehicle etc.
More information regarding terms and conditions for the provision of a mobili-
ty warranty for your vehicle can be obtained from your ŠKODA Partner. They
will also provide you with detailed terms and conditions for the mobility war-
ranty with respect to your vehicle. In the event that there is no mobility war-
ranty coverage in place for your vehicle, you should check with any ŠKODA
Service Partner about the possibility of a supplementary agreement.
Optional ŠKODA extended warranty
If you opted for a ŠKODA extended warranty when purchasing your new car,
the two-year ŠKODA warranty with regards to all free warranty repairs is ex-
tended by the period you chose or until the chosen mileage limit has been
reached, whichever occurs first.
The paint warranty and the warranty against corrosion described above are
unaffected by the ŠKODA extended warranty.
The ŠKODA extended warranty does not apply to external and internal foils.
The information on the detailed conditions of the ŠKODA extended warranty is
provided by your ŠKODA partner.
Note
The ŠKODA extended warranty is only available in some countries.
7
Liability for defects and ŠKODA warranty for new cars
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
Fig. 1
ŠKODA websites
Your vehicle has various radio systems.
The manufacturers of these radio systems declare that these systems comply
with the requirements of Directive 2014/53/EU.
To display the respective declaration of conformity, proceed as follows.
1. Scan the QR code » Fig. 1 or enter the following address in your web
browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
The web page with a model overview of the ŠKODA brand is opened.
2. Select the desired model - a menu with the manuals is displayed.
3. Select the construction period as well as the language.
4. Select the declaration of conformity file in pdf format.
8
Radio equipment - Information on Directive 2014/53/EU
About the Owner's Manual
Introductory information
General
Read this Owner's Manual carefully, because operation in accordance with
these instructions is a prerequisite for proper use of the vehicle.
When using the vehicle, the general binding country-specific legal require-
ments (e.g. transporting children, deactivating the airbag, tyre use, road traffic,
etc.) must always be observed.
Always pay attention when driving! As the driver, you are fully responsible for
road safety.
The Owner's Manual applies to all body variants of the vehicle, all related
model versions as well as all equipment levels.
The Owner's Manual describes all possible equipment variants without identi-
fying them as special equipment, model variants or market-dependent equip-
ment. Consequently, this vehicle does not contain all of the equipment com-
ponents described in the Owner's Manual.
The range of equipment installed in your vehicle depends on the purchase con-
tract for the vehicle. For any questions regarding the scope of equipment,
please contact a ŠKODA Partner.
The pictures in the Owner's Manual are for illustrative purposes only. The illus-
trations can differ in minor details from your vehicle; they are only intended to
provide general information.
ŠKODA AUTO pursues a policy of ongoing product and model development
with all vehicles. Each time, therefore, any changes to the vehicle occur, the
scope of delivery may change in terms of its equipment and technology. The
information listed in the Owner's Manual corresponds to the information avail-
able at the time of going to press.
Therefore legal claims cannot be made based on the technical data, illustra-
tions and information contained in the Owner's Manual.
We recommend that the web pages that are referred to in the Owner's Man-
ual are displayed using the classic view. Not all necessary information may be
displayed correctly if the mobile view is chosen.
Printed Owner's Manual
The printed Owner's Manual includes the most important information relating
to vehicle operation. For complete information, see the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual.
Electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Fig. 2
ŠKODA websites
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual includes full information regard-
ing vehicle operation.
The electronic version of the Owner's Manual is available on the ŠKODA web-
site and in the MyŠKODA App mobile application.
Displaying the electronic version of the Owner's Manual
Scan the QR code » Fig. 2 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals
Select the desired model.
Select the construction period as well as the language.
Select the desired Owner's Manual.
9
Introductory information
Tutorial videos
Fig. 3
Tutorial videos
The operation of some vehicle functions can be displayed in the form of video
instructions.
Show menu with video instructions
Scan the QR code » Fig. 3 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er.
http://go.skoda.eu/owners-manuals-videos
Note
The video instructions are only available in some language versions.
Application MyŠKODA App
Fig. 4 The MyŠKODA App application is available for devices with the
Android (Google) or iOS (Apple) operating system.
The MyŠKODA App application contains, for example, the electronic version of
the Owner's Manual, quick tips regarding how to resolve certain situations in
relation to the vehicle or a description of the Simply Clever solutions.
You can use this application to get in touch with a ŠKODA partner and to use
its services or to access the breakdown service quickly.
The application can also be used as an RSS reader of favourite websites.
After entering the following address into the web browser, the website is
opened with information about the application.
http://go.skoda.eu/service-app
Installing the MyŠKODA App application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 4.
10
About the Owner's Manual
Notes
Terms used
- a workshop that carries out specialist service tasks for
ŠKODA vehicles. A specialist garage can be a ŠKODA partner, a ŠKODA
service partner or an independent workshop.
- A workshop that has been contractually author-
ised by ŠKODA AUTO or its sales partner to service ŠKODA vehicles and
to sell ŠKODA Genuine Parts.
- A company that has been authorised by ŠKODA AUTO or
its sales partner to sell new ŠKODA vehicles and, when applicable, to
service them using ŠKODA Genuine Parts and sell ŠKODA Genuine
Parts.
Text notes
- Short press (e.g. a button) within 1 s
- Long press (e.g. a button) for more than 1 s
Direction indications
All direction indications such as “left”, “right”, “front”, “rear” relate to the for-
ward direction of travel of the vehicle.
Explanation of symbols
Telephone operation in the MAXI DOT display
Text display in the segment display
Marker to the next operation step
Repeatedly pressing the button
WARNING
Texts with this symbol warn of a serious accident, injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
Texts with this symbol draw attention to the risk of vehicle damage or possible
inoperability of some systems.
Note
Texts with this symbol contain additional information.
“Specialist garage”
“ŠKODA Service Partner”
“ŠKODA Partner”
“Press”
“Hold”
11
Introductory information
Online Services
ŠKODA Connect
Service packageŠKODA Connect
The ŠKODA Connect online services extend the vehicle and Infotainment func-
tions with the CareConnect and Infotainment Online service packages.
Care Connect
The CareConnect services include the following features.
Emergency, information and breakdown call.
Proactive service offering to connect with your ŠKODA service partner.
Remote access to the vehicle using the ŠKODA Connect application.
In order for the Care Connect services to work, a mobile network must be
available.
Infotainment online
The Infotainment Online services extend the Infotainment functions, e.g. with
the following functions.
Weather forecast.
Filling station search with information on fuel prices.
Online traffic information.
Online destination search.
The Infotainment system must be connected to the Internet for the
Infotainment Online services to work» page 139.
Terms of use and availability of services
Current “conditions for the use of the user account” incl. “declaration on the
protection of personal data” can be found in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website.
The availability of the services is dependent on the type of vehicle and on the
type of Infotainment system installed in the vehicle. Some services are availa-
ble only in certain countries.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible.
ŠKODA Connect website
Fig. 5 Starting ŠKODA Connect
The ŠKODA Connect website contains information about the online services
and their functions, access to the ŠKODA Connect Portal website, as well as
the option to download the ŠKODA Connect App application.
The ŠKODA Connect website can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 5
or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
User and vehicle registration, activation of online services
Website ŠKODA Connect Portal
Fig. 6
Starting the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
The use of the ŠKODA Connect online services requires prior user and vehicle
registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website as well as activation of on-
line services in the Infotainment system.
The ŠKODA Connect Portal website can be opened by scanning the QR code
» Fig. 6 or by entering the following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-portal
12
Online Services
Information on registering for and activating online services
Fig. 7 Instruction video on how to register for and activate services
Fig. 8
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activa-
tion of services
Instruction video on how to register for and activate services
Registration and activation are carried out in accordance with the instruction
video.
The instruction video can be opened by scanning the QR code » Fig. 7 or enter-
ing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-video
Electronic version of the instructions for registration and activation of
services
Current information on registration and activation of Online Services can be
found in the electronic version of the instructions for the Online Services on
the ŠKODA Connect website.
The electronic version of the instructions can be opened by scanning the QR
code » Fig. 8 or by entering the following address in the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connect-manual
Note
For help with registration, activation as well as the Internet connection, please
contact a ŠKODA service partner.
13
ŠKODA Connect
Activation in Infotainment
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during user and vehicle
registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website.
Wait until the message
Registration complete.
is displayed (can take several mi-
nutes) and confirm the message.
Note
Availability of a GPS signal and a mobile network is required for activation.
In vehicles that only have Infotainment Online Services, a GPS signal must be
available and the Infotainment must be connected with the Internet for activa-
tion.
The list of services can be displayed » page 14, Display of service manage-
ment.
Deleting/switching the vehicle user
Deleting the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
Delete owner
Delete
and confirm the delete process.
Changing the user
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
Registration
.
Tap the function surface
New owner
Transfer ownership
.
Enter and confirm the registration PIN code received during registration of
the new user and during vehicle registration on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website.
If necessary, confirm the change of user by tapping the function surface
Change main users
.
Note
By deleting the registered vehicle in the user account on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website, the user is also deleted in the infotainment system.
Managing online services
Display of service management
In Services Management, it is possible to display information about the online
services, the validity of their license, or to switch the services on/off.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
.
To display the designations and the status of the services, select the de-
sired service.
For detailed information about the service tap the function surface .
To switch the services on/off, tap the function surface with “Checkbox”.
Switching online services on/off in the Infotainment system
Switching
Private mode
function on/off
By switching the
Private mode
function on, the services relating to sending vehi-
cle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of serv-
ices, are deactivated.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Private mode
.
Switching Care Connect services on/off
By switching the Care Connect services off, the services relating to sending
vehicle information and personal data, which are essential for the provision of
services, are deactivated.
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Care Connect
.
Switching Infotainment Online services on/off
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
ŠKODA Connect (online
services)
Services Management
Infotainment Online
.
Note
The emergency call remains fully functional after activation of the
Private mode
function or after deactivation of Care Connect. The functions of the informa-
tion and breakdown call are limited.
14
Online Services
Activated localisation services
Fig. 9
Symbols of activated localisa-
tion services
For the complete functionality of some online services, activated localisation
services are required.
Localisation services include, for example, information on the last parking posi-
tion, area notification or speed notification.
When localisation services are active, one of the following symbols will be dis-
played in the status line in the Infotainment screen » Fig. 9,
Emergency call
Fig. 10
Emergency call button
Automatic start of a call with the emergency call centre
In the event of an accident, a call is automatically started with the emergency
call centre. The emergency call centre simultaneously receives information on
the accident, e.g. the location and severity of the accident, the number of oc-
cupants in the front seats with fastened seatbelts and the vehicle identifica-
tion number (VIN).
Manual start of a call with the emergency call centre
Press and hold the
B
» Fig. 10 button.
In the Infotainment screen or on the instrument cluster display, confirm the
connection setup.
The call can be started manually, for example, if you are reporting an accident
in which you were not directly involved.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 10.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The emergency service is functional even without user registration and activa-
tion of services.
Care Connect Services
Proactive service
Fig. 11
Buttons and warning lights of the CareConnect services
The proactive service provides an overview of the technical status of your ve-
hicle and on any due service events. It is also possible to establish a connection
to the information or breakdown call centre.
15
ŠKODA Connect
Buttons and warning lights of the Care Connect services » Fig. 11
Warning light for system status.
Press this button to establish a call to the information number in the
event of problems with the online services or for information regarding
the products and services of the ŠKODA brand.
Press this button to establish a call to the breakdown number in the event
of a breakdown.
The system status is displayed after the ignition is switched on, by the illumi-
nation of warning lamp
A
» Fig. 11.
Green - the system is functional.
Red - there is a fault in the system.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
Remote access to the vehicle
Fig. 12 ŠKODA Connect application
With the remote access to the vehicle service, you can access some vehicle
functions via the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or the ŠKODA Connect ap-
plication installed on your mobile device.
Installing the ŠKODA Connect mobile application
Scan the QR code » Fig. 12 .
Remote access to the vehicle includes, for example, the following services.
Driving data.
Vehicle condition.
Last parking position.
A
B
C
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
Infotainment Online services
Main menu and overview of services
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 13
Main menu
These services extend the functionality of the Internet-connected Infotain-
ment.
To display the main menu » Fig. 13, press the button

, the tap the function
surface
.
News from the RSS channels set in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website
Online search for filling stations with information on fuel prices » page 150
Online search for car parks with information on free parking spaces
» page 150
Weather forecast near the vehicle position, the destination of the route or
in the vicinity of the selected location
Online POI search » page 148
Import of the destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website » page 154
Import of the routes created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website » page 160
Online import of POI Categories » page 146
16
Online Services
Conditions for the use of Online Services
Settings of Online Services » page 108
For more information on the available services, see the ŠKODA Connect web-
site» page 12.
Note
The availability of the services listed always refers to the period of validity of
the contract. During this period of validity, interim content changes to these
services are possible. Current information can be found on the ŠKODA
Connect website» page 12.
17
ŠKODA Connect
Safety
Passive Safety
General information
Introduction
In this section of the instructions you will find important information on the
subject of passive safety. We have combined everything here which you
should be familiar with, for example, regarding seat belts, airbags, safety of
children and anything similar.
Other important safety information can also be found in the subsequent sec-
tions of this Owner's Manual. Therefore, the Owner’s Manual should always be
kept in the vehicle.
Before every journey
For your own safety and the safety of the people travelling with you, please
pay attention to the following points before setting off.
Check the lights and turn signal lights are functioning correctly.
Check the wiper function and the wiper blades for wear. Check the wind-
screen washer fluid level.
Ensure that all of the windows offer good visibility to the outside.
Adjust the rear-view mirror so that vision to the rear is guaranteed. Ensure
that the mirrors are not covered.
Check the tyre inflation pressure.
Check the engine oil, brake fluid and coolant levels.
Secure all items of luggage.
Do not exceed the permissible axle loads and permissible gross weight of the
vehicle – risk of accident.
Close all doors and the engine compartment and luggage compartment lid.
Ensure that no parts and components are visibly loose in the vehicle.
Ensure that no objects can obstruct the pedals.
Protect children using a suitable child seat » page 28, Transporting children
safely.
Adopt the correct seated position. Tell your passengers to assume the cor-
rect seated position » page 18, Correct and safe seating position.
Driving safety
For safety in traffic, the following precautions must be observed.
Do not become distracted from concentrating on the traffic situation, (e.g.
by your passengers or mobile phone calls).
Never drive when your driving ability is impaired, (e.g. due to medication, al-
cohol, drugs or similar).
Keep to the traffic regulations and the permissible speed limit.
Always adjust the driving speed to the road, traffic and weather conditions.
Take regular breaks on long journeys (at least every two hours).
Correct and safe seating position
Introduction
Always assume the correct seated position before setting off and do not
change this position while driving. Also advise your passengers to adopt the
correct seated position and not to change this position while the car is moving.
The following list contains instructions for the Passenger which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not lean against the dash panel.
Do not put your feet on the dash panel.
The following list contains instructions for all Passengers which, if not ob-
served, may cause serious injuries or death.
Do not sit only on the front edge of the seat.
Do not sit facing to one side.
Do not lean out of the window.
Do not put your limbs out of the window.
Do not put your feet on the seat upholstery.
18
Safety
WARNING
The adjustable seats and all head restraints must be adjusted to match
the body size at all times and the seat belt must always be fastened proper-
ly to provide the most effective levels of protection to the passengers.
Each occupant must correctly fasten the seat belt belonging to the seat.
Children must be fastened » page 28, Transporting children safely with a
suitable restraint system.
The seat backrests must not be tilted too far back when driving, as this
will impair the function of the seat belts and of the airbag system – risk of
injury!
WARNING
By sitting incorrectly, the occupant is risking life-threatening injuries.
Driver’s correct seated position
Fig. 14
Correct seated position for the driver/correct steering wheel
position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of injury in the event of an accident,
we recommend the following settings.
Adjust the driver’s seat in the forward/back direction so that the pedals
can be fully depressed with slightly bent legs.
Adjust the seat backrest so that the highest point of the steering wheel
can be reached with your arms at a slight angle.
Adjust the steering wheel so that the distance between the steering wheel
and your chest is at least 25 cm » Fig. 14 -
A
.
Adjust the headrest so that the top edge of the headrest is, where possi-
ble, at the same level as the upper part of your head (not for seats with
integrated headrests) » Fig. 14 -
B
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Wearing seat belts.
WARNING
A distance of least 25 cm to the steering wheel should be maintained,
otherwise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - There is a risk
to life!
When driving, hold the steering wheel with both hands firmly on the out-
er edge in the “9 o'clock” and “3 o'clock” position » Fig. 14. Never hold the
steering wheel in the “12 o'clock” position or in any other way (e.g. in the
middle, inner edge of the steering wheel or similar). Otherwise, you could
sustain serious injury to the arms, hands and head if the airbag is activated.
Ensure there are no objects in the driver's footwell as they may get be-
hind the pedals while driving. You would then no longer be able to operate
the clutch, brake or acceleration pedals.
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Fig. 15
Adjusting the steering wheel position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
The height and forward/back position of the steering wheel can be adjusted.
Turn the safety lever beneath the steering wheel towards the arrow
1
» Fig. 15.
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. The steering wheel can be
adjusted in direction of arrow
2
.
Pull the holder until it stops in arrow direction
3
.
19
Passive Safety
WARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving, but only
when the vehicle is stationary!
The safety lever must always be locked so that the steering wheel cannot
accidentally change position – There is a risk of accident!
Passenger’s correct seating position
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For passenger safety and to reduce the risk of injury in an accident, the follow-
ing instructions must be observed.
Position the front passenger seat back as far as possible. The front pas-
senger must maintain a distance of at least 25 cm to the dash panel so
that the airbag offers the greatest possible safety if it is deployed.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is at
the same level as the upper part of your head » Fig. 14 on page 19 -
B
(not
for seats with integrated headrest).
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Wearing seat belts.
WARNING
A distance of least 25 cm to the dash panel should be maintained, other-
wise the airbag system will not be able to protect you - There is a risk to
life!
Always keep your feet in the footwell when the car is being driven – nev-
er place your feet on the instrument panel, out of the window or on the
surface of the seats! You will be exposed to increased risk of injury if it be-
comes necessary to apply the brake or in the event of an accident. If an air-
bag is deployed, you may suffer fatal injuries when adopting an incorrect
seated position!
Passengers’ correct seating position on the rear seats
Read and observe on page 19 first.
For the safety of the passengers in the rear seats, and to reduce the risk of in-
jury in an accident, the following instructions must be observed.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top edge of the head restraint is,
where possible, at the same level as the upper part of the head » Fig. 14 on
page 19 -
B
.
Correctly fasten the seat belt » page 21, Wearing seat belts.
20
Safety
Seat belts
Wearing seat belts
Introduction
Seat belts that are fastened correctly offer good protection in the event of an
accident. They reduce the risk of an injury and increase the chance of survival
in the event of a major accident.
The seat belts reduce kinetic energy to a considerable extent. They also pre-
vent uncontrolled movements which, in turn, may well result in severe injuries.
When transporting a child the following instructions must be observed
» page 28, Transporting children safely.
WARNING
Fasten seat belts before every journey! This also applies to other passen-
gers - there is a danger of injury!
Maximum seat belt protection is only achieved if you are correctly seated
» page 18, Correct and safe seating position.
The seat backrests of the front seats must not be tilted too far to the
rear, otherwise the seatbelts can lose their effectiveness.
WARNING
Information on dealing with the safety belts
The belt webbing must not be jammed in-between at any point or twisted
or chafe against any sharp edges.
Make sure you do not catch the seat belt in the door when closing it.
WARNING
Information on the proper use of the safety belts
Adjust the height of the belt in such a way that the shoulder part of the
belt is roughly positioned across the middle of your shoulder - on no ac-
count across your neck.
No two persons (also not children) should ever use a single seat belt to-
gether.
The lock tongue should only be inserted into the lock which is the correct
one for your seat. Wrong use of the safety belt will reduce its capacity to
protect and the risk of injury increases.
WARNING (Continued)
Many layers of clothing and loose clothing (e. g. a winter coat over a jack-
et) do not allow you to be correctly seated and impairs proper operation of
the seat belts.
Do not attach clamps or similar objects to the belt - the function of the
belt retractor could be restricted.
The seat belts for the rear seats can only fulfil their function reliably when
the seat backrests are correctly locked into position » page 70.
WARNING
Information on the care and maintenance of the safety belts
The belt webbing must always be kept clean. Soiled belt webbing may im-
pair proper operation of the inertia reel » page 206.
The seat belts must not be removed or changed in any way. Do not at-
tempt to repair the seat belts yourself.
Check the condition of all the seat belts on a regular basis. If damage to
the parts of the seat belt system (e.g. the strap, the belt connectors, the re-
tractor, the lock or similar) are detected, the seat belt in question must be
replaced by a specialist immediately.
Seat belts which have been subject to stress in an accident should be re-
placed by a specialist garage. Also check the seat belt anchors.
Correct routing of seat belt
Fig. 16
Routing of belt webbing over the shoulders and the lap
belt/Routing of belt webbing for an expectant mother
21
Seat belts
Fig. 17 Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Read and observe on page 21 first.
It is important that the belt is properly routed to ensure seat belts offer the
maximum protection.
The shoulder belt should be positioned approximately over the middle of your
shoulder (under no circumstances across your neck) and lie flush to the
chest» Fig. 16 -
.
The lower part of the belt should run across the pelvis (it should not lie on top
of the stomach) and must always fit snugly» Fig. 16 -
.
For pregnant women, the lower part of the belt must be positioned as low
down as possible across the pelvis, to avoid exerting any pressure on the lower
abdomen» Fig. 16 -
.
Seat belt height adjusters for front seats
Push the seat belt guide loop upwards in the direction of arrow» Fig. 17 -
.
Or: push together the mechanism in the direction of arrows
1
and push the
return pulley downwards in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 17 - .
Then pull firmly on the belt to ensure that the seat belt height adjuster has
correctly locked in place and that the belt is blocked reliably » page 23, Iner-
tia reels.
WARNING
Always ensure that the webbing of the seat belts is properly routed. Seat
belts which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even,
in minor accidents.
A seat belt which is hanging too loose can result in injuries, as your body
is moved forward by the kinetic energy produced in an accident and is then
abruptly held firm by the belt.
The belt webbing must not run across solid or fragile objects (e.g. pencils,
spectacles, pens, keys etc.). Such objects can cause injury.
Fastening and unfastening seat belts
Fig. 18
Fastening/unfastening the seat belt
Read and observe on page 21 first.
Before fastening the belt
Adjust the head restraint properly (does not apply to seats with integrated
head restraints).
Adjust the seat (applies to the front seats).
Adjust the belt height (applies to the front seats).
Fastening
Slowly pull the belt over the chest and pelvis.
Insert the lock tongue into the belt buckle » Fig. 18 that is part of the
seat until it clicks into place.
Pull on the belt to check that it has engaged correctly in the lock.
Release
Grip the lock tongue and press the red button in the buckle » Fig. 18 - , the
lock tongue pops out.
22
Safety
Guide the belt back by hand so that the seat belt does not twist and the
webbing rolls up fully.
WARNING
The reel opening for the lock tongue must not be blocked otherwise the
lock tongue will not lock into place properly.
Inertia reel and belt pre-tensioners
Inertia reels
Each seat belt is equipped with an inertia reel.
The seat belt can move freely when it is pulled slowly. The seat belt is locked
by the inertia reel when it is pulled suddenly. The belts also lock under full
braking, under acceleration, when driving downhill and when cornering.
WARNING
If the seat belt does not lock when pulling sharply on it, have it inspected
immediately by a specialist garage.
Belt tensioners
Safety for the driver and front passenger wearing their seat belts is enhanced
by the belt tensioners fitted to the inertia reels of the front three-point seat
belts.
If there is a collision of a certain severity, the seat belts are tightened by the
belt tensioner so that unwanted body motion is prevented.
Belt tensioners are not activated in the event of a roll-over, minor collisions or
in accidents in which no major forces are produced.
WARNING
Any work on the belt tensioner system, including the removal and installa-
tion of system components because of other repair work, must only be car-
ried out by a specialist garage.
If the belt tensioners have been deployed, it is then necessary to replace
the entire system.
Note
The belt tensioners can also be deployed if the seat belts are not fastened.
Smoke is generated when the belt tensioners are deployed. This is not an in-
dication of a fire in the vehicle.
23
Seat belts
Airbag system
Description of the airbag system
Introduction
The airbag system provides, as a supplement to the seat belts, additional occu-
pant protection during severe frontal and side-on collisions.
The airbag will only provide optimum protection in conjunction with wear-
ing the seat belt, the airbag is not a substitute for the seat belts.
The functional status of the airbag system is indicated by the warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 41.
System description
Fig. 19 Airbag installation points
Airbag installation points » Fig. 19
Front airbags
Side airbags
Head airbags
A
B
C
The forward movement of the body is cushioned when it makes contact with
the fully inflated airbag and the risk of injury to the remaining body parts is
thus reduced.
Front airbags - head and upper body. The airbags can be identified by the
lettering  featured on the steering wheel and on the dash panel on the
passenger side.
Side airbags - for the entire upper body (chest, stomach, pelvis) on the side
next to the door. The air bags can be identified by a label with the lettering
 marked on the front seat backrests.
Head airbags - head and neck. The airbags are provided with the lettering
 marked on the B-pillar cladding.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the airbag system consists of the
following parts.
Individual airbags.
Warning light
in the instrument cluster » page 41.
Key switch for the front passenger airbag » page 27.
Warning light for the front passenger airbag in the middle of the dash panel
» page 27.
Airbag deployment
Fig. 20 Inflated airbags
The airbag system is only functional when the ignition is switched on.
When triggered, the airbag fills with gas and unfolds. The inflation of the air-
bag is carried out in a fraction of a second.
24
Safety
When the airbag inflates, smoke is released. This is not a sign of a fire in the
vehicle.
Triggering conditions
It is not possible to generally determine which deployment conditions apply to
the airbag system in every situation. The important factors here are the hard-
ness of the object with which the vehicle collides, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed etc.
The deceleration during impact plays an important role in the deployment of
the airbags. If the vehicle deceleration which occurs and is measured remains
below the prescribed reference values specified in the control unit, the airbags
are not deployed although the vehicle may well suffer severe damage to the
bodywork as a consequence of the accident.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe frontal
collision.
Driver’s front airbag.
Front passenger airbag.
The following airbags will be deployed in the event of a severe side
collision.
Front side airbag.
Head airbag.
When an airbag is deployed, the following events occur.
The ignition is switched on.
All the doors are unlocked.
The fuel supply to the engine is interrupted.
The interior light comes on (if the automatic operation of the interior light is
switched on - position ).
When there is no air bag deployment?
With minor frontal and side collisions, rear collision, overturning of the vehicle
or vehicle roll-over there is no airbag deployment.
Safety instructions
Fig. 21
Safe distance from the steering
wheel and dash panel
WARNING
General information
The seat belts and the airbag system can only offer proper protection
if the driver and passengers are seated properly » page 18.
The airbag unleashes enormous force when triggered, which can lead to
serious injuries or fatalities if the driver and passengers are not seated
properly. This applies in particular to children who are transported without
using a suitable child safety seat » page 30.
If there is a fault, have the airbag system checked immediately by a spe-
cialist garage. Otherwise, there is a risk of the airbag not being activated in
the event of an accident.
If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must then be replaced.
The surface of the steering wheel and the dash panel should only be
cleaned with a dry or slightly dampened cloth in the area of the front air-
bags.
WARNING
Information about the front airbags
For the driver and passenger, it is important to maintain a distance of at
least 25 cm from the steering wheel or dashboard » Fig. 21 -
A
. If this dis-
tance is not maintained, the airbag system cannot protect you - hazard! The
front seats and the head restraints must always be correctly adjusted to
match the body size of the occupant.
25
Airbag system
WARNING (Continued)
It is essential to switch off the front passenger airbag if you are using a
child seat on the front passenger seat in which the child is carried with its
back facing the direction of travel » page 26, Airbag deactivation. If this is
not done, there is a risk of the child suffering severe or even fatal injuries if
the front passenger airbag is deployed.
No other persons, animals or objects should be placed in front of the oc-
cupants in the front seats in the deployment area of the front airbags.
The steering wheel and the surface of the dash panel on the passenger
side must not be plastered, covered or modified in any way. No parts (e.g.
cup holders, mobile phone mounts etc.) may be mounted near the airbag in-
stallation points and in the airbag deployment area.
Never place objects on the surface of the dash panel on the passenger
side.
WARNING
Information on side and head airbags
No objects (e.g. sun visors turned towards the windows) should be loca-
ted in the deployment area of the side and head airbags. No accessories
(e.g. cup holders etc.) should be fitted to the doors - risk of injury!
Hang only light clothing on the hooks in the vehicle, do not leave any
heavy or sharp objects in the pockets. Do not use hangers to hang up
clothes.
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Further informa-
tion » page 202.
No excessive force, e.g. through blows, kicks etc. should be applied to the
seat backrests - there is a risk of damage to the side airbags. The side air-
bags would not be deployed in such a case!
Any seat or protective covers which you fit to the driver or front passen-
ger seats must only be of a type expressly authorised by ŠKODA AUTO. In
view of the fact that the airbag inflates out of the backrest of the seat, use
of non-approved seat or protective covers would considerably impair the
protective function of the side airbag.
Any damage to the original seat covers or stitching at the installation
points for the side airbags should be immediately repaired by a specialist
company.
WARNING
Information on the use of the airbag system
Any work on the airbag system, including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel), must only be carried out by a specialist garage. Further information
» page 202.
No changes of any sort should be made to parts of the airbag system, the
front bumper or the bodywork.
Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
Airbag deactivation
Deactivating airbags
The front passenger airbag can be switched off with the key-operated switch
» Fig. 22 on page 27 - .
We recommend that you ask a ŠKODA Service Partner to switch off any other
airbags.
A warning light
indicates that the airbag has been deactivated » page 41.
Deactivating an airbag should, for example, be considered only in the
following cases.
A child seat is mounted on the front passenger seat, in which the child is
transported with its back to the direction of travel » page 28.
Despite correct adjustment of the driver's seat, the distance of at least
25 cm between the middle of the steering wheel and chest cannot be main-
tained.
Additional controls for drivers with a physical disability are installed in the ve-
hicle.
Special seats (e.g. orthopaedic seats without side airbags) are installed in the
vehicle.
WARNING
If an airbag is deactivated at the time of the vehicle being sold, the purchas-
er must be informed!
26
Safety
Deactivating the front passenger airbag
Fig. 22 Key-operated switch for the front passenger airbag / warning
light for front seat passenger airbag deactivation
Positions of the key switch » Fig. 22 -
The front passenger airbag is deactivated - after the ignition is switched
on, the indicator light illuminates

» Fig. 22 -
The front passenger airbag is switched on - after switching on the ignition,
the warning light illuminates for 65 seconds 
Switch off
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
On the radio key, fold the key bit out fully » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position

.
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
Check that the warning light  lights up after the ignition is switched on.
Switching on
Switch off the ignition.
Open the storage box on the front passenger's side.
On the radio key, fold the key bit out fully » .
Carefully insert the key into the key slot in the key switch as far as the stop.
Use the key to turn the slot of the key switch carefully into the position .
Pull the key out of the slot in the key switch » .
Close the storage compartment on the front passenger side.
Check that the warning light  lights up after the ignition is switched on.


WARNING
The key cannot be inserted into the key switch while driving. Shocks can
cause the key to turn in the slot and trigger the airbag! The airbag can be
triggered unexpectedly in an accident - it may result in injury or death!
The driver is responsible for whether the airbag is switched on or switch-
ed off.
Only switch off the airbag when the ignition is switched off! Otherwise a
fault can occur in the system for deactivating the airbag.
If the warning lights   flash, the front passenger airbag will not
be deployed in the event of an accident. Have the airbag system checked
by a specialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
An insufficiently folded out key bit can damage the key switch!
27
Airbag system
Transporting children safely
Child seat
Introduction
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident, children should only be transported
in child seats!
Please refer to the instructions in this Owner's Manual and the child seat man-
ufacturer's instructions with regard to the installation and use of the child seat.
For safety reasons, we recommend that you always transport children in the
rear seats. Only transport a child in the passenger seat in exceptional circum-
stances.
Child seats complying with the ECE-R 44 Economic Commission for Europe
standard must be used.
Child seats that comply with the ECE-R 44 standard are identified with a test
mark that cannot be removed: large E in the circle, with test number below.
WARNING
You should never carry children - including babies! - on your lap.
When leaving the vehicle, do not leave children unattended in the vehicle.
Children might not be capable of leaving the vehicle or helping themselves
independently in the event of an emergency. Can be fatal at very high or
very low temperatures!
The child must be secured in the vehicle throughout the journey! Other-
wise, in the event of an accident, the child would be thrown through the ve-
hicle and as a result may suffer fatal injuries and also injure other occu-
pants.
Children are exposed to an increased risk of injury in the event of an acci-
dent if they lean forward or adopt an incorrect seated position when the
vehicle is moving. This particularly applies to children who are transported
on the front passenger seat, as they can suffer severe, or even fatal, injuries
if the airbag system is deployed!
Pay particular attention to the information provided by the manufacturer
of the child safety seat regarding the correct routing of the belt. Seat belts
which are not correctly adjusted can themselves cause injuries even, in mi-
nor accidents.
WARNING (Continued)
Safety belts must be checked to ensure that they are positioned properly.
Care should also be taken to ensure that the belt is not damaged by sharp-
edged fittings.
When installing the child seat on the back seat, the corresponding front
seat must be adjusted so that there is no contact between the front seat
and the child seat or the child being transported in a child seat.
When installing a child seat in which the child faces forward, adjust the
head restraints so that they are as high as possible.
If the head restraints still prevent the child seat from being installed, even
in the highest position, you will need to remove them » page 72. After re-
moving the child seat, refit the head restraints.
Note
We recommend that you use child seats from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
These child seats were developed and also tested for use in ŠKODA vehicles.
They meet the ECE-R 44 standard.
28
Safety
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 1)
Does not apply to Taiwan
Fig. 23
Warning labels
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Never use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat which is pro-
tected by an active airbag. This could cause serious injury to the child, or
even death.
This warning is also given on stickers that are located in the following places.
On the passenger sun visor» Fig. 23 -
.
On the B-column on the front passenger side» Fig. 23
.
The following advice must be heeded when using a child seat in which the
child is carried on the front passenger seat.
It is essential to deactivate the front passenger airbag if using a child seat in
which the child is transported with his/her back facing the direction of travel
»
.
Set the front passenger seat back as vertically as possible so that there is
firm contact between the passenger seat back and the child seat back.
Where possible, move the front passenger seat back so that there is no con-
tact between the front seat and the child seat behind.
Set the height-adjustable front passenger seat as high up as possible.
Set the front passenger seat belt as high up as possible.
With child safety seats in groups 2 and 3, make sure that the loop-around fit-
tings attached to the child seat headrest is positioned in front of or at the
same height as the loop-around fittings on the B pillar on the passenger side.
Adjust the height of the front passenger seat belt so that the belt does not
“jam” in the return pulley. In the event of an accident, there is the risk of in-
jury to the neck of the child carried due to the seat belt!
WARNING
Never use a child safety seat on the front passenger seat in which the
child is seated with its back facing the direction of travel, if the airbag is
switched on. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even
fatal, injuries in the event of it being deployed.
Once a child seat in which the child is transported with its back to the di-
rection of travel is no longer being used on the passenger seat, the front
passenger airbag should be reactivated.
Use of a child seat on the front passenger seat (variant 2)
Applies to Taiwan
Fig. 24
Warning labels
Read and observe on page 28 first.
No babies, infants or children are to be carried on the passenger seat.
A label to this effect can also be found on the passenger's sun visor » Fig. 24.
29
Transporting children safely
Child safety and the side airbag
Fig. 25
Incorrect seated position of a
child who is not properly se-
cured – risk from the side air-
bag/Child properly protected by
safety seat
Read and observe on page 28 first.
The child must not be positioned in the deployment area of the side airbag
» Fig. 25 -
.
There must be sufficient room between the child and the deployment area of
the side airbag that the airbag can provide as much protection as possible
» Fig. 25
.
Classification of child seats
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Classification of child seats according to the ECE-R 44 standard.
Group Weight of the child
0 up to 10 kg
0+ up to 13 kg
1 9-18 kg
2 15-25 kg
3 22-36 kg
Use of child safety seats which are secured using a seat belt
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Read and observe on page 28 first.
Overview of the use of child seats fastened with a seat belt on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
Outside
Rear seat
Centre
0
up to 10 kg
U U U
0+
up to 13 kg
U U U
1
9-18 kg
U U U
Group
Front passenger
seat
Rear seats
Outside
Rear seat
Centre
2
15-25 kg
U U U
a)
3
22-36 kg
U U U
a)
a)
If the middle rear seat is not provided with a headrest, then a child seat of Group 2 or 3 is only to be used if
this has its own built-in headrest. If the child seat of Group 2 or 3 does not have its own built-in headrest,
the child seat must be attached to the outer rear seat.
“Universal” child seat category - a child seat designed for fastening on
the seat with the seat belt.
U
30
Safety
Fastening systems
Attachment points of the -system
Fig. 26
Labels of the system 

is a system for securing child seats quickly and safely.
There are two locking eyes between the rear exterior seats for fixing the child
in place using the

-system » Fig. 26.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the -system.
Never attach other child seats, belts or objects to the attachment points
eyes intended for the installation of a child seat with the -system – risk
of death!
Note
A child seat fitted with the  system can only be mounted in a vehicle fit-
ted with a  system if the child seat has been approved for this type of ve-
hicle. Further information is available from a ŠKODA Partner.
Child seats with the -system can be purchased from ŠKODA Original Ac-
cessories.
Use of child safety seats with the  system
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. This child safety seat is positioned in the deployment area of
the front passenger airbag. The airbag may cause the child severe, or even fatal injuries, in the event of it being deployed.
Overview of the usefulness of child seats fastened with the -system on each of the seats in accordance with the ECE-R 16 standard.
Group
Size class
of the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
0
up to 10 kg
E X IL-SU X
0+
up to 13 kg
E
X IL-SU XD
C
1
9-18 kg
D
X
IL-SU
IUF
X
C
B
B1
A
31
Transporting children safely
Group
Size class
of the child seat
a)
Front passenger seat Outer rear seats Rear seat middle
2
15-25 kg
- X IL-SU X
3
22-36 kg
- X IL-SU X
a)
The size category is shown on the label attached to the child seat.
IL-SU The seat is suitable for the use of approved child seats in  in the “Semi-Universal”category. The “Semi-Universal” category means that the child
seat is approved for use with the -system. Note the information in the list of vehicles which comes with the child seat.
IUF The seat is suitable for the  installation of a child seat with “Universal” approval and attachment with the   system attachment belt.
X The seat is not fitted with -system attachment points.
Attachment points of the  -system
Fig. 27
Attachment points of the 
-system
  is an attachment system that restricts the movement of the upper
part of the child seat.
The locking eyes
A
for attaching the belt of a child seat with the


system are located on the rear side of the rear seat backrests » Fig. 27.
Some country-specific models can also be equipped with a hitch point on the
back of the middle rear seat backrest.
WARNING
Always refer to the instructions from the manufacturer of the child seat
when installing and removing a child seat with the  -system.
Only use child seats with the   system on the seats equipped with
attachment points with the logo  .
Only ever attach one belt from the child seat to a locking eye.
32
Safety
33
Transporting children safely
Fig. 28 Cockpit example for LHD models
34
Operation
Operation
cockpit
Overview
Electric power windows 58
Door opening lever
55
Electric exterior mirror adjustment 68
Air outlet vents 94
Ticket holder 73
Operating lever (depending on equipment):
Indicator light and high-beam headlight 62
Speed regulating system
181
Speed limiter 183
Steering wheel with horn/with driver's front airbag
24
Buttons for operating the information system
46
Instrument cluster
36
Operating lever:
Windscreen wipers and washers
66
Information system
46
Depending on equipment fitted:
Storage compartment
74
Infotainment
95
Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
Left seat heating
72
Rear window heating
65
Central locking system 54
Hazard lights
64
Warning light for the front seat passenger airbag
27
Right seat heating
72
Interior rear-view mirror
68
SD card slot (in the storage compartment on the passenger
side)
97
Front passenger airbag 24
Storage compartment on the front passenger side 77
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Key switch for switching off the front passenger airbag (in front
passenger storage compartment) 27
Electric power window in the front passenger door 58
Storage compartment 73
Bar with keys depending on the equipment fitted:
START-STOP
166
Traction control (TCS) 176
Parking aid 177
Tyre Press. Loss Indicator 192
Light switch 61
Bonnet release lever 210
Regulator for headlamp beam adjustment for the headlights 61
Operating lever for adaptive cruise control
186
Steering wheel locking lever
19
Depending on equipment fitted:
Ignition lock
165
Starter button
165
Cup holder
75
Coin and card holders
74
Handbrake lever 168
Depending on equipment fitted:
Gearshift lever (manual gearbox)
169
Selector lever (automatic gearbox)
170
Storage compartment
74
USB input/AUX input 74
Depending on equipment fitted:
12-volt power socket
79
Cigarette lighter 79
Controls for heating/air conditioning
91
Note
The layout of the controls on right-hand drive vehicles differs partially from
that shown in this layout » Fig. 28.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
cockpit
Instruments and warning lights
Instrument cluster
Introduction
Fig. 29
Instrument cluster - Version 1
Fig. 30 Instrument cluster - Version 2
Engine revolutions counter » page 36
with warning lights » page 37
Display » page 46
1
2
Speedometer
with warning lights » page 37
Bar with warning lights » page 37
Operation key:
Set the time » page 46
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip) » page 46
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
» page 51
Coolant temperature gauge » page 37
Fuel gauge » page 37
The brightness of the instrument illumination is set automatically depending
on the ambient lighting throughout. If the visibility is poor and the lights are
not on, the brightness of the instrument lighting reduces to alert the driver to
switch on the lights in due time.
The brightness of the instrument lighting can be adjusted in the Infotainment
menu

Light
.
Rev counter
The tachometer
1
» Fig. 29 on page 36 or » Fig. 30 on page 36 shows the
actual engine speed per minute.
The beginning of the red scale range of the tachometer indicates the maxi-
mum permitted engine speed of a driven-in and operating warm engine.
You should shift into the next highest gear before the red scale of the revolu-
tion counter is reached or select mode D on the automatic gearbox.
The gear recommendation is important to note in order to maintain the opti-
mum engine speed » page 47.
CAUTION
The rev counter pointer may only move into the red area for a short time - oth-
erwise risk of engine damage!
3
4
5
6
7
36
Operation
Coolant temperature gauge
Fig. 31
Coolant temperature gauge
Applies to cars with the instrument cluster variant 1 » Fig. 29 on page 36.
The display » Fig. 31 only works if the ignition is switched on.
Cold range - The pointer is in the range
A
, the engine has not yet reached its
operating temperature. Avoid high speeds and high engine loads.
Operating range - The pointer is in the range
B
.
High temperature rangeThe pointer is in the range
C
. The coolant tempera-
ture is too high. The warning light illuminates in the instrument clus-
ter
» page 43.
Fuel gauge
Fig. 32 Fuel gauge: In the instrument cluster / the display of the instru-
ment cluster
The display » Fig. 32 only works if the ignition is switched on.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres.
If the fuel level reaches the reserve level
A
or
B
, the warning light illuminates
in the instrument cluster » page 42.
WARNING
For the vehicle systems to function correctly, and thus for safe driving,
there must be sufficient fuel in the tank. Never drain the fuel tank com-
pletely - risk of accident!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel can
cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the ex-
haust system.
Note
The arrow next to the symbol within the fuel gauge displays the installa-
tion location of the fuel filler on the right side of the vehicle.
Warning lights
Introduction
Handbrake » page 38
Brake system » page 38
Front seat belt warning light » page 39
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 39
Power steering
Steering lock (engine start push-button)
» page 39
Stabilisation control (ESC)
Traction control (ASR)
» page 39
Traction control (ASR) deactivated » page 40
Antilock brake system (ABS) » page 40
Rear fog light » page 40
Exhaust control system » page 40
Glow plug system (diesel engine) » page 40
 EPC fault light (petrol engine) » page 41
Airbag system » page 41
37
Instruments and warning lights
Tyre pressure » page 41
Fuel reserve » page 42
Turning signal system » page 42
Trailer turn signal lights » page 42
Fog lights » page 42
Speed regulating system
Speed limiter
» page 42
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox) » page 42
High beam » page 42
Automatic gearbox » page 42
Rear seat belt warning light » page 43
Alternator » page 43
Coolant » page 43
Engine oil pressure » page 44
Engine oil level » page 44
Bulb failure » page 44
Diesel particle filter (diesel engine) » page 44
Windscreen washer fluid level » page 45
START-STOP system » page 45
Display of a low temperature » page 45
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) » page 45
Distance warning (Front Assist) » page 45
Advance warning/emergency braking (Front
Assist)
» page 45
Emergency call » page 45
Service » page 45
The warning lights in the instrument cluster indicate certain functions or faults.
Some warning lights can be accompanied by acoustic signals and messages in
the display of the instrument cluster.
After switching on the ignition, some warning lights light up briefly as a func-
tion test. If the tested systems are OK, the corresponding warning lights go
out a few seconds after switching on the ignition or after starting the engine.
The warning lights are at the following locations in the instrument cluster
» Fig. 29 on page 36or » Fig. 30 on page 36.
Engine revolutions counter
1
Display
2
Speedometer
3
Bar with warning lights
4
Warning lights in the display
Depending on the importance the warning light(danger) or(warning) illu-
minates along with some of the warning lights in the bar with the warning
lights.
WARNING
Ignoring illuminated indicator lights and related messages or instructions
in the instrument cluster display may lead to serious personal injury or dam-
age to the vehicle.
If you have to stop for technical reasons, then park the vehicle at a safe
distance from the traffic, switch off the engine and activate the hazard
warning lights system » page 64. Place the warning triangle at the prescri-
bed distance.
The engine compartment of your car is a hazardous area. The following
warning instructions must be followed at all times when working in the en-
gine compartment » page 209.
handbrake
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the handbrake has been applied.
An acoustic signal will sound if you drive the vehicle above 5 km/h while the
handbrake is still on.
Release the handbrake.
Braking system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the brake fluid level in the brake system is too low.
Park the vehicle, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage.
38
Operation
WARNING
A fault to the braking system can increase the vehicle’s braking distance -
There is a risk of an accident!
Front seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up - the driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
At a speed of over 30 km/h the warning light flashes and an audible warning
sounds at the same time.
If the seat belt is not fastened by the driver or front passenger during the next
approx. 2 minutes, the warning signal is deactivated and the warning light
illuminates permanently.
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the ACC delay is not sufficient.
Apply the brake.
For more information about the ACC system » page 184.
Power steering/steering lock (engine start with button
press)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Fault in the power steering
lights up – this indicates a complete failure of the power steering and the
steering assist is no longer working (significantly higher steering forces).
lights up – this indicates a partial failure of the power steering and the
steering forces can be higher.
Switch off the ignition, start the engine again and travel a short distance.
If the warning light does not go off, stop the vehicle, stop driving. Seek
help from a specialist garage.
If the warning light does not go off, you can drive on, exercising appropri-
ate caution. Seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Steering lock defective (engine start push-button)
flashes
Message:
Steering lock faulty. Stop!
STOP VEHICLE STEERING FAULTY
Park the vehicle, and stop driving. After switching off the ignition, it is no
longer possible to lock the steering, to activate the electrical components
(e.g. Infotainment ), to switch on the ignition again and to start the engine.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
flashes
Message:
Steering lock: workshop!
STEERING WORKSHOP
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Steering lock not unlocked (engine start push-button)
flashes
Message:
Please move the steering wheel.
MOVE STEERING WHEEL
Move the steering wheel slightly back and forth, thereby facilitating unlock-
ing the steering lock.
If the steering does also not unlock then, the help of a specialist garage is re-
quired.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after the motor is restarted and a short drive, the indicator light does not go
out, there is a system error.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Stability Control (ESC)/Traction control (TCS)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the ESC or TCS is currently active.
39
Instruments and warning lights
lights up – there is an ESC or TCS fault.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
If the warning light comes on after starting the engine, the TCS may be
switched off for technical reasons.
Switch the ignition off and on again.
If the warning light does not illuminate after you switch the engine back on,
the ASR is fully functional again.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
More information about the ESC system » page 175 or TCS system
» page 176.
Traction control (TCS) deactivated
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the TCS system is deactivated.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is an ABS fault.
The vehicle will only be braked by the normal brake system without the ABS.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
WARNING
If warning light illuminates simultaneously with warning light
» page 38, Braking system , do not continue your journey! Seek help
from a specialist garage.
A fault to the ABS system or the braking system can increase the vehi-
cle's braking distance – there is a risk of an accident occurring!
Rear fog light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the rear fog light is switched on.
Emission control system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is a fault in the emission control system. The system makes
it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Preheating unit (diesel)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes possible operation emergency mode - there may be a noticeable reduc-
tion in engine performance.
There is a fault in the glow plug system if the warning light does not come
on or illuminates continuously.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
40
Operation
 EPC warning light (petrol)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
 lights up – there is a fault in the engine management system. The system
makes it possible to drive on in emergency mode – there may be a noticeable
reduction in engine performance.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Airbag system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
System fault
lights up
Message:
Error: airbag
AIRBAG ERROR
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The front passenger airbag has been disabled with the key switch
lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition has been switched on.
One of the airbags or a belt tensioner has been disabled by the diagnostic
tool
lights up for around 4 seconds after the ignition is switched on and then
flashes for approximately 12 seconds
Message:
Airbag/ belt tensioner deactivated.
AIRBAG/ BELT TENSIONER OFF
WARNING
If a fault in the airbag system occurs, there is a risk of the system not being
triggered in the event of an accident! Therefore, this must be checked im-
mediately by a specialized garage.
Tyre pressure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Change of tyre pressure values
lights up – there was a pressure change in one of the tyres.
Immediately reduce speed and avoid sudden steering and braking manoeu-
vres.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and check the tyres and their inflation
pressure » page 216.
Correct the tyre pressure, if necessary or replace the affected wheel
» page 221 or use the repair kit » page 225.
Save the tyre pressure values in the system » page 192.
System fault
flashes for approximately 1 minute and remains lit – there may be a fault in
the tyre pressure monitoring system.
Stop the vehicle, turn the ignition off and start the engine again.
If the warning light
flashes again after the engine has started, there is a sys-
tem error.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Disconnecting the vehicle battery
If the vehicle's battery has been disconnected and reconnected, the indicator
light
comes on after switching on the ignition.
The warning light should go out after driving a short distance.
If, after a short drive, the indicator light does not go out, there is a system er-
ror.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Other incidents
The following reasons can also apply if the warning light is illuminated.
The vehicle is loaded on one side. Distribute the load evenly.
The wheels of one axle are loaded more heavily (e.g. when towing a trailer or
when driving uphill or downhill).
Snow chains are fitted.
A wheel has been changed.
41
Instruments and warning lights
CAUTION
Under certain circumstances (e.g. sporty style of driving, wintry or unpaved
roads) the warning light in the instrument cluster can be delayed or does
not light up at all.
Fuel reserve
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the fuel level in the fuel tank is at the reserve level (approximately
7 litres).
Fill up with fuel » page 207.
Note
The text in the display goes out after refuelling and driving a short distance.
Turn signal system
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the left turn signal is turned on.
flashes – the right turn signal is turned on.
If there is a fault in the turn signal system, the warning light flashes at twice its
normal rate (does not apply when towing).
When the hazard warning light system is switched on, this will cause all of the
turn signal lights as well as both warning lights to flash.
Trailer turn signal lights
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the trailer turn signal lights are switched on.
If a trailer is hitched and the warning light is not flashing, one of the trailer
turn signal lights has failed.
Check the trailer bulbs.
Fog lights
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the fog lights are switched on.
Speed regulating system/speed limiter
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the vehicle speed is limited by the speed regulating system or
the adaptive cruise control or by the speed limiter.
flashes – the speed set with the speed limiter has been exceeded.
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Read and observe
on page 38 first.
lights up – apply the brake.
Main beam
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the main beam or the headlight flasher is switched on.
Automatic gearbox
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Gearbox overheated
The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox overheated. You can drive on.
GEARBOX OVERHEATED
Transmission overheated. You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox overheated. Stop! Log book!
STOP VEHICLE GEARBOX OVERHEAT
42
Operation
Stop driving! Stop the vehicle and turn off the engine.
You can continue your journey as soon as the warning light disappears.
If the warning light does not go off, stop driving! Seek help from a special-
ist garage.
Transmission problem
The warning light is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox faulty. Stop the vehicle safely!
GEARBOX FAULTY WORKSHOP
Park the vehicle, stop driving! Seek help from a specialist garage.
lights up
Message:
Gearbox in emergency mode. No reverse gear.
GEARBOX ERROR REV_ GEAR NOT AVAIL
or
Error: gearbox. Speed is limited.
GEARBOX ERROR
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Rear seat belt warning light
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – a rear seat belt is not fastened.
lights up – a rear seat belt is fastened.
When the seat belt is fastened/unfastened, the particular light lights up briefly
and indicates the current belt status!
Generator
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the battery is not being charged whilst the engine is running.
As the vehicle battery during your journey, are all non-essential electrical
loads (e.g. Infotainment) must be switched off.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
If in addition to the light the light lights up while driving, stop driving -
risk of engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage.
Coolant
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Coolant level too low
lights up
Message:
Check coolant! Log book!
ENGINE COOLANT PLEASE CHECK
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down.
Check the coolant level » page 212.
If the coolant level is within the specified range and the warning light
lights
up again, then there may be a malfunction of the cooling fan.
Switch off the ignition.
Check the fuse for the radiator fan, replace if necessary.
If the coolant level and fan fuse are both OK but the warning light
lights up
again,
stop driving!
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Coolant temperature too high
lights up
Message:
Engine overheat. Stop! Check the log book.
ENGINE OVERHEAT STOP
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and allow the engine to cool down.
Continue your journey only after the warning light has disappeared.
43
Instruments and warning lights
Engine oil pressure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
flashes – the engine oil pressure is too low.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level.
Even if the oil level is correct, do not drive any further if the warning light
is flashing. Also do not leave the engine running at an idling speed.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Engine oil level
Read and observe on page 38 first.
Engine oil level too low
lights up
Message:
Please add engine oil.
ADD OIL
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine, and check the engine oil level, top up
if necessary.
The warning light will go out if the bonnet is left open for more than 30 sec-
onds. If the engine oil is not refilled, the warning light will come on again after
driving about 100 km.
Engine oil level too high
lights up
Message:
Please reduce the oil level.
OIL LEVEL TOO HIGH
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
Fault on the engine oil level sensor
lights up
Message:
Oil sensor: please visit workshop.
OIL SENSOR WORKSHOP
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
CAUTION
If it is not possible to top up with engine oil, stop driving - there is a risk of
engine damage! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist
garage.
Lamp failure
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – one of the lamps is faulty.
A message will appear in the display about the affected lamp.
Diesel particle filter (diesel)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The diesel particulate filter separates and burns the soot particles from the ex-
haust.
lights up – the filter is clogged with soot.
To clean the filter, and where traffic conditions permit »
, drive as follows for
at least 15 minutes or until the indicator light goes out.
4th or 5th gear engaged (automatic transmission: position D / S).
Vehicle speed at least 70 km/h.
Engine speed between 1,800-2,500 rpm.
If the filter is properly cleaned, the warning light extinguishes.
If the filter is not properly cleaned, the warning light does not go out and
the warning light begins to flash.
You can drive on, exercising appropriate caution. Seek assistance from a spe-
cialist garage immediately.
44
Operation
WARNING
Always adjust the speed and driving style to the actual weather, road, ter-
rain and traffic conditions.
The diesel particulate filter reaches very high temperatures - there is a
fire hazard and serious injury could be caused. Therefore, never stop the
vehicle at places where the underside of your vehicle can come into con-
tact with flammable materials, such as dry grass, undergrowth, leaves, spil-
led fuel etc.
CAUTION
As long as the warning light illuminates, one must take into account an
increased fuel consumption and a power reduction of the engine.
Using diesel fuel with increased sulphur content can significantly reduce the
service life of the diesel particle filter. A ŠKODA Partner will be able to tell you
which countries use diesel fuel with increased sulphur content.
Note
We encourage you to avoid constant short journeys. This will improve the
combustion process of the soot particles in the diesel particulate filter.
Windscreen washer fluid level
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the windscreen washer fluid level is too low.
Top up the windscreen washer fluid» page 211.
START-STOPsystem
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The warning lights indicate the status of the START-STOP sys-
tem» page 166.
Display of a low temperature
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the outside temperature is below +4 °C.
WARNING
Even at temperatures around +4 °C, black ice may still be on the road sur-
face! Do not only rely upon the information given on the outside tempera-
ture display that there is no ice on the road.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
The warning lights indicate the condition of the ACC sys-
tem» page 184.
Front Assist
Read and observe
on page 38 first.
The warning light
is only shown in the MAXI DOTdisplay.
lights up – the safe distance to the vehicle in front is below the mini-
mum.
Information on the Front Assist system » page 189.
Advance warning / Emergency braking (Front Assist)
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – the system has recognized the risk of a collision or automatically
triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre » page 189.
Emergency call
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – there is a fault in the emergency call system.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
Service
Read and observe on page 38 first.
lights up – information regarding a service appointment that is due
» page 51, Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval.
45
Instruments and warning lights
Information system
Driver information system
Display in the instrument cluster
Fig. 33 Display types: MAXI DOT/Segment Display
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the information system uses the dis-
play in the instrument cluster to provide the following information » Fig. 33.
Time / symbols of the Infotainment voice control
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Compass display
Driving data (multifunction display)
Warning lights
Information messages
Door alarm
Outside temperature
Cruise control / speed limiter
Total distance travelled
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Time
Warning lights of the START-STOP system
Engaged gear / gear recommendation
Selector lever positions for the automatic gearbox
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Outside temperature
Warning lights
Driving data (multifunction display)
Total distance travelled
Distance travelled by resetting the memory (trip)
Cruise control / speed limiter
Service interval display
Information messages
Fuel gauge
Door, luggage compartment and bonnet alarm
When the door or luggage compartment / bonnet is open, a graphic warning
appears in the display.
An acoustic signal will also sound if you drive the vehicle above 6 km/h when a
door is open.
Reset counter for distance travelled (trip)
Press button
A
» Fig. 34 on page 46.
Setting the time
Fig. 34
Button in the instrument cluster
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 34 until the
time
is shown in the display.
Release the button
A
and the system switches to the hour setting function.
Press the button
A
again and set the hours.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the minutes setting.
Press the button
A
again and set the minutes.
Wait 4 seconds, the system switches to the initial setting.
9
10
11
46
Operation
Gear recommendation
Fig. 35
Information on the selected
gear / gear recommendation
A suitable engaged gear or, where appropriate, a recommended gear is dis-
played, with the aim of conserving the life of the engine and increasing driving
efficiency.
Display » Fig. 35
Optimal gear engaged
Gear recommendation (e.g.
means that it is advantageous to switch
from 3. to 4. gear)
For vehicles with automatic transmission the recommended gear will be
shown provided the mode for manual switching (Tiptronic) is selected.
WARNING
The driver is always responsible for selecting the correct gear in different
driving situations (e.g. when overtaking).
Vehicle status
Fig. 36
Vehicle status
Certain functions and conditions of individual vehicle systems are checked
continuously when the ignition is switched on. If there is a fault in the system,
the following message will appear in the display of the instrument cluster.
While the operational faults remain unrectified, the messages are always indi-
cated again. After the message is displayed for the first time, the warning
lights (danger) or (warning) continue to be displayed.
The vehicle status can be displayed in the Infotainment in menu

Vehicle status
.
In the screen, information regarding vehicle condition or function of the tyre
pressure monitor is displayed.
Using the function surfaces , select the Vehicle status menu item.
Function surfaces and screen display » Fig. 36
A
Vehicle representation (the zones of the vehicle are shown in different
colours, corresponding to any warning messages that occur. The warn-
ing messages are displayed once you touch the “vehicle”)
 No message/warning messages relating to vehicle status and the num-
ber (if there is only one message, one warning message text is dis-
played)
Display information about the status of the START-STOP system
Activation/deactivation of messages relating to the START-STOP
system messages in another screen display
Operation of the information system
Operation via the operating lever
Fig. 37
Buttons on the control lever
47
Information system
Operating the multifunction display
Press (up or down) - Select data / Setting values
Press Show / confirm entry
Operating the MAXI DOT display
Press (up or down) - move to the selected menu
Hold (up or down) - display main menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Operation via the multifunction steering wheel
Fig. 38
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Buttons/dials on the multifunction steering wheel
Switch on/off voice control
Turn - sets the volume
Press - sound on / off
Skip to next track/station
Switch to previous track/station
Display the assistance systems menu
Press - display the Telephone menu, accept/end the call; call selected con-
tact
Hold - repeat last call; reject call
Operating the multifunction display
Turn - select data / set values
Press Show / confirm entry
A
B
A
B
A
B
Operating the MAXI DOT display
Hold - display main menu
Press - return to a previous level in the menu
Turn - move in the selected menu
Press - confirm selected menu item
Driving data (Multifunction display)
Introduction
The driving data display is only possible with the ignition switched on.
The units can be set in the Infotainment in the

Units
menu.
Information Overview
Overview of driving data (depending on the vehicle equipment).
Range - Drive distance in km which can be covered with the existing tank ca-
pacity and with the same driving style. If you drive more efficiently this value
can increase.
Average fuel consumption - Is calculated continuously since the last time that
the memory was erased. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the
first 100 m driven.
Current fuel consumption - When the vehicle is stationary or moving slowly,
the fuel consumption is displayed in l/h (in models in some countries the fol-
lowing appears --,- km/l).
Oil temperature if the temperature is lower than 50 °C or if there is a fault in
the system for checking the oil temperature, the  symbols are displayed.
Warning at when the preset speed is exceededallows the setting of a speed
limit where, if exceeded, an acoustic warning signal and a warning message ap-
pears on the display of the instrument cluster.
Current Speed - Digital speedometer.
Average speed - Value constantly recalculated, for distance since last clearing
the memory. After erasing the memory, no data will appear for the first 300 m
driven.
Distance driven - Distance driven since the memory was last cleared.
B
48
Operation
Driving time - Driving time since last clearing the memory.
Coolant temperature - If the coolant temperature is in the range 70-120 °C,
the engine operating temperature has been reached. If the temperature is be-
low 70 ° C, high engine speeds and straining the engine should be avoided. If
the temperature is over 120°C, the warning light lights up in the instrument
cluster » page 43.
Infotainment display
Fig. 39
Driving data
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Driving data
.
Screen display » Fig. 39
Distance travelled
Driving time
Average speed
Average fuel consumption
Transit point rating (
DriveGreen
Function)
Graphic fuel level display (if the estimated range is less than 300 km, the
vehicle starts to approach the symbol )
Approximate range
Use the function surfaces to select one of the following presets.
Since start - Driving data for the individual trip
Long-term - Long-term driving data
Since refuel - Data since refuelling
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Warning at when exceeding the set speed
The system offers the possibility to set a speed limit beyond which an acoustic
warning signal will sound and the following warning message appears in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Adjust the speed limit while the vehicle is stationary
Select the menu item
Warning at
at () or () and confirm.
Set the desired speed limit is 5 km/h steps.
Confirm the set value, or wait several seconds; your settings will be saved
automatically.
Adjusting the speed limit while the vehicle is moving
Select the menu item
Warning at
at () or () and confirm.
Drive at the desired speed.
Confirm the current speed as the speed limit.
The set speed limit can be manually adjusted later if needed.
Reset speed limit
Select the menu item
Warning at
at (
) or
(
) and confirm.
By confirming the speed stored in the memory, the speed limit is reset.
The speed limit set mode is stored even after the ignition is switched off and
on. After a gap between driving exceeding 2 hours, the pre-set speed limit is
deactivated.
Memory
Fig. 40
Memory display: MAXI DOT dis-
play () / Segment display ()
The system saves the data in the three memories described below which are
displayed at the position
A
» Fig. 40.
49
Information system
Since start
() or “1” ()
Driving data is stored from when the ignition is switched on to when it is
switched off. If the trip is continued within 2 hours after switching off the ig-
nition, new data will also flow into the calculation of the current driving infor-
mation.
If the trip is interrupted for more than 2 hours, the memory is automatically
erased.
Long-term
() and “2” ()
The memory gathers driving data from any number of individual journeys up to
a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes driving time or 9 999 kilometres driven.
The indicator is automatically set back to zero if one of the indicated values is
exceeded.
Since refuel
(
) or “3” (
)
The driving data is stored in the memory since the last fuel refuelling.
The memory is erased automatically the next time you fill up.
To choose the memory bank, confirm the selected indication again and se-
lect the desired memory.
To delete the memory bank of the chosen selection, hold down the button
confirming the selection.
The following driving data is stored in different memory banks.
Average fuel consumption
Distance travelled
Average speed
Driving time
Note
Disconnecting the vehicle battery will delete all memory data.
MAXI DOT display
Introduction
The MAXI DOT display is a user interface which, depending on the equipment
configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the multifunction
display, the assistance systems etc.
The instrument cluster display is a user interface which, depending on the
equipment configuration, provides information about the Infotainment, the
multifunction display, the assistance systems etc.
The menus with details can be operated and displayed using the buttons on
the operating lever or the multifunction steering wheel » page 47.
Main menu items (depending on vehicle equipment)
Driving data
» page 48
Assist systems
» page 51
Navigation
» page 50
Audio
» page 50
Telephone
» page 51;
Vehicle
» page 47
Note
If warning messages are displayed, these messages must first be confirmed
to access the main menu.
The display language can be set in the Infotainment » page 106, Infotainment
language settings or » page 113, Infotainment language settings.
For vehicles without Infotainment, the display language can only be adjusted
by a specialist garage.
Menu item
Navigation
The following information is displayed in the
Navigation
menu item.
Driving recommendations
Compass
Last destinations
Menu item
Audio
The following information is displayed in the
Audio
menu item.
Radio
Station currently being played (name/frequency).
The selected frequency range (e.g. FM) optionally with the number of the
station button (e.g. FM 3), if the station is stored in the memory list.
List of available stations (if more than 5 stations can be received).
TP traffic announcements.
50
Operation
Media
Name of the track being played, if necessary, further information regarding
title (e.g. artist, album name), if this information is stored as a so called ID3
tag on the audio source.
Menu
Telephone
The call list with the following symbols is displayed in the
Telephone
menu item.
Incoming call
Outgoing call
Missed call
Symbols in the display
Telephone battery charge (this function is only supported by some mobile
phones)
Signal strength (this function is only supported by some mobile phones)
A telephone connected to the Infotainment system
Missed calls (if there are several missed calls, the number of calls is shown
next to the symbol)
Switch-off microphone
Apple CarPlay
An external device connected to the Infotainment system via Apple CarPlay
can be operated via the multifunction steering wheel as well as via menus in
the instrument cluster display.
The following symbols are displayed in the
Telephone
menu option.
Answer the incoming call
Reject incoming call / end call
Menu item
Assist systems
In the menu item
Assist systems
, the Front Assist system can be activated/deac-
tivated.
Service intervals
Introduction
Compliance with the service intervals is of crucial importance for the serv-
ice life and value retention of the vehicle. Never exceed the service date.
The specialist garage will inform you about the type of service interval, the op-
tion to change it, and the service scope.
The service interval display in the display of the instrument cluster will notify
you when a service is due.
Service record
A specialist garage will confirm the corresponding service record in the service
information system called Digital Service Plan.
We recommend that you always print out the respective service record.
Note
The customer is responsible for covering the cost of all services including
changing or replenishing the oil, even during the warranty period, unless stated
otherwise in the ŠKODA AUTO warranty terms or other binding agreements.
Displaying the distance and days until the next service interval
Fig. 41
Button in the instrument cluster
Switch on the ignition.
Press and hold the button
A
» Fig. 41 until the
Service
menu item is shown in
the display.
Release the button
A
.
In the display, the symbol appears for 4 seconds along with the following
message for the kilometres or days to the next service appointment.
51
Information system
Information regarding the remaining kilometres and days until the next service
appointment can also be displayed in Infotainment in menu

Service
.
Service messages
Before the next service date has been reached, the symbol as well as a
message about the mileage or days until the next service event appears in the
display after the ignition is switched on.
Once the service interval is reached, the symbol appears in the display after
the ignition is switched on, together with the message:
Resetting the service interval display
Have the display reset by a specialist garage.
We recommend that you do not reset the service interval display yourself. In-
correctly setting the service interval display can cause problems to the vehicle.
Variable service interval
For vehicles with variable service intervals, after resetting the oil change serv-
ice display in a specialist garage, the values of the new service interval are dis-
played, which are based on the previous operating conditions of the vehicle.
These values are then continuously matched according to the actual operating
conditions of the vehicle.
Unlocking and opening
Unlocking and locking
Introduction
The vehicle is equipped with a central locking system which makes it possible
to unlock / lock all the doors, the fuel filler flap and boot lid simultaneously.
The door unlocking can be adjusted individually » page 55.
The unlocking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing
twice.
If you unlock the vehicle and do not open a door or the boot lid within the next
45 seconds, the vehicle will lock again automatically.
The locking of the vehicle is displayed by the turn signal lights flashing once.
If the driver's door has been opened, the vehicle cannot be locked.
If the doors or the boot lid remain open after the vehicle doors have been
locked, the turn signal lights do not flash until they have been closed.
WARNING
Never leave the key in the vehicle when you exit the vehicle. Unauthorised
persons (e.g. children) could lock the vehicle, turn on the ignition or start
the engine - danger of injury and accidents!
When leaving the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely in-
dependent, such as children, unattended in the vehicle. These individuals
might not be able to leave the vehicle on their own or to help themselves.
At very high or very low temperatures can be fatal!
CAUTION
Each key contains electronic components; therefore it must be protected
against moisture and severe shocks.
Keep the key grooves clean. Impurities (textile fibres, dust etc.) have a nega-
tive effect on the functionality of the locking cylinder and ignition lock.
52
Operation
Unlocking/locking with the key via the lock cylinder
Fig. 42
Left side of the vehicle: Turning
the key for unlocking and lock-
ing the vehicle
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » Fig. 42
Unlocking the vehicle
Locking the vehicle
CAUTION
If the locking cylinder is provided with a cap, the cap must be removed before
unlocking/locking the vehicle with the key » page 230.
Unlocking/locking with the remote control key
Fig. 43
Key with pop-out key bit
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Description of the key » Fig. 43
Unlock button
Lock button
Safety button to unlock the boot lid
Button for popping out/pushing in the key bit
Battery status warning light - if the warning light does not flash when you
press a button on the key, the battery is discharged
Unlocking / locking the boot lid
By pressing lightly on the button the lid is unlocked.
Bypressing downon the button the lid is unlocked and unlatched (part-
opened).
If the lid is unlocked or released with the button , then the lid is automatical-
ly locked after closing. The period of time after which the flap is locked can be
set » page 58.
CAUTION
The remote control may be affected by signal superimposition by transmit-
ters close to the car.
The range of the remote control key is about 30 m. The battery must be re-
placed if the central locking only reacts to the remote control at a distance of
less than approximately 3 m away » page 230.
Locking/unlocking - KESSY
Fig. 44 Vehicle unlocking / vehicle locking
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The KESSY system (Keyless Entry Start Exit System) enables unlocking and
locking of the vehicle without actively using the remote control key.
Grip the door handle to unlock the vehicle » Fig. 44 - .
Touch the sensor on the door handle with your finger to lock » Fig. 44 -
the vehicle.
A
B
53
Unlocking and opening
When unlocking/locking the vehicle, the key must be at a maximum distance
of approximately 1.5 m from the front door handle.
Information on locking
On vehicles fitted with automatic gearbox, the selector lever must be moved
into the position P before unlocking.
After locking the car, it is not possible to unlock it within the next 2 seconds by
touching the door handle. This can be used to check whether the vehicle is
locked.
The KESSY system is activated when the vehicle is locked with the button
on the key » page 54.
Protection against inadvertently locking the key in the vehicle
If one of the doors is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which
the vehicle was locked remains in the passenger compartment, the vehicle is
automatically unlocked. After automatically unlocking, the turn signal lights
will flash four times. If no door is opened within 45 seconds, the vehicle is au-
tomatically locked again.
If the boot lid is closed after locking the vehicle and the key with which the
vehicle was locked remains in the luggage compartment, the lid is automatical-
ly unlatched (partially opened). After automatically unlocking, the turn signal
lights will flash four times. The boot lid remains unlatched (partially opened);
the other doors remain locked.
CAUTION
Some types of gloves can affect the unlocking or locking device via the sen-
sors in the door handle.
Deactivating KESSY
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Lock the vehicle with the button on the key.
To check the deactivation, wait at least 10 seconds and then pull the door
handle. The door must remain locked.
The KESSY system is activated again automatically after the vehicle is un-
locked.
Vehicle locking / unlocking with the central locking button
Fig. 45
Central locking button
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Conditions for the locking/unlocking using the central locking button.
The vehicle is not locked from the outside.
All doors are closed.
To lock/unlock, press the
» Fig. 45 button.
Locking is indicated by illumination of the
symbol in the button.
The following applies after locking.
Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The doors can be unlocked and opened from the inside by a single pull on the
opening lever of the respective door.
WARNING
Doors locked from the inside make it difficult for rescuers to get into the
vehicle in an emergency – danger to life!
SafeLock
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
SafeLock prevents the doors from behind opened from inside as well as win-
dow operation. This makes an attempted break-in to the vehicle more difficult.
Activating
SafeLock is activated when the vehicle is locked from the outside.
54
Operation
This function is pointed out by the following message on the display of the in-
strument cluster after the ignition is switched off.
Check SAFELOCK! Owner's manual!
CHECK SAFELOCK
Activation display
When SafeLock is activated the warning light in the driver's door flashes for 2
seconds in rapid succession, then starts to flash at longer intervals.
Deactivating
By locking twice within 2 seconds.
or: by deactivating the interior monitor and the towing protection
» page 57.
The warning light in the driver door flashes rapidly for about 2 seconds, then
goes out and starts to flash at longer intervals after about 30 seconds.
If the vehicle is locked and the SafeLock system is switched off, the door can
be opened separately from the inside by a single pull on the opening lever.
The SafeLock switches on the next time the vehicle is locked.
WARNING
If the car is locked and the SafeLock system activated, no-one may remain
in the car as it will then not be possible to either unlock a door or open a
window from the inside. The locked doors make it more difficult for rescu-
ers to get into the vehicle in an emergency – risk to life!
Individual settings
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The following functions of central locking can be individually adjusted in the In-
fotainment menu

Opening and closing
.
All doors
The function allows you to unlock all doors, the boot lid and the fuel filler flap.
Single door
The function allows you to only unlock the driver's door and the fuel filler flap
with the radio remote control. KESSY allows the unlocking of a single door
which is in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The other doors
and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is unlocked or
touched.
Doors on a vehicle side
This function enables you to unlock both doors on the driver's side and the fuel
filler flap with the radio remote control unit. KESSY allows the unlocking of
both doors which are in the vicinity of the key, as well as the fuel filler flap. The
other doors and the boot lid are only unlocked once the door handle is un-
locked or touched.
Automatic locking/unlocking
This function enables the locking of all doors and the boot lid from a speed of
15 km / h. Opening the doors and the boot lid from the outside is not possible.
The renewed unlocking of the doors and the boot lid is carried out when the
ignition key is removed or when the door is opened from inside (depending on
the individual setting for the central locking system).
Opening/closing the door
Fig. 46
Door handle
55
Unlocking and opening
Fig. 47 Door opening lever - Variant 1 / Variant 2
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
To open from the outside, unlock the vehicle and pull the door handle
A
in
the direction of the arrow » Fig. 46.
To open from the inside pull the door opening lever
B
» Fig. 47 and push the
door away from you.
To the lock from the inside grab handle
C
and close the door.
WARNING
The door must be closed properly, otherwise it could open whilst the ve-
hicle is in motion - risk of fatality!
Only open and close the door when there is no one in the opening/closing
range – risk of injury!
Never drive with the doors open - danger to life!
An opened door can close spontaneously if there is a strong wind or the
vehicle is on a slope – risk of injury.
Child safety lock
Fig. 48 Rear door: Switching the child safety system on/off
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
The child safety lock prevents the rear door from being opened from the in-
side. The door can only be opened from the outside.
Switching on and off
Toturn on the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position
» Fig. 48.
Toturn off the child safety lock, turn the vehicle key to position.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 52 first.
Synchronising the remote control
If the buttons on the remote control key have been depressed several times
beyond the effective range of the equipment or the battery has been replaced
in the remote control key and the vehicle cannot be unlocked with the remote
control, the key must be synchronised.
Press any button on the remote control key.
Unlock the door with the key in the lock cylinder within 1 minute of pressing
the button.
Fault with the central locking
If the warning light in the driver's door initially flashes quickly for around 2 sec-
onds, and then illuminates for 30 seconds without interruption before flashing
again slowly, you will need to seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
56
Operation
In the event of a failure in the central locking system, the vehicle doors and the
boot lid can emergency locked or unlocked » page 230.
Failure of the KESSY system
If there is a fault in the KESSY system, the appropriate error message is dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Low voltage of the key battery
If the voltage of the key battery is too low, a message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster referring to the need to replace the battery. Replace the
battery » page 230.
Anti-theft alarm system
Introduction
The alarm system triggers audible and visual signals if an attempt is made to
break into the vehicle (hereafter referred to as alarm).
The alarm system is activated automatically approximately 30 seconds after
the vehicle is locked. This is automatically disabled after release.
CAUTION
Before leaving the vehicle, check that all doors and windows are closed in or-
der to ensure that the alarm system is fully operational.
Note
The alarm system has its own power source, service life of which is 5 years. In
order to ensure functionality of the alarm system, we recommend that you get
the alarm checked after this time by a specialist garage.
Alarm trigger
Read and observe on page 57 first.
The alarm is triggered when one of the following unauthorised actions is acti-
vated on the vehicle with an activated warning system.
Opening the bonnet.
Opening the boot lid.
Opening the doors.
Manipulation of the ignition lock.
Towing the vehicle.
Movement in the vehicle.
Sudden and significant voltage failure of the electrical system.
Uncoupling the trailer.
An alarm is triggered also when the driver's door is unlocked and opened by
the lock cylinder.
The alarm is switched off by pressing thebutton on the key or switching on
the ignition.
Interior monitor and towing protection
Fig. 49
Button for interior monitor and
towing protection
Read and observe on page 57 first.
As soon as the interior monitor detects movements inside the locked vehicle,
it triggers the alarm.
As soon as the anti-towing protection detects tilts in the locked vehicle, it
triggers the alarm.
These functions should be deactivated if there is a possibility that the alarm
will be triggered by movements (e.g. by people or animals) within the vehicle
interior or if the vehicle has to be transported (e.g. by train or ship) or towed.
Deactivating
Switch off the ignition and open the driver's door.
Press the button on the centre column on the driver side » Fig. 49; the
symbol lights up in the button.
Lock the vehicle within 30 seconds.
Safelock is switched off during deactivation.
57
Unlocking and opening
CAUTION
The opened glasses storage compartment reduces the effectiveness of the in-
terior monitor. To ensure the full functionality of the interior monitor, the
glasses storage compartment must always be closed before locking the vehi-
cle.
Boot lid
Introduction
WARNING
Never drive with the tailgate fully opened or slightly ajar otherwise ex-
haust gases may get into the interior of the vehicle – risk of poisoning.
Ensure that the lock is properly engaged after closing the lid. Otherwise,
the lid might open suddenly while the vehicle is moving, even if the lid was
locked – There is a risk of an accident!
Make sure that when closing the boot lid, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
Do not press on the rear window when closing the boot lid, it could crack
– risk of injury!
Opening / closing the boot lid
Fig. 50 Opening / closing the boot lid
Read and observe on page 58 first.
To open the boot lid, press button
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 50.
Raise the lid in the direction of the arrow
2
.
To close, grab the mount
B
and pull in the direction of arrow
3
.
Note
Button
A
» Fig. 50 is disabled when starting off or driving at a speed of over 5
km/h. The button is reactivated when the vehicle has stopped and a door is
opened.
Delayed locking of the boot lid
Read and observe on page 58 first.
If the boot lid is unlocked with the buttonon the key, then the boot lid is au-
tomatically locked after closing.
The period after which the boot lid is locked automatically can be extended by
a specialist garage.
CAUTION
There is a risk of unwanted entry into the vehicle before the boot lid is locked
automatically.
Window operation
Introduction
WARNING
Always close the window carefully and in a controlled manner. Otherwise,
you may cause considerable crushing injuries to yourself or fellow passen-
gers.
Power windows in the driver's door and the rear doors are equipped with
a force limiter (only applies to the Variant 2 ) » page 60. If there is an ob-
stacle (e.g. If a body part gets trapped), the closing process is stopped and
the window goes down by several centimetres. The windows should never-
theless be closed carefully – risk of injury.
CAUTION
Keep the windows clean (free of ice and similar) to ensure the correct func-
tionality of the electric windows.
Always close the electric windows before disconnecting the battery.
58
Operation
Note
If the windows are opened, dust as well as other dirt can get into the vehicle
and in addition the wind noise is more at certain speeds.
Mechanical windows
Fig. 51
Window Operation: Left/right
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
To open, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
A
» Fig. 51.
To close, turn the crank in the direction of arrow
B
.
Electric power windows
Fig. 52 Buttons for window-openers: Version 1 / version 2
Fig. 53
Button of the window lifter on
the passenger side
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
The electrical power windows can only be operated when the ignition is
switched on.
Depending on the equipment configuration, the front windows - Variant 1 or
the front and rear windows - Variant 2 can be operated by pushing/pulling the
door buttons in the driver’s door » Fig. 52.
The window in the front passenger door and the windows in the rear doors
(variant 2) are operated via the button in each door.
Power window buttons » Fig. 52
Front door left
Front door right
Rear door, left
Rear door, right
Deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors (the deactivation may be
advantageous if, for example, children are transported on the rear seats)
Opening/closing windows
To open, lightly press the appropriate button down and hold it until the win-
dow has moved into the desired position.
To close, pull gently on the top edge of the corresponding button and hold
until the window has moved into the desired position.
In Variant 2 » Fig. 52, the driver’s window can be automatically fully
opened/closed by pushing or pulling the button up to the stop. Pushing/ pulling
the button again causes the window to stop immediately.
Deactivating/activating buttons in the rear doors
To deactivate/activate the buttons in the rear doors, press the
E
button. If
the buttons are deactivated, the warning light lights up in button
E
.
A
B
C
D
E
59
Unlocking and opening
Force limiter
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
Only version 2 of the power windows is equipped with the power limiter
(does not apply to the passenger window).
If there is an obstacle, the closing process is stopped and the window goes
down by several centimetres.
If the obstacle prevents the window from being closed during the next 10 sec-
onds, the closing process is interrupted once again and the window goes down
by several centimetres.
If you attempt to close the window again within 10 seconds of the window be-
ing moved down for the second time, even though the obstacle was not yet
been removed, the closing process is only stopped. During this time it is not
possible to automatically close the window. The force limiter is still switched
on.
The force limiter is only not operational if you attempt to close the window
again within the next 10 seconds – the window will now close with full force!
If you wait longer than 10 seconds, the force limiter is switched on again.
WARNING
Variant 1 of the electric power window » Fig. 52 on page 59 has no force
limiter. The windows should be closed carefully – risk of injury!
The passenger window in variant 2 of the electric power windows
» Fig. 52 on page 59 has no force limiter. The window should nevertheless
be closed carefully – risk of injury!
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 58 first.
Repeatedly opening and closing the window can cause the window mechanism
to overheat and become temporarily blocked. You will be able to operate the
window again as soon as the operating mechanisms has cooled down.
After disconnecting the vehicle battery, automatic opening/closing the driver's
window can be deactivated (applies to variant 2). In this case, the system must
be activated as follows.
Activating window operation
Switch on the ignition.
Pull the top edge of the button and close the window.
Release the button.
Pull up the respective button and hold for 1 second.
60
Operation
Lights and visibility
Light
Introduction
The lights work only with the ignition on, unless otherwise stated.
For the basic position of the light switch, use position .
Note
The headlights may mist up temporarily. When the light is on, the light-emit-
ting surface demists after a short time.
Operating the lights
Fig. 54
Light switch and control dial for
headlight range adjustment
Toswitch the lights on/off,turn the
A
» Fig. 54 switch to one of the following
positions (equipment-dependent).
Switching off lights (except daytime running lights)
Switching the light on/off automatically » page 62
Switching on the parking lights or parking lights on both sides » page 64
Switch on low beam
Depending on the vehicle load, adjust the headlight range by turning the con-
troller
B
» Fig. 54 to the following positions.
Front seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot empty
All seats occupied, boot loaded
Driver seat occupied, boot loaded

WARNING
Always adjust the headlight beam to meet the following conditions - other-
wise there is a risk of an accident.
The vehicle does not dazzle other road users, especially oncoming vehi-
cles.
The beam range is sufficient for safe driving.
Note
If, with a dipped beam, the ignition is turned off, then the dipped beam will
automatically switch off and the parking lights will come on. Does not apply to
the position , as long as the conditions are met for the COMING HOME
function . The parking lights are switched off when the ignition key is removed
(for vehicles with the start button, after opening the driver's door).
If there is a fault in the light switch, the low beam comes on automatically.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights (hereinafter only referred to as "function") lights
the front and rear vehicle area (only valid for some countries).
The lights are switched on automatically if the following conditions are
met.
The light switch is in the position
or

.
The ignition is switched on.
The parking aid is activated.
Activating/deactivating function on vehicles with Infotainment
The function can be deactivated/activated in the Infotainment system in menu

Light
.
Deactivating on vehicles without Infotainment
Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator/main beam lever towards the steering
wheel, push down and hold in this position.
Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible
signal sounds (about 3 s).
Activating on vehicles without Infotainment
Turn off the ignition, pull the indicator/main beam lever towards the steering
wheel, push up and hold in this position.
Switch on the ignition and hold the lever in the above position until an audible
signal sounds (about 3 s)..
61
Lights and visibility
WARNING
Always switch on the low beam when the visibility is poor.
Turn signal and main beam
Fig. 55
Operating lever: Turn signal and
main beam operation
Control stalk positions » Fig. 55
Switch on right turn signal
Switch on left turn signal
Switch on high beam
Switching off main beam / switching on headlamp flasher (spring-loaded
position)
The main beam can only be switched on when the low beam lights are on.
The headlight flasher can be used even if the ignition is switched off.
The turn signal switches off automatically, depending on the steering angle af-
ter completing the turn.
Comfort flashing
When the operating lever is pressed lightly up or down, the indicator in ques-
tion flashes three times.
If during the convenience turn signal, the operating lever is pressed in the op-
posite direction, the indicating will stop.
Comfort flashing can be activated / deactivated in the Infotainment menu

Light
.
WARNING
Only turn on the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users will
not be dazzled.

Automatic driving light control
Fig. 56
Light switch: Position 
The light switch is in position  » Fig. 56 then depending on the equipment
the automatic switch on / off the lights corresponding to the light or weather
conditions (rain) takes place.
If the light switch is in position

, the lettering

illuminates next to the
light switch. If the light is switched on automatically, the symbol
also illumi-
nates next to the light switch.
Automatic driving light control in the rain (hereafter referred to as function)
The dipped beam is switched on automatically if the following conditions are
met.
The parking aid is activated.
The light switch is in the position

.
The windscreen wipers are on for more than 15 s.
The light turns off automatically about 4 minutes after turning off the wipers.
Setting, activation/deactivation
The following functions can be activated/deactivated in the Infotainment
menu

Light
.
Sensitivity adjustment of the sensor for determining the lighting conditions
for automatic driving light control
Automatic driving-light control during rain
WARNING
The automatic driving lamp control (position ) only acts as a support
and does not release the driver from his responsibility to check the light
and, if necessary, to switch on the lights depending on the prevailing light
conditions.
62
Operation
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in the
holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor -
the system can be affected.
Fog lights/rear fog light
Fig. 57
Light switch - Switch front/rear
fog light
Switching on the fog lights / rear fog lights is possible if the following con-
ditions apply.
The lights switch is in position

,
or
» Fig. 57.
To switch on the fog lights, turn the light switch to position
1
; the warning
light illuminates in the instrument cluster.
To turn on the rear fog light, pull the light switch to position
2
, the indicator
light
will light up in the instrument cluster.
If the vehicle is not fitted with fog lights, the rear fog light is switched on by
pulling out the light switch to the only possible setting.
The fog lights/rear fog light are switched off in the reverse order.
Note
If an accessory is connected to the trailer socket, the rear fog lamp does not
light up on the vehicle.
Fog lights with CORNER function
The CORNER function automatically switches on the fog lights on the respec-
tive side of the vehicle (e.g. when cornering or steering), if the following condi-
tions are fulfilled.
The turn signal is switched on or the front wheels are severely locked (in
the event of conflict between the two versions, the turn signal has the
higher priority).
The vehicle speed is below 40 km/h.
The low beam is switched on.
The fog lights are not switched on.
The two fog lights are switched on when you shift into the reverse gear.
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME
The function COMING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after switching off the ignition and opening the driver's door.
The function LEAVING HOME ensures that the vehicle's environment is illumi-
nated after unlocking the vehicle with the radio remote control unit.
The function switches the light on only if there is poorer visibility and the light
switch is in the position

.
The two functions can be activated/deactivated and adjusted in the Infotain-
ment menu

Light
.
CAUTION
Poorer visibility is detected by a sensor mounted below the windscreen in
the holder of the inside mirror or in the control panel. Do not cover the sensor
- the system can be affected.
If this option is always enabled, then the battery is heavily loaded.
63
Lights and visibility
Hazard warning light system
Fig. 58
Button for hazard warning light
system
To switch on/off, press the button » Fig. 58.
When first switched on, the turn signal lights and the warning light
buttons
all flash at the same time as the warning lights
in the instrument cluster.
The hazard warning light system can also be operated if the ignition is switch-
ed off.
The hazard warning light system will switch on automatically if one of the air-
bags is deployed.
When the hazard warning system is on and the turn signal is switched on, the
hazard warning light system is switched off temporarily and only the turn sig-
nal flashes on the relevant side of the vehicle (applies with active comfort
flashing).
Parking light
The side light is provided for lighting of the parked vehicle.
Switching on the side light on one side
Switch off the ignition.
Press the control lever all the way into position or until it stops » Fig. 55
on page 62.
The parking light is turned on, on the relevant side of the vehicle.
Switching on the parking lights on both sides
Turn the ignition on and turn the light switch to position » page 61.
Switch off the ignition and lock the vehicle.
After pulling out the ignition key and opening the driver's door, an audible
warning sounds. After a few seconds or after closing the driver's door, the au-
dible warning is turned off.
CAUTION
Turning on the parking light means the battery is heavily loaded.
The parking lights may switch off automatically due to a low battery charge.
If the two-sided parking lights are switched on when the ignition is off, the
parking lights will not switch on automatically!
Driving abroad
When driving in countries with opposing traffic system (traffic on the
left/right), your headlights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, it is neces-
sary to have the headlights adapted by a specialist garage.
Interior lighting
Introduction
The inner lighting also works if the ignition is switched off. With the ignition
off (or after a door is opened),the lights will automatically switch off after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.
Front interior lights
Fig. 59
Operation of the front lights: Variant 1/Variant 2
64
Operation
Positions of the sliding light switch
A
» Fig. 59
Switch on
Switch off
Automatic operation
Switch on/off (by pressing the relevant switch
B
) » Fig. 59
Reading lamp left
Reading lamp right
Automatic operation – position
The system is turned on when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is unlocked.
One of the doors is opened.
The ignition key is removed.
The system is turned off when any of the following is present.
The vehicle is locked.
The ignition is switched on.
About 30 seconds after all the doors have been closed.
Rear interior lights
Fig. 60
Interior lights at the rear
Operation (by moving the lens
A
) » Fig. 60
Switch on
Automatic operation (the light is switched on/off automatically together
with the front light)
Switch off
Visibility
Introduction
WARNING
No objects should be attached to the sun visor that could restrict the view
or endanger the vehicle occupants during sudden braking or in a collision.
Rear window heater
Fig. 61
Button for rear window heater
Read and observe on page 65 first.
The heater for quick defrosting and ventilation of the rear window.
The heating only works when the engine is running.
To switch the heating on / off, press
button» Fig. 61.
When the heater is switched on, a lamp illuminates inside the button.
The heating automatically switches off after 10 minutes.
Note
If the on-board voltage decreases, the heating switches off automatically
» page 214, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the ve-
hicle battery.
65
Lights and visibility
Front sun visors
Fig. 62 Fold down visor / flip up visor / make-up mirror and parking per-
mit holder
Read and observe
on page 65 first.
Operation and description of the sun visor » Fig. 62
Swivel cover towards the windscreen
Swivel cover towards the door
Make-up mirror with cover (the cover can be pushed in the direction of
the arrow)
Ticket holder
Sunshade of the panoramic roof
Fig. 63
Open sun screen
Read and observe on page 65 first.
The sunshade of the panoramic roof can be opened manually in the direction
of arrow or closed in the opposite direction of the arrow » Fig. 63.
1
2
A
B
WARNING
When operating the sun blind, proceed with caution to avoid causing
crushing injuries – risk of injury!
Windscreen wipers and washers
Introduction
The windscreen wipers only operate if the ignition is switched on and the bon-
net is closed.
WARNING
Do not use the windscreen washer system at low temperatures without
heating the windscreen beforehand. The window washer fluid could other-
wise freeze on the windscreen and restrict the view to the front.
CAUTION
If the windscreen wipers are in rest position, they cannot be folded out from
the windscreen. The wipers must be set to the service position to raise them
off the windscreen » page 232.
In cold temperatures and during the winter, check before switching on the
ignition that the wiper blades are not frozen to the windscreen. If the wind-
screen wipers are switched on when the blades are frozen to the windscreen,
this may damage both the blades and windscreen wiper motor.
Carefully separate frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen and
free from snow and ice.
Handle the windscreen wipers with care - there is a risk of damage to the
windscreen by the windscreen wiper arms.
Do not switch on the ignition when the wiper arm is raised from the wind-
screen - there is a risk of damage to the bonnet by the wiper arms.
Note
Depending on vehicle equipment, the windscreen washer jets can be heated
automatically after starting the engine.
66
Operation
Front wipers and washers
Fig. 64
Operating the front windscreen
wipers and washer system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
High-speed wiping
Slow-speed wiping
Depending on equipment fitted:
Intermittent wiping
Automatic windscreen wiping in the rain
Wipers and washers off
Single wipe of the windscreen (spring-loaded position)
Setting of windscreen wiper interval for the position

– by setting the
switch in the direction of the arrow, the windscreen wipers will wipe more
often
Spraying and wiping the screen (spring-loaded position) – after releasing
the operating lever the wipers continue for another 1 to 3 strokes
Automatic windscreen wiping during rain can be activated/deactivated in
the Infotainment menu

Mirrors and wipers
.
WARNING
Automatic wiping during rain is only a support. The driver is still responsible
for setting the function of the windscreen wipers manually depending on
the visibility conditions.
Note
If the wiping is carried out without interruption, the wiping speed varies de-
pending on the vehicle speed.




A
Rear wipers and washer/Reversing camera cleaning system
Fig. 65
Operating the windscreen wip-
ers and washing system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Spraying and wiping the windscreen (sprung position) - after releasing the
control stalk, the wipers perform another 2 to 3 wiper strokes
Spraying the rear view camera (sprung position)
Rear screen wiping
Wipers and washers off
The rear window is wiped once automatically if the windscreen wipers are on
when reverse gear is selected. The function can be activated / deactivated in
the Infotainment menu

Mirrors and wipers
.
Headlight cleaning system
Read and observe and on page 66 first.
Headlights are cleaned under the following conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
The low beam is switched on.
The outside temperature is about -11° C to +36° C.
The headlights are cleaned after the first and every subsequent tenth spray on
the windscreen. The spray interval can be adjusted by a specialist garage (max-
imum after every twentieth spraying of the windscreen).
To ensure the correct functioning of the system, even in winter, this needs to
be regularly cleared of snow and ice (e.g. using the de-icing spray).

67
Lights and visibility
Rear view mirror
Introduction
WARNING
Exterior mirrors increase the field of view, however, they make objects ap-
pear smaller and further away. Therefore, use the interior mirror whenever
possible for assessing the distances to the vehicles following behind.
WARNING
The mirrors with automatic dimming contain electrolyte fluid which may
leak if the mirror glass is broken - this can irritate skin, eyes and the respira-
tory system.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for several minutes plenty of water. If neces-
sary get medical assistance.
Interior mirror dimming
Fig. 66 Interior mirror: manual dimming/auto-darkening
Read and observe on page 68 first.
Mirrors with manual dimming » Fig. 66
Basic mirror position (not darkened)
Mirror dimming
Mirror with automatic dimming
The mirror dimming » Fig. 66 is automatically controlled after the engine start.
1
2
When the interior lights are switched on or the reverse gear is engaged, the
mirror moves back into the basic position (not dimmed).
WARNING
Attach external devices (e.g. navigation system) not in the vicinity of the
mirror with automatic dimming. The illuminated display of an external de-
vice can affect the function of the rear-view mirror - it could cause an acci-
dent.
The automatic dimming mirror only functions smoothly if the light falling
on the sensors is not compromised (e.g. by the sunshade at the back). The
sensors are located on the front and back of the mirror.
Exterior mirrors
Fig. 67
Exterior mirror operation: mechanical / electrical
Read and observe on page 68 first.
The outer mirror surfaces are (depending on the vehicle specification) me-
chanically or electrically adjustable.
To adjust the mirror surface, move the knob in the direction of arrows
» Fig. 67.
If the electrical mirror setting fails at any time, the mirrors can be adjusted by
hand by carefully pressing on the edge of the mirror surface.
The knob for the electrically adjustable mirrors can be moved to the following
positions » Fig. 67 - .
Adjust the left-hand exterior mirror
Switch off mirror control
68
Operation
Adjust the right-hand exterior mirror
Exterior mirror heater (only operates when the engine is running)
Folding in the exterior mirrors
The mirror can be manually folded in towards the side window. To restore it to
its original position, fold back from the side window until it audibly clicks into
place.
WARNING
Do not touch the exterior mirror surfaces if the exterior mirror heater is
switched on - risk of burns.
Seats and head restraints
Front seats
Introduction
WARNING
Only adjust the driver's seat when the vehicle is stationary – otherwise
risk of accident!
Caution when adjusting the seat! You may suffer crushing injuries as a re-
sult of adjusting the seat without paying proper attention.
Adjusting the front seats
Fig. 68
Control elements on the seat
Read and observe on page 69 first.
Adjusting the seat in the longitudinal direction (after releasing, the control
lever must lock audibly)
Adjusting the seat height
Adjusting the tilt of the backrest (do not lean on the backrest when adjust-
ing)
Note
After a certain time, play can develop within the adjustment mechanism for
the backrest angle.
A
B
C
69
Seats and head restraints
Armrest setting
Fig. 69
Adjusting the armrest
Read and observe on page 69 first.
To adjust the height, lift the armrest in the direction of the arrow
A
into one
of the locking positions » Fig. 69.
To close, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow
A
past the stop and then
fold down again.
Rear seats
Seat backrests
Fig. 70
Fold seat backrest forwards / standby position of the seat belt
Before folding the seat backrests forwards, adjust the position of the front
seats in such a way that they are not damaged by the seat backrests. If neces-
sary, remove the rear head restraints » page 72.
Folding forward
Push the headrest into the seat backrest up to the latch.
Pull the outer seat belt to the side panel in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 70.
Push the release lever
A
in the direction of arrow
2
and fold down the seat
backrest in the direction of arrow
3
.
Withthe undivided backrest, the two external security belts must be pulled to-
wards the side panel and the release handles
A
to press on both sides of the
backrest simultaneously.
Folding backwards
Pull the outer seat belt to the side panel in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 70.
Raise the seat backrest against the direction of arrow
3
until the release
handle
A
audibly locks. Check this by pulling on the seat backrest.
Make sure that the red pin
B
is hidden.
In the undivided seat back, pull the two outer belts to the side panel. After
folding back the backrest, the release handles
A
should audibly click into
place on both sides of the backrest and the red mark
B
should not be visible
on either side of the backrest.
WARNING
The seat backs in occupied rear seats must be properly engaged.
When transporting objects in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the backrest forward, ensure the safety of the passengers
transported on the other rear seats.
The seat backrests must be securely latched in position so that no objects
from the luggage compartment can slip into the passenger compartment
under sudden braking – risk of injury.
CAUTION
When moving the seat backrest the seat belts should not be trapped - there is
a risk of damage to the seat belts.
Note
The belt tongue of the outer seat belts
C
can be inserted into the side panel.
Ready position» Fig. 70.
70
Operation
Rear seat
Applies to the Fabia Estate
Fig. 71 Fold rear seat forward / remove split rear bench seat
Fig. 72
Fold the rear seat back
The luggage space can be increased by folding the rear seat forward and re-
moving it.
For vehicles with split rear seats, the parts of the rear seat can be folded for-
ward individually and removed.
To fold, pull up the bench in the direction of arrow
1
and fold down in arrow
direction
2
» Fig. 71.
To Remove, press the wire clamps in the direction of arrows
3
so that they
become detached from the holders, and remove the seat.
To use, press the wire clamps in the direction of arrows
3
and insert it into
the brackets.
To open, lift the armrest in the direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 72.
Place the rear seat on the eyelets
A
, so that the eyelets
A
click into the re-
cesses in the plastic caps for 
B
.
WARNING
The rear seat may not be pulled in under the eyelets
A
when folding back.
The rear seat could not be properly secured.
CAUTION
The rear seat must not be pulled in under the eyelets
A
when being folded
back - there is a risk of damaging the rear seat.
Headrests
Introduction
Note
The middle rear headrest is only adjustable in two positions.
In sports seats, the headrests are integrated into the seat backrests and can-
not be adjusted in height.
Adjusting the height
Fig. 73 Setting the height of the back headrest
Height adjustment of the headrests is the same in the front and rear.
Grasp the headrest and move upwards in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 73.
To move the headrest down, press the securing button
A
in the direction of
arrow
2
and hold it down while pressing the headrest in the direction of ar-
row
3
.
71
Seats and head restraints
CAUTION
If the tablet holder adapter is secured to the guide rods of the front headrests
» page 80, do not push the headrests down to the stop – risk of damaging the
headrests.
Removing/inserting
Fig. 74
Removing/instaling the headrest
The removal and installation of headrests is the same in the front and rear.
Before removing/installingthe headrests, fold the corresponding seat back-
rest slightly forward » page 70.
To remove the headrest, pull it out of the seat backrestup to the latch.
Press locking button
A
in the direction of arrow
1,
and pull out the head
restraint in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 74.
To insert the headrest, push the headrest into the seat backrest in the direc-
tion of arrow
3
until the locking button clicks into place.
Front seat heater
Fig. 75
Buttons for front seat heater
The seat backrests and seats can be heated electrically.
Seat heating buttons » Fig. 75
Left seat heating
Right seat heating
To turn onthe heater at maximum heat (level 2) press button or .
By repeatedly pressing the button, the heat is turned down until it is complete-
ly switched off. The level of the seat heating is indicated by the number of illu-
minated warning lights in the switch.
The seat heating only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
If you are sensitive to pain and/or temperature, e.g. through medication, pa-
ralysis or because of chronic illness (e.g. diabetes), we recommend not to
use the seat heating. If the seat heater is used, we recommend to make
regular breaks in your journey when driving long distances, so that the body
can recuperate from the stress of the journey. Please consult your doctor,
who can evaluate your specific condition.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed to avoid damage to the seats.
Do not kneel on the seats or otherwise apply concentrated pressure to them.
Do not switch on the heating for unoccupied seats.
Do not switch on the heating for seats which have objects on them (e.g. a
child seat, bag or similar).
Do not switch on the heating for seats which have seat covers or protective
covers on them.
Note
If the heaters for the rear seats are set to their highest intensity (level 2),
they are automatically switched down to level 1 after 10 minutes.
If the on-board voltage decreases, the seat heating switches off automatical-
ly » page 214, Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the
vehicle battery.
72
Operation
Useful features
Passenger compartment features
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
they could cause an accident!
Do not transport any objects on the front passenger seat other than ob-
jects intended for this purpose (e.g. child safety seat) – risk of accident.
No objects should be placed in the storage compartments nor in the
drinks holders; the vehicle occupants could be endangered if there is sud-
den braking or the vehicle collides with something.
For safety reasons, lockable storage compartments should be closed
while driving - there is a risk of injury from the opened lid or through the
loose objects in the compartment.
Make sure no objects protrude from the storage compartments - There is
a risk of injury!
Do not exceed the permissible loads for the storage compartments and
pockets - risk of injury and risk of damage to the compartments and pock-
ets!
Ash, cigarettes, cigars etc. should only be stored in the ashtray - danger
of fire/burns!
The storage compartments, multimedia holder and waste container are
not a substitute for the ashtray and must not be used for such purposes –
risk of fire!
CAUTION
Do not place any large or sharp objects in the storage compartments and
pockets - there is a risk of damage to the compartments and pockets.
Ticket holder
Fig. 76
Ticket holder
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The ticket holder is provided for the attachment of e.g. parking tickets.
Storage compartments in the doors
Fig. 77
Storage compartments: in the front door/rear door
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
Storage compartments » Fig. 77
Storage compartment
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 1.5 l
Bottle holder with a capacity of max. 0.5 l
The reflective vest can be stowed in the storage compartments in the door
» page 220.
A
B
C
73
Useful features
WARNING
Storage compartment
A
» Fig. 77 is to be used exclusively for storing ob-
jects which do not stick out – danger of restricting the effectiveness of the
side airbags.
Storage compartment in the front centre console
Fig. 78
Storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The open storage compartment is in the front of the centre console » Fig. 78.
USB and AUX input
Fig. 79
USB and AUX inputs
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The USB and AUX inputs are located above the storage compartment at the
front of the centre console » Fig. 79.
Information for using » page 125, USB input and » page 125, AUX input.
Coin and card holders
Fig. 80
Coin and card holders
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The coin holder
A
and card holder
B
are located in the front centre console
» Fig. 80.
Storage compartment in the dashboard
Fig. 81
Storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment is located in the middle part of the panel » Fig. 81.
74
Operation
Cup holders
Fig. 82
Cup holder
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
Two beverage containers can be placed into the cup holder » Fig. 82.
WARNING
Do not use cups or beakers made of brittle material (e.g. glass, porcelain).
This could lead to injuries in the event of an accident.
Never put hot beverage containers in the cup holder. They may spill as
the vehicle moves – there is a risk of scalding.
CAUTION
Do not leave open beverage containers in the cup holder during the journey.
There is a risk of spilling e.g. when braking which may cause damage to the
electrical components or seat upholstery.
Waste container
Fig. 83 Waste container: inserting and moving/opening
Fig. 84 Replace bags
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The waste container can be inserted into the slot in the door.
Insert waste container
Position the waste container at the front edge of the slot.
Push the waste container to the back in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 83.
Push the waste container as required in the direction of arrow
B
.
Remove the waste container
Remove the waste container in the opposite direction to the arrow
A
» Fig. 83.
Open / close waste container
Lift the lid in the direction of arrow
C
» Fig. 83.
Closing takes place in reverse order.
Replace bags
Remove the waste container from the slot.
Press the two locking lugs on the frame in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 84.
Pull the bag together with the frame down in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bag from the frame.
Pull the new bag through the frame and pull it over the frame in the direction
of arrow
3
.
Place the bag with the frame in the direction of arrow
4
into the container
body, so that the two lugs engage audibly on the frame.
Note
We recommend that you use 20x30 cm bags.
75
Useful features
Multimedia holder
Fig. 85
Multimedia holder
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
Multimedia holder » Fig. 85
Storage compartment for storing the vehicle key
Storage compartment for storing two coins
Storage compartment for storing a mobile phone
Storage compartment in the armrest
Fig. 86 Storage compartment / open storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
To open the armrest in the area
A
, grasp and lift the lid » Fig. 86.
To close, swing the lid against the direction of the arrow until it audibly clicks
into place.
A
B
C
Glasses storage box
Fig. 87
Opening the glasses storage box
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
To open, press on the outer edge of the glasses compartment in area
A
.
The compartment folds in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 87.
To close, swivel the compartment against the direction of the arrow until it
audibly clicks into place.
The maximum permissible load of the glasses compartment is 250 g.
CAUTION
Do not put any heat-sensitive objects in the glasses storage box - with high
temperatures there is risk of damage.
The tray must be closed before leaving and locking the vehicle – risk of im-
pairment to the functions of the anti-theft alarm system.
76
Operation
Storage compartment on the front passenger side
Fig. 88 Open storage compartment / interior of the storage compart-
ment
Read and observe
and on page 73 first.
Depending on the equipment provided, the storage compartment is equipped
with a room lamp (this lights when opening the compartment), a bottle rack
with a capacity of max. 1 l
B
and a card holder
C
» Fig. 88.
To open, pull the opening lever
A
in the direction of arrow
1
. The cover
folds in the arrow direction
2
.
To close, screw in the lid in the opposite direction of arrow
2
until it audibly
clicks into place.
The maximum permissible load of the storage compartment is 3 kg.
Storage compartment in the side of the front seat
Fig. 89
Storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment
A
» Fig. 89 is located on the side of the front seat.
Storage compartment for an umbrella
Fig. 90
Storage compartment for an
umbrella
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage compartment under the passenger seat » Fig. 90 is used for stor-
ing an umbrella.
Clothes hook
Fig. 91
Clothes hooks
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The clothes hooks are located on the handles of the headliner above each of
the rear doors » Fig. 91.
The maximum permissible load of each of the hooks is 2 kg.
77
Useful features
WARNING
Never leave any heavy or sharp-edged objects in the pockets of the items
of clothing that has been hung up - is a risk of injury.
Do not use hangers to hang up the clothes - there is a risk of restricting
the effectiveness of head airbags and a danger of injury from the hanger.
Make sure that any clothes hanging from the hooks do not impede your
vision.
Storage pockets on the backs of the front seats
Fig. 92
Map pockets
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The map pockets are intended for storage of maps, magazines, etc.
Storage pockets on the inner sides of the front seats
Fig. 93
Storage pocket
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The storage pockets are located on the inside of the front seats » Fig. 93 and
are used to store small and light objects (e.g. mobile phones).
The maximum permissible load of each of the pockets is 150 g.
Storage compartment in rear centre console
Fig. 94 Storage compartment: Version 1 / version 2
Read and observe and on page 73 first.
The open storage compartment is in the rear of the centre console » Fig. 94.
Electrical sockets
Introduction
WARNING
Do not place anything on the dash panel. These objects might slide or fall
down when driving and may distract you from concentrating on the traffic
– risk of accident!
Make sure that while driving no objects can enter the driver's footwell -
they could cause an accident!
Stow all devices safely during the journey to prevent them from being
thrown around the interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or
an accident – The is a risk of death!
The devices may warm up during operation – The is a risk of injury or fire!
Improper use of the power sockets and the electrical accessories can
cause fires, burns and other serious injuries.
The 12-volt sockets also work if the ignition is switched off. When leaving
the vehicle, never leave persons who are not completely independent, such
as children, unattended in the vehicle.
78
Operation
CAUTION
The sockets can only be used for the connection of approved electrical ac-
cessories with a total power consumption of up to 120 watts - otherwise the
electrical system of the vehicle may be damaged.
Connecting appliances when the engine is not running will drain the battery
of the vehicle!
Before switching the ignition on / off or before starting the engine, switch
off the devices which are connected to the sockets - there is a risk of damage
to the equipment due to voltage fluctuations.
12-volt power outlet
Fig. 95
Cover for the 12-volt socket: in the central part of the dash-
board/in the luggage compartment
Read and observe and on page 78 first.
To use, remove the cover from the socket » Fig. 95 -
or open the cover of
the socket » Fig. 95 - .
Connect the plug for the electrical appliance to the socket.
Ashtray and cigarette lighter
Introduction
The ashtray can be used for disposing of ash, cigarettes, cigars and the like etc
WARNING
Never place hot or flammable objects in the ashtray – risk of fire!
Ashtray
Fig. 96 Removing/opening/disassembling the ashtray
Read and observe on page 79 first.
Removable ashtray
Remove the ashtray in the direction of the arrow
A
» Fig. 96. Insertion
takes place in reverse order.
To open the ashtray, turn the cover in the direction of arrow
B
. Closing
takes place in reverse order.
To disassemble turn the entire cover in the direction
1
until it stops and re-
move in direction of arrow
2
. Assembly takes place in reverse order.
Cigarette lighter
Fig. 97
Cigarette lighter
Read and observe on page 79 first.
To use the lighter, push it in as far as the stop and wait until the glowing
lighter clicks out again » Fig. 97.
Take out the glowing lighter instantly, use it and insert it back into the sock-
et.
79
Useful features
WARNING
The cigarette lighter also works if the ignition is switched off. When leav-
ing the vehicle, never leave people who are not completely independent,
such as children, unattended in the vehicle - there is a risk of burning, fire or
damage to the vehicle interior.
Be careful when using the cigarette lighter - It can cause burns.
Note
The cigarette lighter socket can also be used as a 12-volt socket.
Tablet holder
Introduction
External devices (e.g. tablet, smartphone, etc.) measuring min. 122 mm and
max. 195 mm can be secured in the support.
The maximum permissible load of the compartment is 750 g.
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the holder - there is a risk of
damage or functional impairment.
Attaching the rear headrests
Fig. 98
Inserting: adapter/holder
Fig. 99 Removing: holder/adapter
Read and observe on page 80 first.
To insert, attach the opened adapter to the guide rods of the front headrest
and clip in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 98 » .
Clip in the holder in the direction of arrow
2
into the adapter.
To remove, pull on the securing tab
A
in direction of arrow
3
and take the
holder out of the adapter in the direction of arrow
4
» Fig. 99.
Press the adapter and remove in the direction of the arrow
5
from the
guide rods of the headrest.
WARNING
Be careful with the adapter – otherwise there is a risk of finger injury.
Handle holder
Fig. 100
Tilt and rotate holder
80
Operation
Fig. 101
Adjust holder size
Read and observe on page 80 first.
The holder may be tilted by 30° in the direction of the arrow
1
and turned by
360° in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 100.
To adjust the holder size, pull out the securing tab
A
in the direction of ar-
row
3
and push the part
B
in the direction of arrow
4
to the desired posi-
tion » Fig. 101.
Note
If there is no external device in the holder, then we recommend that the part
B
is moved down fully. Otherwise, irritating noises may occur at certain
speeds.
Transport of cargo
Luggage compartment and transporting objects
Introduction
When transporting heavy objects, the driving characteristics change due to
the shift in the centre of gravity. Therefore, adjust the speed and driving mode
accordingly.
When transporting cargo the instructions below must be followed
Distribute the load evenly in the luggage compartment and secure it with
suitable lashing straps to the lashing eyes or fixing nets so that they cannot
slip.
Place heavy objects as far forward in the luggage compartment as possible.
Match the tyre pressure to the load.
In the event of an accident, even small and light objects gain so much kinetic
energy that they can cause severe injuries.
The magnitude of the kinetic energy is dependent on the speed at which the
vehicle is travelling and the weight of the object.
Luggage compartment light
The light switches on/off when the luggage compartment lid is opened or
closed.
If the boot lid is open and the ignition switched off, the light will go out auto-
matically after 10 minutes.
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. Heavy objects were not secured sufficiently – There is a
risk of injury!
An unsecured dirt or improperly attached load could slip during a sudden
manoeuvre or in an accident in the vehicle - There is a risk of injury!
Loose cargo could hit a deployed airbag and injure occupants – danger of
death!
When transporting loads in the luggage compartment that has been en-
larged by folding the rear seats forward, ensure the safety of the passen-
gers transported on the other rear seats.
81
Transport of cargo
CAUTION
Never exceed the maximum permissible load of the respective fasteners,
nets, hooks etc. - these could be damaged.
Please ensure that the heating elements for the rear window heater are not
damaged as a result of abrasive objects.
Do not place sharp objects in the nets and storage compartments in the lug-
gage compartment - there is a risk of damage to the net as well as the com-
partments.
Put the items in the storage compartments carefully and not load these
punctiform - there is a risk of damage to the compartments.
Fastening elements
Fig. 102
Fasteners
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The fasteners are located on both sides of the luggage compartment.
Overview of the fastening elements » Fig. 102
Lashing eyes for securing cargo, fastening nets and multifunction pocket
Fastener for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
Lashing eye for securing fastening nets and multifunction pocket
The upper front lashing eye
C
is located behind the folding rear seat backrest.
The maximum permissible load of the individual lashing eyes
A
is 350 kg.
Note
The lashing eyes
A
cannot be used for attaching bags and nets when the vari-
able loading floor is in the upper position » page 87.
A
B
C
Fixing nets
Fig. 103 Fastening examples for nets
Fig. 104
Fastening vertical pocket
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Fastening examples for nets » Fig. 103 and » Fig. 104
Horizontal pocket
Floor net
Vertical pocket (only applies to some vehicles)
The maximum permissible load of each of the nets is 1.5 kg.
A
B
C
82
Operation
Multifunction pocket
Fig. 105
Securing the multifunction
pocket
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The pocket » Fig. 105 can be secured to the fastening elements
A
,
B
and
C
» Fig. 102 on page 82.
The maximum permissible load for the bag attached to fastening elements is 3
kg.
CAUTION
In vehicles with a variable loading floor, it is not possible to secure the bag to
the fastening elements.
Hooks
Fig. 106
Hooks
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
A hook for attaching small items of luggage, such as bags etc., is provided on
each side of the luggage compartment» Fig. 106.
The maximum permissible load of the hook is 7.5 kg.
CAUTION
If possible, take the item of luggage suspended from the hook and place it in
the storage compartment
B
» Fig. 111 on page 85, otherwise there is a risk of
damaging the storage compartment cover.
If an item of luggage weighing more than 2.5 kg is suspended on the hook,
then we recommend removing the storage compartment cover
B
» Fig. 111 on
page 85, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the storage compartment cov-
er.
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 107
Remove the luggage compartment cover
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
If the support straps
A
» Fig. 107 are attached to the boot lid, then opening
the lid will raise the boot lid cover (hereafter referred to as cover).
The cover can be removed from the vehicle and stowed behind the rear seat
backrests if required » Fig. 108 on page 84.
The maximum permissible load of the cover is 1 kg.
Removing
On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 107.
Hold the raised cover and press on the two sides on the underside of the
cover in the area of the recess
C
.
Remove the cover in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fitting
Place the fixtures
B
on the cover above the brackets
C
on the side trim
» Fig. 107.
83
Transport of cargo
Press on the two sides to the upper side of the cover in the region of the
mounts
C
. The fixtures
B
must lock into place in the mounts
C
on both
sides of the luggage compartment.
On both sides of the boot lid, unhook the straps
A
.
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - There is a risk of
injury if you brake or have a collision!
CAUTION
Observe the following instructions to avoid canting and the subsequent
damage to the cover or the side trim.
The cover must be inserted properly and the load must not exceed the
height of the cover.
The cover must not be jammed in the surrounding seal of the luggage com-
partment lid when it is in the raised position.
There must be no object in the gap between the cover in the raise position
and the rear backrest.
Other positions of the luggage compartment cover
Fig. 108
Luggage compartment cover: stowed behind the rear seats/in
the lower position
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The luggage compartment cover behind the rear seat backrests can be stored
» Fig. 108 - or in the lower position » Fig. 108 - .
Store cover in the lower position
Press the top of the cover in the arrow direction » Fig. 108 -
.
In the front area, slots
B
» Fig. 107 on page 83 on the cover must be fully en-
gaged with the mounts on the side trim. In the back, the cover must be se-
cured at both ends under the latching.
In the lower position, the cover is designed for storing small objects up to a
weight of 2.5 kg in total.
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the cover during the trip - There is a risk of
injury if you brake or have a collision!
Roll-up cover
Fig. 109
Roll-up cover: extending/retracting/removing
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
Extending
Grasp the cover at grip-point
A
and pull it out in the direction of the arrow
1
until it audibly clicks into place
» Fig. 109.
Retracting
Push the cover in the handle area
A
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 109.
The cover rolls up automatically. The rolled-up cover can now be removed.
Removing/inserting
Press on the side of the cross bar in the direction of arrow
3
and remove
the cover in the arrow direction
4
» Fig. 109.
Insertion takes place in reverse order.
84
Operation
WARNING
No objects should be placed on the roll-up cover - there is a risk of damage
to the cover and a risk of injury in the event of a sudden stop or a vehicle
collision!
CAUTION
It is possible that the roll-up luggage compartment cover rolls more slowly
during winter weather conditions. This is not a defect.
Net partition
Fig. 110 Net partition behind the rear seats
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The net partition can be installed behind the rear seats.
For ease of installation / removal of the carabiner
B
Move the variable loading
floor back, remove it from the vehicle if necessary.
Installing/removing
To install, remove the retractable luggage compartment cover » Fig. 109 on
page 84 or the fold the rear seat backrests forwards » page 70.
First insert the rod into the mount
B
» Fig. 110 on one side and push it for-
wards. Insert the transverse rod into the mount
C
on the other side of the
vehicle in the same way.
Hang the carabines
C
at the belt ends into the lashing eyes behind the rear
seats.
Pull the straps firmly at the free ends
D
.
Ausbauis carried out in the reverse order.
Note
For vehicles with variable loading floor, the nets can be secured only when the
variable loading floor is in the lower position» page 87.
Storage compartments in the luggage compartment
Fig. 111
Storage compartments
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The integrated storage compartment
A
» Fig. 111 is suitable for stowing small
objects weighing up to 1.5 kg in total.
The storage compartment
B
is designed for storing small objects of up to 2.5
kg. in weight in total.
The armrest can be removed in the direction of the arrow.
CAUTION
When handling the cover of the storage compartment
B
, ensure that this or
the luggage compartment trim is not damaged.
85
Transport of cargo
Cargo elements
Fig. 112 Remove cargo element / Load fastening example
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The cargo element is designed for attaching and securing objects with a maxi-
mum total weight of 8 kg.
Before use, remove the Cargo element in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 112
-
.
Use thecargoelements to secure the load as close as possible to the rear
seats» Fig. 112
.
After use, stow the Cargo element in its original position.
Flexible storage compartment
Fig. 113
Flexible storage compartment
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The flexible storage compartment can be installed on either side of the boot
» Fig. 113.
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects with a maxi-
mum total weight of 8 kg.
To use,insert the two ends of the storage compartment into the openings in
the side trim of the luggage compartment and push the shelf down to lock.
ToRemovegrasp the storage compartment at the top edges and remove by
pulling upwards and towards you.
Storage compartments under the floor
Fig. 114 Fold the floor back / storage compartment under the floor
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
The storage compartment
A
is located under the floor of the luggage com-
partment» Fig. 114.
Lift the rear portion of the floor and fold forward in the direction of arrow
1
- .
The storage compartment is designed for storing small objects of up to 15 kg.
in weight in total.
Class N1 vehicles
Read and observe and on page 81 first.
In class N1 vehicles that are not fitted with a protective grille, a lashing set that
complies with the EN 12195 standard (1-4) must be used for fastening the load.
Proper functioning of the electrical installation is essential for safe vehicle op-
eration. It is important to ensure that the electrical installation is not damaged
during the adjustment process or when the storage area is being loaded and
unloaded.
86
Operation
Variable loading floor in the luggage compartment
Set in the upper / lower position
Fig. 115
Set the variable loading floor to the upper position
The variable loading floor can be set to the upper or lower position as follows.
Raise the variable loading floor by the handle
A
in direction of arrow
1
and
move partially in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 115.
To
Set in the upper position, raise the variable loading floor in the front area
and lay on the edge
C
.
To Set the lower position move the variable loading floor in direction of ar-
row
2
until it detaches from the slots
B
, and place the front of the variable
loading floor on the floor covering of the luggage compartment.
Lay the variable loading floor in direction of arrow
3
up to the latch and the
arrow
4
.
The area under the variable loading floor can be used to stow small objects.
The maximum permissible load of the variable loading floor is 75 kg. For the
transport of heavy loads, adjust the variable loading floor in the lower position.
Removing/inserting
Fig. 116
Remove variable loading floor
Removing
Lift the variable loading floor at the handle
A
in the direction of arrow
1
until its rear area is about 15 cm
B
below the edge of the foldable cover
» Fig. 116.
Remove the variable loading floor from the vehicle by moving it in the direc-
tion of arrow
2
.
Inserting
Grasp the variable loading floor at handle
A
» Fig. 116.
Insert the variable loading floor matching the front area into the vehicle
about 15 cm
B
beneath the edge of the foldable cover.
Then follow the same steps as when setting the upper position or the lower
position » page 87.
CAUTION
When removing or inserting the variable loading floor, a distance of 15 cm
B
» Fig. 116 underneath the edge of the foldable cover must be adhered to, there
is a risk of damaging the boot lid seal.
87
Transport of cargo
Folding / fastening
Fig. 117 Fold up variable loading floor / secure variable loading floor
The variable loading floor can be folded up and secured using a hook on the
frame of the boot lid in the two positions (at the top as well as the bottom).
Fold the variable loading floor together using the handle
A
and fold in the
direction of arrow» Fig. 117.
Hook the
B
hook to the frame of the boot lid.
WARNING
The folded-up variable cargo floor limits the driver's view to the rear.
CAUTION
Before closing the boot lid the variable loading floor must be unhook from the
frame. There is the risk of damage to the hook.
Bicycle carrier in the luggage compartment
Introduction
up to two bicycles can be transported in the luggage compartment (maximum
size - 19 "frame with 26" wheels) in a carrier.
Before transporting, the following steps must be taken.
Remove the roll-up cover » page 84.
Push the headrests into the seat backrests up to the stop position » page 71.
Fold the rear seats forward» page 71 and fold rear seats forward » page 70.
WARNING
When transporting bicycles, ensuring the safety of the passengers is para-
mount.
CAUTION
Take care handling the bicycle - there is a risk of damaging the vehicle.
Note
The bike rack cannot be installed if the variable cargo floor is stowed in the
luggage compartment.
Install/remove crossmember
Fig. 118 Install crossmember: Loosen the screws and unlock brackets /
place crossmember on the lashing eyelets
Fig. 119
Install crossmember: Tighten
the screws
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
To installcomplete detach the
A
screws in the direction of arrows
1
and
pull out partially. The brackets
B
are unlocked » Fig. 118.
88
Operation
Set the crossbar so that the screws
A
are pointing forward.
Place the crossmember with the fixed part
C
onto the left lashing eyelet in
the direction of arrow
2
.
Pull out part
D
of the cross member and place onto the right lashing eyelet
in arrow direction
3
.
Push the mounts
B
in the direction of arrows
4
until they click» Fig. 119.
Turn the screws
A
in the direction of arrow
5
up tothe latch.
Check how well the crossmember is fastened by pulling on it.
Removingis carried out in the reverse order.
Fitting/removing the bike rack
Fig. 120
Fitting the bike rack
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
Toinstall, loosen screw
A
on the bicycle rack (hereinafter only referred to
as "carrier") in direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 120.
Place the carrier of the crossmember in the direction of arrow
2
.
Hold part
B
of the carrier firmly and press on part
C
of the support in the
direction of arrow
3
.
Remove screw
A
in the direction of arrow
4
.
Screw out screw
D
in the direction of arrow
5
and remove.
Place part
E
in the direction of arrow
6
, depending on bike size, in one of
the possible positions » .
Insert screw
D
and tighten in the direction of arrow
7
.
Removingis carried out in the reverse order.
CAUTION
The bike stowed in the rack must not touch either the boot lid or other vehicle
parts - there is a risk of damage to the vehicle occurring.
Place bicycle into the carrier
Fig. 121
Insert the front fork of the bicycle into the carrier / mounting
example of the front wheel
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
Remove the front wheel from the bike.
Release the quick release
A
» Fig. 121 on the carrier and adjust according to
the bicycle fork width.
Place the bicycle fork on the fixing axle and tighten with the quick release
A
.
Set the left bicycle pedal towards the vehicle front to secure the front wheel
more easily.
If you want to transport two bicycles, loosen screw
A
» Fig. 120 on page 89
on the carrier and move the carrier along with attached bike to the left.
The handlebar must not touch the side window of the luggage compartment.
Tighten screw
A
» Fig. 120 on page 89 on the support.
Guide the boot lid gently downwards and check while doing this that there is
no contact between the handlebar and the rear window.
89
Transport of cargo
If necessary, the position of the sliding part
E
» Fig. 120 on page 89 can be
adjusted.
The dismantled front wheel can best be stowed between the left crank and
the bicycle frame.
Attach the front wheel with belt
B
to the front fork » Fig. 121 or to the bicy-
cle frame.
The second carrier is installed and the bicycle is secured in a similar way.
Ensure the stability of the bicycles with a belt
Fig. 122
Ensure the stability of the bicycles with a belt
Read and observe and on page 88 first.
In order to loosen the rubber part of the clamp, push both parts against each
other and open the clamp.
Position the clamp with the rubber part in the direction of travel as low down
on the saddle support as possible and close it.
When transporting two bicycles, stretch the belt » Fig. 122 - between the
saddles by moving the bicycles apart.
Hook the carabiners on the ends of the belt into the lower lashing eyelets be-
hind the rear seats » Fig. 122 - .
Pull the belt through the tensioning clasps on both sides in turn.
If necessary, you can correct the position of the bicycles in the vehicle after-
wards.
Transportation on the roof rack
Fig. 123 Attachment points
Depending on the equipment, the roof bars can be attached at the attachment
points » Fig. 123 or to the roof rail.
The attachment points
A
and
B
are located on both sides of the vehicle
» Fig. 123.
Mounting and dismounting of the roof bars is carried out according to the in-
structions provided.
Roof load
The maximum permitted weight of the load incl. carriers is 75 kg.
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed to aid road safety when trans-
porting cargo on the roof rack.
Always distribute the load on the roof rack evenly and secure properly
with suitable lashing straps or tensioning straps.
When transporting heavy objects or objects which take up a large area on
the roof rack system, handling of the car may change as a result of the dis-
placement of the centre of gravity. The style of driving and speed must
therefore be adapted to circumstances.
The permissible roof load, permissible axle loads and gross permissible
weight of the vehicle must not be exceeded under any circumstances – risk
of accident.
CAUTION
Ensure that the boot lid does not hit the roof load when opened.
Ensure the roof aerial is not impaired by the load being transported.
90
Operation
Note
We recommend that you use a roof rack from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Heating and ventilation
Heating, manual air conditioning system, Climatronic
Introduction
The heater heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The air conditioning sys-
tem also cools and dehumidifies the vehicle interior.
The heating effect is dependent upon the coolant temperature, thus full heat
output only occurs when the engine has reached its operating temperature.
The cooling system works under the following conditions.
The cooling system is switched on.
The engine is running.
The outside temperature is above 2 °C.
The blower is switched on.
When the cooling system is switched on, it prevents misting of the windscreen
and windows.
It is possible to boost the effectiveness of the cooling system by briefly acti-
vating the air recirculation system» page 93.
Health protection
To reduce health risks (e.g. common colds), the following instructions for the
use of the cooling system are to be observed.
The difference between the outside temperature and the inside temperature
should not be greater than 5 °C.
The cooling system should be turned off about 10 minutes before the end of
the journey.
Once a year, a disinfection of the air conditioner must be carried out by a
specialist company.
WARNING
The blower should always be on to prevent the windows from misting.
Otherwise there is a risk of accident.
Under certain circumstances, air at a temperature of about 5 °C can flow
out of the vents when the cooling system is switched on.
91
Heating and ventilation
Note
The air inlet in front of the windscreen must be free of e.g. ice, snow or
leaves to ensure that the heating and cooling system operates properly.
After switching on the cooling system condensation from the evaporator of
the air conditioning may drip down and form a puddle below the vehicle. This is
not a leak!
If the coolant temperature is too high, the cooling system is switched off to
ensure that the engine cools down.
Heating and manual air conditioning
Fig. 124
Controls of the heating / air conditioning
Read and observe on page 91 first.
Individual functions can be adjusted or switched on by turning the dial or
pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 124. When the function is activated, a
warning light illuminates in the button.
Setting temperature
Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Set fan speed (level 0: blower off, level 4: highest speed)
Set the direction of the air outlet » page 94
Air flow to the windows
Air flow to the upper body
Air flow in the footwell
Air flow to the windows and the footwell
Switch recirculation on/off » page 93
Switch the cooling system on/off
A
B
C

Information on cooling system
After pressing the buttonthe indicator light on the button lights up, even if
not all the conditions for the cooling system have been met. The cooling sys-
tem starts to work as soon as the following conditions have been met
» page 91.
If recirculated air mode is turned to position when the blower is on, the
cooling system is switched on. The cooling system is switched off again by
turning the air distribution control out of the position .
If recirculated air mode is outside position when the recirculating air mode
is on, the cooling system is switched on.
Note
To ensure adequate thermal comfort, during operation of the manual air condi-
tioning there could be an increase in the engine idle speed in some circumstan-
ces.
Climatronic (automatic air conditioning)
Fig. 125
Controls the Climatronic
Read and observe on page 91 first.
Individual functions can be adjusted or switched on by turning the dial or
pressing the corresponding button » Fig. 125.
Setting temperature
Reduce the temperature/ Increase the temperature
Selected temperature
Degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit
Automatic operation of the air conditioning system is switched on
Intense air flow turned on to the windscreen
1
2
3
4
5
92
Operation
Direction of air flow
Recirculated air mode activated
Cooling system activated
Set blower speed
Set the fan speed (the set fan speed is indicated by the corresponding
number of segments in the display)
Turn to the left: reduce speed / switch off Climatronic
Turn to the right: increase the speed
Interior temperature sensor
Switching the intensive airflow to the front windscreen on/off - when
this function is switched on, the warning light illuminates in the button
Switching automatic mode on » page 93
Switching the airflow to the windows on and off
Switching the airflow to the upper body on and off
Switching the airflow to the footwell on and off
Switch recirculation on/off » page 93
Switch the cooling system on/off
When this function is switched on, the corresponding icon appears in the dis-
play.
After the cooling system is switched off, only the ventilation function remains
active, whereby the lowest temperature that can be reached is the outside
temperature.
Set the temperature
In the range between 16 °C to 29° C, an automatic temperature control takes
place.
At a temperature setting below 16 ° C,  lights up in the temperature display,
the Climatronic functions with maximum cooling performance.
At a temperature setting over 29° C,  lights up in the temperature display, the
Climatronic functions with maximum heating output.
Switching between Celsius and Fahrenheit
Press the and  buttons simultaneously and hold for about 2 s, the dis-
play shows the desired unit (position
3
» Fig. 125).
6
7
8
9
10
11


CAUTION
Do not cover the interior temperature sensor
11
» Fig. 125 – the function of
the Climatronic could be affected.
Note
In order to ensure adequate thermal comfort, there may be an increase in en-
gine idle speed during operation of the Climatronic in some circumstances.
Climatronic - automatic operation
Read and observe on page 91 first.
The automatic mode is used in order to maintain a constant temperature and
to demist the windows in the interior of the car.
To switch on press the

button. The display shows

(pos.
4
» Fig. 125
on page 92).
To turn off, press any button for the air distribution or change the blower
speed. The temperature contro lis continued.
Recirculated air mode
Read and observe on page 91 first.
The recirculation mode prevents contaminated outside air getting into the in-
terior of the vehicle. In recirculated air mode air is sucked out of the interior of
the vehicle and then fed back into the interior.
To switch on/off, press the
button.
Heater
If the air distribution control is set to position
when the recirculation mode
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is switched off automatically.
Individually controlled air conditioning
Recirculated air mode is switched on automatically if the following conditions
are met.
The blower is switched on.
The airflow adjuster is outside position .
The temperature controller is turned to the left.
If the air distribution control is set to position when the recirculation mode
is switched on, the recirculated-air mode is automatically switched off.
93
Heating and ventilation
Climatronic
If humidity increases in the vehicle, an automatic shutdown of air recirculation
can occur.
WARNING
The recirculation system cannot be switched on for a longer period of time,
because no fresh air is fed through from the outside. “Stale air” may result
in fatigue in the driver and occupants, reduce attention levels and also
cause the windows to mist up. As soon as windows mist up, turn on the re-
circulation system immediately - The is a risk of an accident!
CAUTION
We recommend not smoking in the vehicle when the recirculating air opera-
tion is switched on. The smoke sucked from the interior is deposited on the
evaporator of the air conditioner. This produces a permanent odour when the
air conditioning system is operating which can only be eliminated through con-
siderable effort and expense (replacement of compressor).
Air outlet vents
Fig. 126
Air outlet vents
Read and observe on page 91 first.
The direction of airflow can be adjusted using the air outlet vents 3, 4
» Fig. 126, the outlets can be opened and closed individually.
The airflow direction is set by moving the adjustment element
A
» Fig. 126 in
the desired direction.
Opening
Turn the regulator
B
upwards » Fig. 126.
Turn the regulator
B
to the right.
Closing
Turn the regulator
B
downwards » Fig. 126.
Turn the regulator
B
to the left.
Depending on the setting for air distribution, the air will flow from the follow-
ing air vents.
Set the direction of the air
outlet
Air outlet vents » Fig. 126
 1, 2, 4
1, 2, 4, 5
3, 4
4, 5
CAUTION
Do not cover the air vents - the air distribution could be compromised.
94
Operation
Infotainment
Introductory information
Important information
Introduction to the subject
WARNING
Only use Infotainment in such a way that you have control of the vehicle
in every traffic situation (e.g. do not write text messages while driving, do
not link or connect the telephone, do not work with the contact list, do not
enter any destinations, do not connect WLAN or SmartLink etc.) – Other-
wise there is a risk of an accident!
Always route the connection cable of the external device such that is
does not restrict you when driving.
WARNING
Adjust the volume to ensure that acoustic signals from outside the vehi-
cle, e.g. the police, ambulances and fire engines, can be heard at all times.
High volumes can cause hearing damage.
CAUTION
In some countries, some Infotainment functions can no longer be selected
when the vehicle is running faster than a certain speed. This is not a malfunc-
tion, but complies with the national legal regulations.
Mobile devices and applications
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 127
QR code with reference to web
pages for checking the compati-
bility of devices
The availability of some of the functions described in this Owner's Manual
depends on the type of device to be connected and the applications instal-
led in it.
Compatibility
On the ŠKODA pages, check to see if Infotainment is compatible with the se-
lected mobile devices. This verification is carried out by reading the QR code
» Fig. 127 or after typing the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
Applications
Applications can be installed in external devices (e.g. mobile, tablet) making it
possible to display additional information on the Infotainment screen or to op-
erate Infotainment.
Due to the variety of applications as well as their ongoing development, the
available applications may not work in all external devices. ŠKODA AUTO can
accept no liability for their proper function.
The range of available applications and their functionality is dependent on the
Infotainment model, vehicle and region.
Infotainment overview
Description – Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 128 Infotainment Amundsen
95
Introductory information
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 117

- Media menu » page 121

- Telephone menu » page 132

- Voice control: » page 103

- Navigation menu » page 145

- Target-oriented traffic information » page 161

- Vehicle system settings » page 163

- Overview of Infotainment menus » page 102
Touchscreen » page 97
Description – Infotainment Bolero
Fig. 129
Infotainment Bolero
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 117

- Media menu » page 121

- Telephone menu » page 132

- Voice control: » page 103

- Infotainment settings » page 106

- Sound settings » page 106

- Vehicle system settings » page 163
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

- Overview of Infotainment menus » page 102
Touchscreen » page 97
Description – Infotainment Swing
Fig. 130
Infotainment Swing
Left control dial for switching Infotainment on and off; volume adjustment
Control dial for calls and confirmations

- Radio menu » page 117

- Media menu » page 121
Depending on equipment fitted:

- Telephone menu » page 132

- Muting

- Infotainment settings » page 112

- Sound settings » page 112

- Vehicle system settings » page 163
Touchscreen » page 97
SD card slot » page 124
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
96
Infotainment
Description – Infotainment Blues
Fig. 131 Infotainment Blues
Dial (hereinafter only symbol )
Display
SD card slot
Switches Infotainment on/off
Radio menu » page 118 / Select radio frequency range
Media menu » page 122 / Select audio source
Settings of the selected menu (Radio » page 116 /Media » page 116)
Infotainment settings » page 115
Sound settings » page 115
Backward / forward movement / settings of the selected menu item
values
Function keys (each of the functions for these keys is described in the
relevant chapters)
1
2
3





/
-
External module
Does not apply to Infotainment Swing, Blues.
Fig. 132
External module: Infotainment
Amundsen, Bolero
The external module is located in the storage compartment on the front pas-
senger side.
Touch screen
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero: The Infotainment system can be
operated by a light finger movement on the screen.
Applies to infotainment Swing: The Infotainment system can be operated by
light finger pressure on the screen. If there is too much pressure there is a
risk of damage to the screen!
The brightness level of the screen can be set by » page 106 or » page 112.
To protect the screen, a suitable protective film for touch screens can be used.
The screen can be cleaned with a soft cloth and pure spirit if necessary.
97
Introductory information
Infotainment operation
Infotainment operation
Screen areas
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 133
Amundsen, Bolero: Screen areas
Fig. 134
Swing: screen areas / screen
display
Description of the screen display » Fig. 133 or » Fig. 134
Status line with time and outdoor temperature data and other information
Information and operation of the current menu
Function surfaces of the current menu
A
B
C
Operation principles
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 135
Amundsen, Bolero: Screen dis-
play
Fig. 136
Swing: Display screen
Description of the screen display » Fig. 135 or » Fig. 136
Name of the current menu
Return to the higher-level menu
Scroll symbol – you can move in the menu by moving your fingers up or
down on the scroll symbol
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Finger touch above the scroll symbol – changes to the next screen up
Finger touch below the scroll symbol – changes to the next screen
down
Menu item with “checkbox”
- Function is switched on
- Function is switched off
Opens a sub-menu of the menu item with a “pop-up window”
A
B
C
D
E
98
Infotainment
Function surfaces
The screen areas which confirm a function or a menu are called “function sur-
faces”.
White text – the surface is active and thus selectable
Grey text – the surface is inactive and therefore not selectable
Green frame – currently selected surface
Selecting a menu/menu item/function
By moving your finger across the screen in the desired direction (does not
apply to the infotainment Swing).
By moving your finger over the scroll bar
By tapping on the function surface or (Applies to Infotainment Swing).
By turning the dial .
Confirming a menu/menu item/function
By tapping on the function surface.
By pressing the dial
.
Returning to higher-level menu
By tapping on the function surface
.
By tapping on the screen outside of the “pop-up window”.
By pressing the corresponding button next to the screen (e.g. in the menu
Media, by pressing the

button).
Selecting a menu item/function value
- Selected menu item/function value
- Deselected menu item/function value
Setting a value
By tapping on the function surface
or
in the bottom of the screen.
By tapping the function surface with one of the following symbols , , , ,
, (Applies to Infotainment Swing).
By touching or moving your finger over the scale.
By turning the dial .
Note
Depending on the equipment, the Infotainment can also be operated by means
of the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel. Further information
» page 47.
Operating principles and display areas
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 137
Display
Description of the display » Fig. 137
Total number of menu items for each setting
Position of the current menu item
Name of the current menu item
Go to previous menu item value
Go to next menu item value
Current menu item value
Setting a value
The desired value of the selected item will be set to one of the following ways.
By pressing button
or
.
By turning the dial
.
Exit setting
To exit setting, press one of the buttons
-
.
If the device is not being operated, the display switches off after a few sec-
onds in the last selected mode of (Radio or Media).
A
B
C
D
E
F
99
Infotainment operation
Operating the menus
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 138 Operating the menus
Operating the menus » Fig. 138
Browsing the menu, list entries
Expand/reduce the menu window
Expand/reduce the menu window (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Open/close the menu window (does not apply to Infotainment Swing)
Close the menu window
Alphanumeric keyboard
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 139
Amundsen, Bolero: Example of
the keyboard display
A
B
C
D
Fig. 140
Swing: Example of the keyboard
display
The alphanumeric keyboard is used to enter letters, numbers and characters.
Description of the alphanumeric keyboard » Fig. 139 or » Fig. 140
Input line
Context-dependent:
- Switch from upper case to lower case and vice versa

- Switch to special characters

- Switch to numbers
Context-dependent:

- Switch to numbers

- Switch to Latin letters
- Switch to Cyrillic letters
Display of retrieved entries (the number of retrieved entries is displayed in
the function surface) (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero)
Context-dependent (applies to Infotainment Swing):

- Confirmation of the entered character
- Display of retrieved entries (the number of retrieved entries is dis-
played in the function surface)
Erase the entered characters
Hold to display the variants of the respective letters.
Switch between keyboards with specific characters of the selected
languages » page 107 or » page 113
Space
Move the cursor within the input line to the left
Move the cursor within the input line to the right
Confirmation of entered characters (applies to infotainment Amundsen,
Bolero)
A
B
C
D

100
Infotainment
Search
While entering characters, a search is made for corresponding entries.
The entry to be searched for (such as a telephone contact) must be entered
along with any special characters (diacritics).
By tapping on the function surface a list of matching entries opens.
Switching Infotainment on/off
To switch Infotainment on/off, press
.
Automatic switch-on of Infotainment
If Infotainment was not switched off with
before the ignition was switched
off, it will automatically switch on when the ignition is switched on.
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment
If the vehicle key is pulled out of the ignition lock while Infotainment is switch-
ed on, Infotainment will switch off automatically.
If the vehicle is fitted with the starter button, Infotainment will switch off au-
tomatically after the engine is switched off and the door is opened.
With the ignition off, Infotainment will automatically switch off after about 30
minutes.
Infotainment switches off automatically under certain circumstances. Infotain-
ment informs you of this via a text message on the Infotainment display.
Infotainment restart
If Infotainment stops responding (if it “freezes”), it can be restarted by press-
ing and holding
for longer than 10 s (does not apply to Infotainment Blues).
Show time and date on the screen
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
You can display the time and date on the Infotainment screen in standby mode.
In Infotainment Amundsen and Bolero, this is also possible in "screen off"
mode.
Standby mode
With the ignition on and infotainment off (Standbymode), it is possible to dis-
play the time and date on the Infotainment screen.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To switch the time and date display on/off, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Screen
Show clock in standby mode
.
The display mode can be changed by moving your finger sideways across the
screen (does not apply to Infotainment Swing).
“Screen off” mode (does not apply to infotainment Swing)
With the ignition on and functions
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
and
Display clock
when screen is off
» page 106 enabled, it is possible to display the time and date
when the Infotainment screen is switched off.
The display mode depends on the display mode selected in standby mode.
Adjusting the volume
Every change in volume is displayed on the screen.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
To increase the volume, turn the controller
clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn the controller
anticlockwise.
To mute, turn the controller
anticlockwise to 0.
or: To activate/deactivate the mute setting, press the button

(applies
to Infotainment Swing).
Applies to Infotainment Blues
To increase the volume, turn the control switch
1
» Fig. 131 on page 97
clockwise.
To decrease the volume, turn the control switch
1
anticlockwise.
To mute, turn the controller
1
anticlockwise to 0.
The following symbol appears on the screen when the sound is muted .
If playback was coming from a source in the Media menu at the time of mut-
ing, then playback will be stopped (not applicable to AUX).
CAUTION
High volumes can cause sound resonance in the vehicle.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
101
Infotainment operation
Infotainment menus
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 141
Overview of infotainment me-
nus: grid display
Fig. 142
Overview infotainment menus:
horizontal display
To display the overview of Infotainment menus, press the

button.
To set the display mode, press the button

, then tap the function surface
Screen
Menu:
.
Select the
Grid
» Fig. 141 or
Horizont. display
» Fig. 142 option.
Overview of Infotainment menus
Radio menu » page 117
Media menu » page 121
ŠKODA Connect Online Services » page 12
SmartLink menu » page 141
With a connection established to an external device, the actual connec-
tion is shown instead of a symbol
-
Android Auto
» page 142
-
Apple CarPlay
» page 143
-
MirrorLink®
» page 143
Telephone menu » page 132
Vehicle system settings » page 163
Navigation menu » page 145 (Applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
List of traffic reports (TMC) (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
» page 161
Media Command menu (Applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 130
Images menu » page 128
Sound settings » page 106
Infotainment settings » page 106
Configuration wizard
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
The configuration wizard is automatically displayed if there are at least two
non-selected menu items after turning on the Infotainment.
For manual display in Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, press the

button,
then tap on the function surface
Configuration wizard
.
For manual display in Infotainment Swing, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
Configuration wizard
.
The Configuration wizard allows you to set the following menu items in se-
quence.
Time and date format (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero)
Time format (applies to Infotainment Swing)
Date format (applies to Infotainment Swing)
Storing the radio station with the strongest reception signal at present
Pairing and connecting a telephone to the Infotainment system
Home address (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Setting the ŠKODA Connect Online Services
The selected menu item is marked with the symbol.
Operating using an application in the external device
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Some Infotainment functions can be operated using an application in the sup-
ported external device.
102
Infotainment
For the complete functionality of the application, data transmission from ex-
ternal devices must be activated and, if necessary, operation of the Infotain-
ment via the application must be approved.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
Activate data transfer in Infotainment. To do this, press the

button and
then tap function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data transfer
for ŠKODA Apps
.
Release Infotainment operation using the application. To do this, press the

button and then tap function surface
Mobile device data transfer
Use
apps to operate:
Confirm
/
Allow
.
Connect Infotainment to an external device via WLAN » page 140.
In the external device, launch an application for Infotainment operation (e.g.
ŠKODA Media Command).
Note
The description of Infotainment operation using ŠKODA Media Command is
part of the application.
Voice control
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
The navigation, telephone, radio and media menus can be operated by voice
commands.
The voice control system can be used either by the driver or by the front pas-
senger.
Function requirements for voice control
Infotainment is switched on.
No telephone call is being made using a telephone connected to Infotain-
ment.
The parking aid is not active.
Requirements for optimum voice command recognition
The voice commands must only be issued when the symbol is displayed on
the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded.
Speak at your normal volume without intonation and long pauses.
Avoid bad pronunciation.
Close the doors and windows in order to prevent environmental influences
from interfering with the function of the voice control.
You are advised to speak louder at higher speeds, so that the sound of your
voice is not drowned out by the increased ambient noise.
During voice control, limit additional noise in the vehicle, e.g. passengers talk-
ing at the same time.
WARNING
The emergency number should be dialled manually. Your voice commands
may not be recognised in such situations. The telephone connection may
not be established or the connection may take too much time to complete.
CAUTION
The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
For some Infotainment languages, voice control is not available. Infotainment
indicates this through a text message that is displayed on the screen after set-
ting the Infotainment language.
Note
During voice control, no navigation announcements and traffic announce-
ments are played.
Switching voice control on/off
Fig. 143
Voice control: Main menu
Switch on
Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel or button

on
the Infotainment system.
The main menu is displayed » Fig. 143.
103
Infotainment operation
Switch off
Press the button twice on the multifunction steering wheel or button

on the Infotainment system.
or: Issue the voice command “End voice control”.
Operation principle
Fig. 144
Example of screen display
The voice control main menu » Fig. 143 on page 103 contains basic voice com-
mands for the individual menus.
Other voice commands are displayed by tapping the respective function sur-
face, if required, by issuing the name of respective command (e.g. navigation).
The screen shows the following » Fig. 144.
Context-dependent:
The system is waiting for a voice command
The system recognises a voice command
The system plays a message
Voice command entry was stopped
Available list entries
Possible voice commands
Displaying other possible voice commands
Voice commands that can be issued are indicated in “quotation marks”.
Note
Depending on the equipment, the voice control symbols
A
» Fig. 144 are also
displayed on the display of the instrument cluster.
A
B
C
Voice commands
Enter
The voice commands must only be issued when the symbol is displayed
on the Infotainment screen and the input tone has completely faded. The in-
put tone can be switched on/off. To do this, press

and then tap on
Voice control
.
It is not necessary to wait for the end of message playback when Infotainment
is playing a message. The Infotainment message can be terminated by pressing
the button

or button on the multifunction steering wheel. Then a voice
command can be issued. Voice control is much faster as a result.
Stop
This allows more time to enter the voice command (e.g. in the list of retrieved
contacts).
The process for entering voice commands can be stopped by moving a finger
up/down across the screen or by turning the controller
.
When stopping, the symbol changes from
to
.
Restore
The procedure for entering voice commands can be restarted in one of the fol-
lowing ways.
By tapping on the function surface
.
By pressing the button

on the Infotainment.
By pressing the button
on the multifunction steering wheel.
Not recognising a voice command
If a voice command is not recognised by the Infotainment system three times
in succession, then voice control is stopped.
Correction of a voice command input
A voice command can be corrected, modified or re-entered by pressing the
button

or the button on the multifunction steering wheel. However,
this is only possible as long as the symbol is displayed on the screen.
You do not have to wait until the voice command is recognised by Infotain-
ment.
104
Infotainment
Voice commands can be used during voice control
Voice command Function
Back Return to the previous menu
Help Reproduce and display possible voice commands
Voice commands that can be used while browsing the list entries
Voice command Function
Next page
Browse menu/list/directory
Previous page
First page
Last page
Additional Information
Navigation – applies to Infotainment Amundsen
To enter a destination, you must first issue the command“Enter address” and
then follow the Infotainment instructions.
It is not necessary to spell city and street names if the entered destination is
located in a country that has no voice control available for the language.
Online POI search – applies to Infotainment Amundsen
When Infotainment Online » page 16 services are activated, a POI search can
also be carried out online by issuing the voice command “Find online POI”.
Radio
To enable a radio station to be selected using voice command, the station must
be stored in the list of available stations » page 119 or in the preset list
» page 120.
Updating the Infotainment software
Fig. 145
Available software updates on
the ŠKODA websites
The software update ensures optimum operation of Infotainment (e.g. com-
patibility with new telephones).
Information on Infotainment compatibility can be found on the following
ŠKODA Internet pages. This is done by scanning the QR code » Fig. 145 or en-
tering the following address into the web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
To determine the software version, press the

button then tap the func-
tion surface
System information
.
To start the software update, press the

button, then tap the function
surface
System information
Update software
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To determine the software version, press the

button, then tap the
Sys-
tem information
function surface.
To start the software update, press the

button, then tap the
System in-
formation
Update software
function surface.
105
Infotainment operation
Infotainment settings – Amundsen, Bolero
Infotainment system settings
Sound settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface .
Volume
- Volume settings
Radio announcements
- Volume adjustment of traffic announcements (TP)
Navigation announcements
- Volume adjustment of navigation announcements
(does not apply to infotainment Bolero)
Voice control
- Volume setting for voice output
Maximum switch-on volume
- Set the maximum volume when switching on In-
fotainment
Speed dependent Speed-dep. vol.adjust.
- Increases the volume as speed increa-
ses
AUX volume:
- Sets the volume for the external device connected via AUX
Quiet
- Low volume
Medium
- Medium volume
Loud
- High volume
Bluetooth audio:
- Volume adjustment of the external device connected via
the Bluetooth
®
audio profile
Quiet
- Low volume
Medium
- Medium volume
Loud
- High volume
Entertainment fading while parking
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume)
when the parking aid is activated
Entertainment fading (nav. announce.)
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) in the event of a navigation announcement
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Sets the equalizer
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
ŠKODA Surround
- Switch surround sound on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Virtual Subwoofer
-Switch virtual subwoofer on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Touchscreen tone
- Switch audible tone when touching the screen on/off
No navigation announcements during calls
- Switches the navigation prompts on or
off during a telephone conversation
Display settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Screen
.
Menu:
- Setting the infotainment menu display
Horizont. display
- Horizontal display » Fig. 142 on page 102
Grid display
- Grid display » Fig. 141 on page 102
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Display clock when screen is off
- Time and date display when the screen is
switched off
Brightness:
- Screen brightness setting
Touchscreen tone
- Switch audible tone when touching the screen on/off
Animation when finger near screen
- Switch the proximity sensors on/off (when
the function is on the bottom bar with function surfaces will be displayed e.g.
in the main Navigation menu when you move a finger towards the screen)
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Time and date settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Time and date
.
Time Source:
- Time source settings: manual/GPS (applies to infotainment
Amundsen)
Time:
- Time Settings
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
Automatic summer time
- Switches the automatic switch to summer time on/off
Time zone
- Sets the time zone
Time Format:
- Sets the time format
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Sets the date format
Infotainment language settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
In some languages, after selecting the function surface,
Female
or
Male
are dis-
played for the choice of Infotainment voice prompts.
106
Infotainment
Note
When a language is selected which does not support voice control, Infotain-
ment will indicate this with a message on the screen.
The messages are generated by Infotainment. Flawless clarity (e.g. road or
city name) cannot always be guaranteed.
More keypad languages settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Additional keyboard lan-
guages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other
than those in the currently selected language to be entered.
Unit settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Units
.
Distance:
- Distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Fuel consumption:
- Consumption units
Pressure:
- Tyre pressure units
Settings for data transfer
Activated data transfer enables data transfer between the Infotainment sys-
tem and the external device or the operation of some Infotainment functions
using the applications of the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Mobile device data trans-
fer
.
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Switch data transfer on and off
Use apps to operate:
- Configure Infotainment operation via the applications of
the external device (applies to infotainment Amundsen)
Deactivate
- Deactivation of Infotainment operation via an external device
Confirm
- Infotainment operation with required confirmation
Allow
- Infotainment operation without required confirmation
Voice control settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Voice control
.
Example commands (infotainment syst.)
- Switch menu display with basic language
commands on/off when activating voice control
Voice control session start tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal when
turning on the voice control
Voice control session end tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal when voice
control ends
Input tone in voice dialogue
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal for the voice
input
End tone in voice dialogue
- Activate/deactivate the audible signal for the voice
input
Safe removal of the external device
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Remove safely:
and se-
lect the external device to be removed.
Reset to factory settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu, all or only selected settings can be restored.
Bluetooth
®
settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch the Bluetooth
®
function on/off
Visibility:
- Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for Bluetooth
®
devices
on/off
Name:
- Change the name of the Bluetooth
®
unit
Paired devices
- Display the list of paired Bluetooth
®
devices
Find devices
- Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices
Bluetooth audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a
Bluetooth
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
107
Infotainment settings – Amundsen, Bolero
Wireless settings
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
WLAN
.
WLAN
- List of available hotspots of external devices
WLAN
- Switch Infotainment WLAN on/off
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
- Establish a secure connection to the hot-
spot of the external device using WPS (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Manual settings
- Parameter settings for searching and connecting to the hot-
spot of the external device
Network name
- Enter the Hotspot name
Network key
- Access passkey setting
Security level:
- Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Connect
- Establish a connection
Search
- Search/restore the list of available hotspots
Mobile hotspot
- Infotainment hotspot setting (the symbol
is displayed in the
function surface with the number of connected external devices)
Mobile hotspot
- Switch the Infotainment hotspot on/off
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
- Establish a secure connection to the Info-
tainment hotspot via WPS (applies to Amundsen)
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
- Parameter settings for connection to the Infotain-
ment hotspot
Security level:
- Security setting (WPA2 always set)
Network key
- Input of the access password
SSID: ...
- Name of the infotainment hotspot
Do not send network name (SSID)
-Turn Infotainment hotspot visibility on/off
Store
- Storage of the parameters set for the Infotainment hotspot
Network settings
Applies to infotainment Amundsen with the connected Carstick device.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Network
.
Network settings
- Sets the data connection from the associated telephone
service provider (APN settings)
Access point name: ...
- Access point name setting
User name: …
- User name setting
Passkey: …
- Password setting
Authentication
- Setting for the type of verification
Normal
- Without verification
Safe
- Verification required
Reset Access Point (APN)
- Delete the parameters for the network setting
Store
- Saves the parameters for the network setting
Network provider: ...
- Selection of the network provider (the menu item is visi-
ble when the SIM card is inserted in the CarStick device)
Data roaming
- Enable/disable the use of data roaming connection
Current connection details
- Display of information on data downloaded (tap the
function surface
Reset
to delete the data information)
Data connection:
- Usage settings for the data connection (Internet connection)
of the SIM card inserted in the CarStick device
Off
- Use of the data connection is not possible
Ask
- Use of the data connection is only possible after it has been confirmed
On
- Use of the data connection is possible at any time
ŠKODA Connect online services settings
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
ŠKODA Connect (Online
Services)
.
Services Management
- Information on licensing of the respective online serv-
ices and the option to switch them on/off
Registration
- Enter the activation PIN code for online services (received in the
user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website)
System information
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
System information
.
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, the Bluetooth
®
software version, the navigation
database version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
To Update the POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect Portal website, tap on the function surface
Online update
.
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
108
Infotainment
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface .
Sound
- Sound settings
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Arrow buttons:
- Set the function of the function surfaces
Preset list
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Station list
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcast-
ing range
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches TP traffic program on/off
Delete presets
- Deletes the preset buttons
Station logos
- Manual management of station logos
Radio text
- Switches the radio text display (FM and DAB) on and off
Advanced settings
- Other settings that are different depending on the selected
broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
Region for station logo:
- Set the region for station logos
Automatic frequency control (AF)
- Activate/deactivate the search for alternative
frequencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
RDS Regional:
- Activate/deactivate automatic tracking of regionally related
stations
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
Autostore station logos
- Automatic storage of the station logos
DAB traffic announcements
- Switch DAB traffic announcements on/off
Other DAB messages
- Switch other announcements on/off (e.g., warnings, re-
gional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB - DAB station tracking
- Activate/deactivate automatic DAB station tracking
on another frequency or in other station groups
Automatic DAB - FM switching
- Activate/deactivate auto-switching from DAB to
the FM broadcasting range if the DAB signal is lost
Automatic change from DAB to FM
In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by (

) while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system
automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
Media menu settings
In the main Media menu, tap function surface
.
Sound
- Sound settings
Mix/repeat including subfolders
- Activate/deactivate the title display including
subfolders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
WLAN
- WLAN settings (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Remove safely:
- Safe removal of the external device
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
Image menu settings
In the main Images menu, tap on function surface .
Image view:
- View setting
Full
- Display the maximum image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Automatic
- Full screen display
109
Infotainment settings – Amundsen, Bolero
Display time:
- Set the image display time in the slideshow
Repeat slideshow
- Switching the slideshow repeat on/off
Telephone menu settings
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Hands-free
telephone - Switching a call to the phone/back to Infotainment
(the menu item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 107
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Mailbox number:
- Enter the phone number of the mailbox
Sort by:
- Sorting of the telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
Name
- Sort by contact first name
Import contacts:
- Import phone contacts
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected tele-
phone)
Reminder: Remember your mobile
- Activate/deactivate the warning against
leaving your telephone in the car (if the telephone was connected to the In-
fotainment)
Show pictures for contacts
- Activate/deactivate the display of the images as-
signed to the contacts
Conference call
- Activate/deactivate conference calls
Network
- Set the telephone service provider network of the SIM card inser-
ted in the CarStick device (applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 108
SmartLink+ menu settings
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
Activate data transfer for ŠKODA apps
- Activate/deactivate data transfer for
ŠKODA applications
MirrorLink® - Settings of the system MirrorLink
®
Allow MirrorLink® notification to be shown
- Turn the display of Mirror link
®
appli-
cation messages on the Infotainment screen on/off
Navigation menu settings
Route options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Route options
.
Suggest 3 alternative routes
- Switch the menu for alternative routes on/off (eco-
nomical, fast, short)
Route:
- Set the preferred route
Most frequent routes
- Show/hide the menu of the most frequent routes in the
split screen
Dynamic route
- Switch on/off dynamic route recalculation due to TMC traffic
reports or online traffic reports
Avoid motorways
- Activate/deactivate the non-use of motorways in the
route calculation
Avoid ferries and motorail trains
- Activate/deactivate the non-use of ferries
and motorail trains in the route calculation
Avoid toll roads
- Activate/deactivate the use of toll roads for route calcula-
tion
Avoid tunnels
- Switch on/off use of tunnels for route calculation
Avoid routes requiring toll stickers
- Activate/deactivate the use of routes re-
quiring toll stickers on/off for route calculation
Show available toll stickers
- Selection of countries for which a valid toll sticker is
required (routes requiring toll stickers are used for route calculation)
Include trailer
- Activate/deactivate the setting to include the trailer in route
calculation » page 158
Map
In the main
Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
.
Show road signs
- Switch the display of traffic signs on/off
Lane guidance
- Activate/deactivate the display of lane guidance
Show favourites
- Activate/deactivate the display of favourites
Show POIs
- Activate/deactivate the display of POIs
Select categories for POIs
- Select the categories of displayed POIs
Show brand logos for POIs
- Activate/deactivate the company logos available
for the POIs shown
110
Infotainment
Traffic flow settings
- Setting for the display of a traffic obstruction received
from online traffic
Display free-moving traffic
- Activate/deactivate the display of routes with
free-moving traffic
Display congestion
- Activate/deactivate the display of routes with heavy traf-
fic
Display traffic events (symbols on map)
- Activate/deactivate the display of
routes with a traffic incident
Manage memory
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
.
Sort contacts:
- Configure the phonebook layout
By surname
- Sorting by the contact surname
By first name
- Sorting by the contact first name
Define home address
- Enter the home address
Delete "My POIs"
- Delete your own POI categories (Personal POI)
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
- Import/update your own POI categories (Personal
POI)
Retrieve "My POIs" (online)
- Online import/update of your own POI categories
created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website
Import destinations (SD/USB)
- Import destinations in vCard format
Delete user data
- Delete user data (by tapping function surface
Delete
and con-
firming the deletion)
Last destinations
- Delete the last destinations
Dest. memory
- Delete the stored destinations
Online destinations
- Delete the stored online destinations
Routes
- Delete saved routes
My points of interest (Personal POI)
- Delete the custom POIs
Entered cities
- Delete the history of places already entered via the address
Home address
- Delete the stored home address
Flagged destination
- Delete the flagged destination
Most frequent routes
- Delete the most travelled routes
Navigation announcements
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Navigation announce-
ments
.
Volume
- Volume control of the navigation announcements
Entertainment fading (nav. announce.)
- Configure the fading of the audio volume
(e.g. radio volume.) when navigation announcements are being made
No navigation announcements during calls
- Activate/deactivate non-playback of
navigation announcements during a telephone call
Note: “My POIs”
- Activate/deactivate an audible indication when approaching a
custom POI (if supported by the imported custom POI)
Speed limits
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Speed limits
.
The maximum speed limits for the current country are displayed.
If the
Note: national border crossed
» page 112, Advanced settings function is acti-
vated, the country-specific speed limits are displayed when you cross the in-
ternational border.
Fuel options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Fuel options
.
Select preferred fuel station
- Select your preferred fuel station brand (the selec-
ted station brand will be displayed in the first three positions of the list)
Fuel warning
– Activate/deactivate the display of a warning message with the
option to search for the nearest petrol station when the fuel level reaches
the reserve area
Version information
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
A list of countries is displayed that exist for the navigation data, together with
the date of the last update.
The navigation data can be updated by tapping on the function surface
Update
(SD/USB)
or
Online update
.
The information on updating the navigation data can be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA websites.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
111
Infotainment settings – Amundsen, Bolero
Advanced settings
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Time display:
- Select the time display in the status line
- Estimated arrival time at destination
- Estimated travelling time to the destination
Status line:
- Selection of the destination type for which the status line, the
route and travel time are displayed (this also determines which destination
type is displayed in the map after selecting )
- Route destination
- Next stopover
Note: national border crossed
- Activate/deactivate the display of country-specif-
ic speed limits when crossing national borders
Demo mode
- Activate/deactivate guidance in demo mode
Define demo mode starting point
- Specify the start point of the route guidance in
demo mode by entering the address or the current vehicle position
Infotainment settings – Swing
Infotainment system settings
Sound settings
Press the

or

button, then tap the function surface
Sound
.
Volume
- Volume settings
Max. switch-on volume
- Sets the maximum volume when Infotainment is
turned on
Announcements
- Adjustment of traffic announcements volume (TP)
Speed-dep. vol.adjust.
- Volume increases as speed increases
Entert. fading
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) with activated
parking aid
AUX volume:
- Sets the volume for the device connected via AUX
BT audio:
- Volume setting of the device connected via the Bluetooth
®
audio
profile
Balance - Fader
- Sets the balance between left and right, front and rear
Bass - Mid - Treble
- Sets the equalizer
Confirmation tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible tone when touching the
screen
ŠKODA Surround
- Switch surround sound on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Virtual Subwoofer
-Switch virtual subwoofer on/off (cannot be used in Radio
mode)
Display settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Screen
.
Switch off screen (in 10 seconds)
- Enable/disable the automatic power off func-
tion
Brightness:
- Screen brightness setting
Confirmation tone
- Activate/deactivate the audible tone when touching the
screen
Show clock in standby mode
- Time and date displayed on the screen when the
ignition is switched on and Infotainment is switched off
Time and date settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Time and date
.
112
Infotainment
Time:
- Time Settings
Time Format:
- Sets the time format
Summer (DST)
- Switches summer time on/off
Automatic summer time
- Switch on/off the automatic switch to daylight saving
time
Date:
- Date settings
Date format:
- Sets the date format
Infotainment language settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Language
.
Select the Infotainment language.
More keypad languages settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Add. keyboard languages
.
In this menu, a keyboard language set can be added to allow characters other
than those in the currently selected language to be entered.
Unit settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Units
.
Distance:
- Distance units
Speed:
- Speed units
Temperature:
- Temperature units
Volume:
- Volume units
Consumption:
- Fuel consumption units
Pressure:
- Tyre pressure units
Safe removal of the external data source
Press the

button then tap function surface
Remove SD card safely
/
Remove
USB safely
and confirm the corresponding message regarding safe removal of
the source.
Reset to factory settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Factory settings
.
In this menu, individual settings or all settings can be restored at the same
time.
Bluetooth
®
settings
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
Bluetooth
.
Bluetooth
- Switch the Bluetooth
®
function on/off
Visibility:
- Switch the visibility of the Bluetooth
®
device for Bluetooth
®
devices
on/off
Name
- Changing the name of the Bluetooth
®
unit
Paired devices
- Display the list of paired Bluetooth
®
devices
Find devices
- Search for available Bluetooth
®
devices
BT audio (A2DP/AVRCP)
- Activate/deactivate the ability to connect a Blue-
tooth,
®
audio device (e.g. MP3 player, tablet etc...)
System information
Press the

button, then tap the function surface
System information
.
The information available will be displayed, for example regarding the Infotain-
ment hardware and software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc.
To Update the Infotainment software, Bluetooth
®
software version, etc., tap
on the function surface
Update software
.
The information on available software updates is obtained from a ŠKODA part-
ner or from the following ŠKODA Internet pages.
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment
Radio menu settings
Settings for all broadcasting ranges
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface .
Scan
- Automatic playback of short portions of all available stations in the
current frequency range
Sound
- Sound settings
Arrow buttons:
- Set the function of the function surfaces
Presets
- Change between stations stored under the preset buttons
Stations
- Change between all available stations of the selected broadcasting
range
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
Radio text
- Switches the radio text display (FM and DAB) on and off
113
Infotainment settings – Swing
Kind of stat. list::
- Sort types of radio stations in the station list (DAB)
Global
- Alphanumeric station sorting with filtering option according to the
transmitted program type
Hierarchical
- Station sorting according to their assigned parent station
groups (Ensemble) - Tree structure of the list
Station logos
- Manual management of station logos
Delete presets
- Delete the stations stored under preset buttons
Advanced settings
- Other settings that are different depending on the selected
broadcasting range (FM and DAB)
Advanced settings (FM)
Select the FM band in the Radio main menu and tap on the function surface
Advanced settings
.
RDS Regional:
- Activate/deactivate automatic tracking of regionally related
stations
Automatic
- Auto-selects the station with the best reception at the moment.
If you lose reception in the given the region, Infotainment will automatically
set another available region.
Fixed
- Maintains the selected regional station continuously. When the sig-
nal is lost, another station must be set manually.
Alternative frequency (AF)
- Activate/deactivate the search for alternative fre-
quencies of the station currently being played
Radio Data System (RDS)
- enable/disable RDS function (receiving additional in-
formation from the station)
Sort stations:
- Sort types of radio stations in the station list
Group
- Sort by transmitted program type
ABC
- Alphabetical order according to station name
Advanced settings (DAB)
In the Radio main menu, select the DAB range and tap on the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
.
DAB traffic announcements
- Enable/disable DAB announcements
Other DAB messages
- Switch other announcements on/off (e.g., warnings, re-
gional weather, sports reports, financial news)
DAB station tracking
- Switch on/off automatic DAB station tracking on another
frequency or in other station groups
Aut. DAB - FM switching
- Switch on/off auto-switching from DAB to the FM fre-
quency band if the DAB signal is lost
DAB program tracking
When a DAB transmitter is a part of several broadcast stations and if the cur-
rent station group is not available on any other frequency, then when the signal
is poor, the same station will be searched in another station group.
Automatic change from DAB to FM
In the event of bad DAB reception, the device tries to find an FM station.
The station name is followed by () while the station is being received on the
FM band. When the corresponding DAB station is received again, the system
automatically switches from FM to DAB.
If a DAB station is also not available in the FM band due to poor reception, In-
fotainment will be switched to mute.
Media menu settings
In the main Media menu, tap function surface
.
Mix/repeat inc. subfolders
- Activate/deactivate the title display including sub-
folders
Bluetooth
- Settings for the Bluetooth
®
function
Traffic program (TP)
- Switches the traffic program on/off
Activate AUX
- Enable/disable the AUX input
Remove SD card safely
- Safe removal of the inserted SD storage card
Remove USB safely
- Safe removal of external devices connected to the USB in-
put
Telephone menu settings
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Hands-free
telephone - Switching a call to the phone/back to Infotainment
(the menu item is displayed during a call)
Select mobile phone
- Search for available telephones/list of paired tele-
phones/select telephone
Find
- Search for available phones
Bluetooth
- Bluetooth
®
settings » page 113
User profile
- User profile settings
Manage favourites
- Set the function surfaces for your favourite contacts
Sort by:
- Sorting of the telephone contact list
Surname
- Sort by contact name
Name
- Sort by contact first name
114
Infotainment
Imp. contacts
- Import telephone contacts
Select ring tone
- Select the ring tone (depending on the connected tele-
phone)
Remember your mobile
- Turn on/off the warning against forgetting your phone
in the vehicle (if the phone was connected to Infotainment)
Simultan. calls
- enable/disable the option to hold two concurrent calls
Infotainment settings – Blues
Infotainment system settings
Introduction to the subject
Individual menu items for the Infotainment settings can be accessed by press-
ing one of the buttons below.
Sound settings » page 115
Infotainment settings » page 115
Settings of the currently opened Radio » page 116 or Media menu
» page 116
Sound settings
Press the

button repeatedly.
The following menu items of the settings are displayed in sequence.
Bass
- bass setting
Middle
- mid-tone setting
Treble
- treble setting
Balance
- Sets the balance between the left and right-hand sides
Fader
- Sets the sound focus between front/rear (applies to vehicles with rear
speakers)
Infotainment settings
Press the

button repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
GALA
- Speed-sensitive volume adjustment (higher numbers indicate a steep-
er increase in the volume level)
On volume
- Sets the maximum volume when the Infotainment is switched on
TP volume
- Sets the volume for in-coming traffic program alerts (TP)
PDC audio
- Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio volume) when the parking aid
is activated
Low
- Low volume attenuation
Middle
- Medium volume attenuation
High
- High volume attenuation



115
Infotainment settings – Blues
Clock
- Time display on the Infotainment display (with the ignition on and the
Infotainment off)
Yes
- Switches the display on
No
- Switches the display off
Restore
- Reset to factory settings
Press
- Confirmation of the factory settings
Radio menu settings
When the Radio menu is open, press button

repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
TP
- Sets the traffic news reception
Yes
- Traffic news is being received
No
- Traffic news is not being received
Scan
- Browse available radio stations
Press
- Start the scan
Manual
- Manual selection of a radio station
Press
- Start manual selection
Arrows
- Sets the station selection (function of the
or
button)
Stations
- Select from the list of available stations
Presets
- Select from the preset buttons
Media menu settings
With the Media menu open, press button

repeatedly.
The following menu items are displayed in sequence.
Mix
- Switch random play on/off
Off
- Switch off
On
- Switch on
Repeat
- Repeat playback
All
- From the current source
Track
- Track
Folder
- Folder
TP
- Sets the traffic news reception
Yes
- Traffic news is being received
No
- Traffic news is not being received
AUX
- Activate/deactivate the AUX input
On
- Activation
Off
- Deactivation
AUX vol.
- Sets the input level of the AUX audio source (the menu item is only
available when an audio source is connected)
Low
- Low volume
Middle
- Medium volume
High
- High volume
116
Infotainment
Radio
Operation
Introduction to the subject
Depending on the vehicle equipment and the Infotainment type, analogue ra-
dio reception of the FM and AM frequency ranges as well as DAB digital radio
reception is possible.
CAUTION
For vehicles with window antennas, do not stick foil or metal coated stickers
to the window - radio signal reception could be affected.
Car parks, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains can interfere with the radio
signal. even causing it to fail completely.
Main menu
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 146
Amundsen, Bolero: Radio - Main
menu (DAB)
Fig. 147
Swing: Radio - Main menu
To display the main menu, press button

.
or: Press button

, then tap function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 146 or » Fig. 147
The selected radio station (name or frequency)
Radio text (FM) / Description of the group (DAB)
Preset buttons for favourite stations
Choice of radio broadcasting range (FM / AM / DAB)
Choice of storage group for the preferred station
Choice of storage group for the preferred station (applies to infotainment
Swing)
Change the station
List of available stations (does not apply to infotainment Swing)
Manual / semi-automatic station search
Radio text display (DAB) / picture presentation (DAB)
Settings of the Radio menu » page 109 or » page 113
Information symbol in the status line
Symbol Meaning
 Traffic signal is available
  Traffic signal is not available
Signal is not available (DAB)
If the displayed station name continuously changes (dynamic text), then it is
possible to fix the current text by holding your finger on the device screen in
the station name area. By holding your finger in the area of the station name
again, the station name is displayed in its entirety again.
A
B
C
D
E
117
Radio
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 148
Display
Description of the display » Fig. 148
The selected broadcasting range
The selected radio station (frequency or identifier)
Status bar
Symbols in the status bar
C
Symbol Meaning
 Browse radio frequency range manually
 Browse radio frequency range automatically
-
Number of a position (station button) under which the
radio station is stored
Sound off
 A traffic information station is available
 No traffic information station is available
Choose broadcasting range
Each broadcasting area has two storage groups - FM1 and FM2 or AM1 and
AM2.
Press the

button repeatedly.
Searching for stations and selecting the frequency
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Searching for stations
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface or .
A
B
C
Depending on the setting
Arrow buttons:
, an available station from the Sta-
tion list or a station stored to the Preset buttons for the currently selected
radio frequency range is set.
Selecting the frequency
To display the value of the currently chosen frequency, go to the main Radio
menu and tap the function surface .
To set the desired frequency value use the slider or the function surfaces
in the bottom area of the screen, if necessary, turn the controller .
Scanning through the stations one after the other (scan)
The function scans through all the available stations in the current frequency
range in succession, for a few seconds each.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
To start automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Radio
menu and tap on the function surface
Scan
.
To end automatic scanning, tap the function surface
.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To start/end automatic scanning of the available stations, go to the main Ra-
dio menu and press the controller
.
Searching for stations and selecting the frequency
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Searching for stations
The Infotainment will automatically search for available radio stations in the
background, which can be selected immediately after the Infotainment is
switched on.
Press button
or
.
You will switch to the previous or next station.
Semi-automatic station search
Press and hold button
or
.
A search commences in the selected direction and stops at the next station
with sufficient signal strength.
Selecting the frequency
Press button

Manual
.
Press button
or
repeatedly and set the desired value for the frequency
range.
118
Infotainment
The value of the frequency range changes by 0.1 MHz on the FM band and 9
kHz in the AM band.
Scanning through the stations one after the other (scan)
Press button

Scan
.
The search starts.
This function plays all the available stations in succession for a few seconds
each.
Pressing the
button again ends the search and the current station remains
set.
Selecting a station from the preset list
By pressing the respective button
-
, it changes to the station stored under
the given position in the current storage group (e.g. FM1).
List of available stations
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 149
Amundsen, Bolero: Example list of available FM/DAB stations
Fig. 150 Swing: Example list of available FM/DAB stations (hierarchical
sorting)
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
range, go to the main Radio menu and tap the function surface
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To sort (FM) the stations in alphabetical order, by group or genre, tap on the
function surface
A
» Fig. 149 » .
Applies to Infotainment Swing
To display the list of available stations of the currently selected broadcasting
range, go to the main Radio menu and rotate the controller
.
To play, tap on the function surface of the desired station.
To filter the stations based on the program type (e.g. Music, Sport etc.) in the
FM station list (with activated RDS function) and the DAB station list (with
global sorting of the channel list selected), tap the function surface

» Fig. 150 -
.
Information symbols
Symbol Meaning
Radio station, which is stored on a preset button
Currently played station
 Traffic information station
(e.g.) 
Type of program being broadcast (FM) (does not apply to Info-
tainment Swing)
(e.g.)  Type of regional broadcast (FM)
(e.g.)
Type of program being broadcast (FM, DAB) (applies to infotain-
ment Swing)
119
Radio
Symbol Meaning
Signal reception is not available (DAB)
The transmitter reception is not secure (DAB) (applies to Info-
tainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing)
Stations with image broadcasting (DAB) (does not apply to info-
tainment Swing)
Refresh list
The station list is updated automatically in the FM radio range.
In the AM and DABradio range, the update takes place manually by tapping the
function surface » Fig. 149 or » Fig. 150.
CAUTION
To sort the stations according to genre, the RDS and AF functions must be
switched on. These functions can be switched on/off in the main Radio menu
in the FM band by tapping the function surface
Advanced settings
.
Preset buttons for your favourite stations
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
In every broadcasting range, there are station buttons available to store pre-
ferred stations
C
that are split into groups
E
» Fig. 146 on page 117 (does not
apply to Infotainment Swing)
Each radio range includes 12 station buttons for saving preferred stations.
These are each divided into three groups (applies to Infotainment Swing).
To save a station in the main Radio menu, hold down the desired function
surface
C
until an acoustic signal sounds.
To save a station in the station list, keep the function surface of the desired
station held down, select the memory group, and then tap the desired station
button.
Presets for preferred stations
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Storing manually
Select a preset group (e.g. FM1).
Press and hold one of the preset buttons
-
.
The station is stored in the selected position.
Storage is confirmed by an acoustic signal and by the display of the station
button number in the status line of the display.
Automatic storage
Press and hold button

.
In the Infotainment display, the following text appears
AutoStore ...
and in the
current storage group (e.g. FM1), six radio stations are stored with the stron-
gest signal.
Station logos - Amundsen, Bolero
In the Infotainment memory, you can store station logos, which are assigned
automatically by the device when stations are stored under preset buttons.
Assigning a station logo automatically
To deactivate/activate, go to the main Radio menu and tap the function sur-
face
Advanced settings
Autostore station logos
.
Assigning a station logo manually
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Removing a station logo manually
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, gif, png, bmp.
We recommend a resolution of up to 500x500 pixels.
Station logos - Swing
The station button for a preferred station can contain the name and the sta-
tion logo.
Assigning a station logo
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
Tap on an occupied station button and select the data carrier (SD card, USB).
Search for and select the desired station logo on the respective data carrier.
Removing a station logo
In the main Radio menu, tap the function surface
Station logos
.
120
Infotainment
Tap on the station button from which you wish to remove a logo.
or: Tap on the function surface
All areas
to delete the logos of all station
buttons at the same time.
Confirm/cancel the removal.
Note
The following image formats are supported: jpg, png.
We recommend a resolution of up to 400x240 pixels.
TP Traffic program
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero, Swing
To activate/deactivate traffic monitoring, go to the main Radio menu and
tap on function surface
Traffic program (TP)
.
Applies to Infotainment Blues
To activate/deactivate traffic monitoring, go to the Radio menu and press
button

TP
Yes
/
No
.
During a traffic announcement, it is possible to cancel the current announce-
ment or to deactivate traffic monitoring.
Note
If the station that is currently set does not transmit traffic reports or the sig-
nal is not available, then Infotainment automatically searches in the back-
ground for another TP station.
During playback in the Media menu or a station in the AM radio range, traffic
news is received from the previously selected FM radio range.
Media
Operation
Main menu
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 151
Amundsen, Bolero: Media - Main
menu
Fig. 152
Swing: Media - Main Menu
To display the main menu, press button

.
or
: Press button

, then tap function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 151 or » Fig. 152
Information on playing track
Playback timeline with a slider
Select the audio source (the SD2 source is not available)
Selected audio source / album image / album overview
Depending on the audio source type:
Folder/track list
Multimedia database
Settings of menu Media » page 109 or » page 114
A
B
C
D
121
Media
Note
Information concerning the track being played appears on the screen, if it is
stored as a so-called ID3 Tag on the audio source. If no ID3 tag is available, only
the track name is displayed.
The remaining playback time indicated does not correspond to the actual re-
maining playback time for tracks with variable bit rates (VBR).
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 153
Display
To display the main menu, press button

.
Description of the display » Fig. 153
Information line
Name of the track being played
Status bar
Select audio source
Press the

button again.
The Infotainment only switches between connected audio sources with playa-
ble content.
The Infotainment can detect a maximum of 1024 directories in the connected
audio sources and can play back a maximum of 6500 files. The Infotainment
can play a max 1024 files from a directory.
Adjusting
With the Media menu open, press button

» page 116.
Symbols in the information line
A
Symbols in the status bar
C
A
B
C
Playback control - Amundsen, Bolero
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Finger movement to the right of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 151 on page 121
after 3 seconds from the start of
track playback
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Play the previous track
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
Finger movement to the right of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 151 on page 121
within 3 seconds of the start of track
playback
Play the next track
Tap
Finger movement to the left of the
screen area
A
» Fig. 151 on page 121
Switch random playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback of specific
track on/off
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the time line
B
» Fig. 151 on page 121.
Playback control - Swing
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Play the previous track
Tap within 3 seconds from the
start of the track playback
122
Infotainment
Function Action
Plays the current track from the start
Tap after 3 s from the start of the
track playback
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Play the next track Tap
Switch random playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback from the cur-
rent album or folder on/off
Tap
Switch repeat playback of specific
track on/off
Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 151 on page 121 or » Fig. 152 on page 121.
Playback control - Blues
Function Action
Play/Pause Press
Fast-forward within the track Hold
Fast-rewind within the track Hold
Plays the current track from the start
Press
(3 seconds after
the start of the title play-
back)
Play the previous track
Press
(within 3 sec-
onds after the start of
the track playback)
Play the next track Press
Change to/to previous folder/play-list of the cur-
rent audio source
a)
Press
Change to/to next folder/play-list of the current
audio source
a)
Press
a)
The function is not supported by Apple devices.
Folder/track list
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 154
Amundsen, Bolero: Folder/track
list
Fig. 155
Swing: Folder/track list
To display the folder/track list in the Media main menu, tap on the function
surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected source).
To playback, select a track.
Folder/track list » Fig. 154 or » Fig. 155
Selected audio source/audio source folder (move within the folder by tap-
ping the function surface for the folder)
Folder/track playback options
Display of multimedia database (only available in the source directory)
Audio source selection
Folder
Playlist
Track currently being played/track playback stopped
The title cannot be played (tapping on the function surface shows the
cause).
A
B
C
123
Media
Note
In the list, the first 1000 entries (tracks, directories etc.) with the oldest crea-
tion date are displayed.
The scanning speed of the folder/track list depends on the connection speed
and volume of data.
Multimedia database
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
Fig. 156
Amundsen, Bolero: Multimedia
database
Fig. 157 Swing: Multimedia database
To display the multimedia database, go to the main Media menu and tap on
the function surface
(if this display is supported by the currently selected
source).
The audio files are sorted by their properties into individual categories
B
.
To playback, select the category and then the track.
Multimedia database » Fig. 156 or » Fig. 157
Selected audio source/Selected category/Folder of the audio source
Sorting categories
Display of folder/track list (only available in the source directory)
Audio source selection
Tap - Select the parent folder / Hold - Select the audio source
Audio sources
Introduction to the subject
CAUTION
Do not save any important data or data which has not been backed up on the
connected audio sources. ŠKODA assumes no responsibility for lost or dam-
aged files or connected audio sources.
When changing or connecting an audio source, this may cause sudden
changes in volume. Reduce the volume before changing or connecting an au-
dio source.
When connecting an external audio source, the external source information
messages can be displayed. These messages must be observed and, if neces-
sary, confirmed (e.g. enabling data transfer etc).
Note
The national copyright laws that apply in your country must be observed.
SD card
Fig. 158
Amundsen, Bolero: Insert SD
card
A
B
C
124
Infotainment
Fig. 159 Swing/Blues: Insert SD card
Inserting
Insert the SD card into the slot in the direction of the arrow, with the trim-
med edge pointing down » Fig. 158 or to the right » Fig. 159, until it “locks
into place”.
Removing
Before removing the SD card, go to the main Media menu and tap function
surface
Remove safely
or
Remove SD card safely
.
Push down on the inserted SD memory card. The SD card “jumps” into the
eject position.
CAUTION
Do not use an SD card with a broken write protection “slide” - there is a risk
of damage to the SD card reader!
When using an SD card with an adapter, vehicle vibrations might cause the
card to fall out of the adapter.
USB input
Installation location of the USB input and information regarding its use
» page 74.
At the USB input, an audio source can be connected directly or via a connect-
ing cable.
To connect, insert the USB audio source into the appropriate input.
To disconnect the USB, go to the main Media menu and tap on the function
surface
Remove safely
or
Remove USB safely
.
Disconnect the audio source from the corresponding USB input.
Charging a USB audio source
With the ignition, the charging process starts automatically after the USB au-
dio source is connected (applies to audio sources where charging via the USB
connector is possible).
The charging efficiency can differ compared to charging from the usual mains
power supply.
Depending on the type of the connected external device and the frequency of
use, the charging current may not be sufficient to charge the battery of the
connected device.
Some connected audio sources may not recognise that they are being charg-
ed.
CAUTION
USB extension cables or reducers may impair the function of the connected
audio source.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
AUX input
Installation location of the AUX input » page 74.
To connect, insert the plug of the AUX audio source into the appropriate
connector.
To disconnect, pull the plug out of the AUX audio source.
CAUTION
The AUX input must only be used for audio devices!
If the external audio source connected to the AUX input is equipped with an
adapter for external power supply, the sound may be impaired.
Note
The 3.5 mm stereo jack plug is used for the AUX input.
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
125
Media
Bluetooth
®
player
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
The Infotainment system allows you to play back audio files from a connected
Bluetooth
®
player using the A2DP and AVRCP audio profile.
With the Infotainment system, multiple devices can be paired using Blue-
tooth
®
, but only one of them can be used as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Connecting/disconnecting
To connect the Bluetooth
®
player to the Infotainment system, follow the
same instructions as for pairing the Infotainment system with a telephone
» page 133.
To disconnect the Bluetooth
®
player, end the connection in the list of paired
external devices » page 134.
Replacing the Bluetooth
®
player (applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero)
To replace a Bluetooth
®
player, which is also connected to the Infotainment
system as a telephone, a corresponding information message will be displayed
on the Infotainment screen.
End the connection to the currently connected Bluetooth
®
player and repeat
the pairing procedure » page 134, Managing paired external devices.
Apple device (applies to Infotainment Swing)
If an Apple device is connected as a Bluetooth
®
player, and this is connected to
the USB input, then the Bluetooth
®
connection is not dropped. If playback is
cancelled, playback must be started again. Only if USB is selected as the audio
source will the Apple device disconnect as a Bluetooth
®
player. In this regard,
an appropriate warning message appears on the Infotainment screen.
If an Apple device is connected to the USB input and playback is switched on,
this device cannot be connected as a Bluetooth
®
player. In this regard, an ap-
propriate warning message appears on the Infotainment screen.
CAUTION
If an external device is connected to the Infotainment system using Apple
CarPlay or Android Auto, then it cannot be connected using Bluetooth
®
.
WLAN
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The Infotainment system allows you to play audio files from one of the exter-
nal devices connected to the Infotainment WLAN.
Connect an external device that supports the DLNA (Digital Living Network
Alliance), with Infotainment WLAN» page 140.
If necessary, start the UPnP application (Universal Plug and Play) in the con-
nected device, which allows playback.
Select the audio source
WLAN
.
Supported audio sources and file formats - Amundsen, Bolero
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification
File sys-
tem
SD card SD reader Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without
any special soft-
ware);
USB devices sup-
porting MSC
mode
MTP
Devices with the
Android operat-
ing system or
Windows mobile
(mobile phone,
tablet)
Apple
Devices with the
iOS operating
system (iPhone,
iPod, iPad)
126
Infotainment
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio
9 and 10
wma 384 kbit / s
96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
m3u8
asx
WAV wav
Defined by
the format
(approx. 1.5
Mbit/s)
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
Layer 3
mp3
320 kbit / s
48 kHz
MPEG-2 and 4
aac; mp4;
m4a
FLAC;
OGG-Vorbis
flac; ogg
Defined by
the format
(approx. 5.5
Mbit/s)
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Supported audio sources and file formats – Swing
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices supporting
MSC mode
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Blue-
tooth
®
-
Player
- -
Bluetooth protocols
A2DP and AVRCP (1.0 -
1.4)
-
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio 9 and 10
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
asx
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
(Layer-3)
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
127
Media
Supported audio sources and file formats – Blues
Supported audio sources
Source Interface Type Specification File system
SD card SD reader
Standard
size
SD; SDHC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
USB
devices
USB 1.x; 2.x
and 3.x or
higher with
support of
USB 2.x
MSC
USB stick;
HDD (without any spe-
cial software);
USB devices supporting
MSC mode
MTP
Devices with the An-
droid operating system
or Windows mobile
(mobile phone, tablet)
Apple
Devices with the iOS
operating system
(iPhone, iPod, iPad)
Supported audio file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix Max. bit rate
Maximum
sampling
rate
Playlists
Windows Media
Audio 9
wma 384 kbit / s 96 kHz
m3u
pls
wpl
asx
MPEG-1; 2 and 2,5
(Layer-3)
mp3 320 kbit / s 48 kHz
Audio sources sub-divided into areas using the GPT standards (GUID partition
table) are not supported by Infotainment.
Files that are protected by Digital Rights Management (DRM) technology can-
not be played back by Infotainment.
Images
Image viewer
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 160
Images: main menu
To display the main menu, press

, then tap the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 160
Select the image source
Folder/image list
Display the previous image
Switch on the slideshow
Switch off the slideshow
Display the next image
Images menu settings » page 109
Rotate the image 90° anticlockwise
Rotate the image 90° clockwise
Display the original image size while retaining the aspect ratio
Guidance to GPS coordinates (the display only occurs if the image con-
tains GPS coordinates) (applies to Infotainment Amundsen) » page 154
A
128
Infotainment
Controlling viewed images
Function Action
Display the next image
Finger movement across the screen to the
left (with initial representation)
Tap
Display the previous image
Finger movement across the screen to the
right (with initial representation)
Tap
Increase the image size
Touch the screen with two fingers and pull
apart
Turn the knob to the right
Reduce the image size
Touch the screen with two fingers and close
together
Turn the knob to the left
Move the image with an en-
larged display
Drag your finger over the screen in the re-
quired direction
Rotate by 90 °
Touch the screen with two fingers and move
clockwise or anti-clockwise (only available
with initial representation)
Tap or
Maximum magnification of dis-
play
Double tap on the screen
Display the original image size
while retaining the aspect ratio
Double tap on the screen again
Press the knob
CAUTION
Viewing images on the Infotainment screen is not supported by connected Ap-
ple devices.
Supported image file formats and sources
Supported image sources
Source Type Specification File system
SD card Standard size SD, SDHC, SDXC
FAT16
VFAT
FAT32
exFAT
NTFS
USB devices
USB stick;
HDD (without
any special soft-
ware)
USB 1.x; 2.x and
3.x or higher with
support of USB
2.x
Supported file formats
Codec type
(File formats)
File suffix
Max. resolution
(Megapixels)
BMP bmp 4
JP(E)G jpg; jpeg 4; 64
GIF gif 4
PNG png 4
Note
The max. supported image size is 20 MB.
The images sources structured into areas in accordance with the GPT stand-
ards (GUID partition table) are not supported by Infotainment.
129
Images
Media Command
Using the system
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Fig. 161
ŠKODA Media Command appli-
cation
The Media Command function allows you to control the playback of audio files
or videos in up to two tablets that are connected to the Infotainment system
via WLAN in the Infotainment system.
The Media Command function enables operation of tablets with the Android
or iOS operating system.
The prerequisite for the Media Command function is that data transmission is
activated and that operation of the Infotainment system via the application is
approved » page 102.
Connecting a tablet to the Infotainment system
Switch on the Infotainment hotspot (press button

and then tap function
surface
WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
).
Turn on WLAN in the tablet.
Establish a WLAN connection in the tablet » page 140, Connecting via
WLAN.
In the tablet, start the ŠKODA Media Command application.
ŠKODA Media Command application
The application is available in the App Store and Google Play online shops.
Information regarding the application and the option to download the applica-
tion can be found on a website that can be opened by reading the QR code
» Fig. 161.
CAUTION
If several devices are connected to the Infotainment system by means of
WLAN, there is the danger of WLAN overloading and thus also the inability of
Media Command to function properly.
High-definition video playback (e.g. HD) may cause playback problems or
problems connecting the tablets to the Infotainment system.
Main menu
Fig. 162
One tablet / two tablets
To display the main Media Command menu, press the

button, then tap
the function surface
.
Main menu » Fig. 162
Information on the track being played
Playback timeline with a slider
Playback control
Image from the video being played back
Name of the tablet used/Switch to main menu of two tablets (when icon
displayed )
Increase/decrease the tablet volume
Display of main menu and operation of first tablet (symbol )
Display of main menu and operation of second tablet (symbol
)
Playback source selection
WLAN settings » page 108
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
130
Infotainment
Selecting the source and controlling playback
To select the playback source, go to the main menu and tap the function
surface and select the source tablet.
To playback, select the category and then the track.
If two tablets are connected, track playback starts in the two tablets at the
same time.
Playback can be controlled via the Infotainment system or on each tablet, in-
dependently of each other. This means there is an option to play back different
tracks on the tablets at the same time.
Playback control
Function Action
Play/Pause Tap 
Plays the current track from the start
Tap
after 3 s from the start of the track
playback
Play the previous track
Tap
within 3 seconds from the start of the
track playback
Play the next track Tap
Movement within the track is possible by touching your finger on the timeline
B
» Fig. 162 on page 130.
Note
Some tablet types allow playback of audio files or videos from an SD card in-
serted in the tablet. Playback of these tracks may be limited.
Supported file formats
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Video
MPEG-4 Part 2
MPEG-4 Part 10
(H264)
XVID
Type Format
Operating system
Android
Operating system
iOS
Audio
MPEG-1;2 and
2.5
Layer 3 (mp3)
AAC (4,1+)
M4A (4,1+)
OGG
FLAC
WAV (4,1+)
131
Media Command
Telephone
Introductory information
Introduction to the subject
WARNING
The general binding country-specific regulations for operating mobile tele-
phones in the vehicle must be observed.
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 163
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to the Info-
tainment system.
To display, press the

button.
or: Press button

, then tap function surface .
Main menu » Fig. 163
Name of the main telephone
Preset station buttons for favourite contacts
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the symbol
appears before the name )
Symbol of the main telephone
(tap to display the list of paired tele-
phones)
Swap the main telephone and the additional telephone
Enter the telephone number
A
B
C
D
E
List of contacts
Menu with text messages (SMS)
Call list
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 110
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Incoming SMS
PIN code of the SIM card was not entered
Telephone
Applies to Infotainment Swing.
Fig. 164
Telephone: Main menu
The Telephone main menu appears when a telephone is connected to the Info-
tainment system.
To display, press the

button.
To display the Telephone main menu if a different menu is displayed, which was
open last, press the

button again.
Main menu - Information and function surfaces » Fig. 164
Name of the telephone service provider (with active roaming, the symbol
appears before the name )
Name of the connected telephone (tap to display the list paired tele-
phones)
Function surfaces of preferred contacts
F

A
B
C
132
Infotainment
Emergency number dialling or function surface of the preferred contact
» page 136
Choice of storage group for the preferred contacts
Enter the telephone number
Display the telephone contact list
Display the call list (for missed calls, the number of missed calls is dis-
played next to the function surface)
Settings for the Telephone menu » page 114
Symbols in the status bar
Signal strength of the telephone service network
Charge status of the telephone battery
Missed call
Current call
Pairing and connecting
Introduction to the subject
To connect a telephone to the Infotainment system, the two devices must be
paired via Bluetooth
®
.
Depending on the Infotainment model, up to 20 external devices can be paired
with the device. After the maximum number is reached, the pairing of the next
external device will replace that of the device that has not been used for the
longest period of time.
Connection to an already paired telephone is established automatically after
the ignition is switched on. Or, it is sufficient to search for the phone in the list
of paired devices.
The range of the telephone connection to the Infotainment system is limited
to the passenger compartment.
Compatibility and update
By scanning the QR code » Fig. 127 on page 95 or typing the following address
into the web browser, information about the compatibility of phones and avail-
able updates for the Infotainment's Bluetooth
®
can be displayed.
http://go.skoda.eu/compatibility
D
Conditions for pairing
The ignition is switched on.
The Bluetooth
®
function of the Infotainment system and the telephone is
switched on.
The visibility of the Infotainment system and the telephone is switched on.
The telephone is within range of the Infotainment system's Bluetooth
®
sig-
nal.
The telephone is compatible with the Infotainment system.
No external device is connected to the Infotainment system using Apple
CarPlay.
Pairing and connection process
Pairing the telephone with the Infotainment system
Find available external Bluetooth
®
devices in your telephone.
Select the name of the Infotainment system.
The name of the Infotainment system can be checked in the Telephone main
menu if you tap on the function surface
Bluetooth
in menu option
Name:
.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
The telephone is connected to the Infotainment or just paired, depending on
the number of external devices that are already connected » page 134.
Pairing the Infotainment system with the telephone
If no telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, press the

but-
ton, then tap the
Find telephone
function surface or press the

button, then
tap function surface
Find telephone
.
If one telephone is connected to the infotainment system, then, in the Tele-
phone main menu, tap on the
Find telephone
function surface.
Select the desired telephone from the list of retrieved external Bluetooth
®
devices.
Confirm the PIN code (enter and confirm if necessary).
WARNING
Do not pair and connect a telephone to the Infotainment system while driv-
ing the vehicle - there is risk of an accident!
133
Telephone
Possible connection types
Depending on the number of connected Bluetooth
®
devices and the connec-
tion type, the following functions are available.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
First device (main telephone)
Second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (incoming/outgoing calls), SMS,
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
HFP (incoming calls),
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only one external device can be connected to the Infotainment system as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Applies to Infotainment Swing
First device (main telephone)
Second device (additional tele-
phone)
HFP (incoming/outgoing calls),
telephone contacts,
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
Bluetooth
®
player
a)
a)
Only one external device can be connected to the Infotainment system as a Bluetooth
®
player.
Managing paired external devices
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
Bluetooth
Paired
devices
.
In the list of paired external devices, the following symbols may appear for the
individual external devices.
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Function
Grey External device can be connected as a telephone
Green External device is connected as a telephone
Grey
External device can be connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
White External device is connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
Applies to Infotainment Swing
Symbol
Symbol
colour
Function
White External device can be connected as a telephone
Green External device is connected as a telephone
White
External device can be connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
Green External device is connected as a Bluetooth
®
player
Connection set-up
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles.
If external Bluetooth
®
devices are already connected to the Infotainment sys-
tem, then the Infotainment system will display messages and options for the
possible connection type (e.g. replacement of the connected external Blue-
tooth
®
device) during the connection process.
Disconnection
Select the desired external device from the list of paired external devices.
Select the desired profile from the list of available Bluetooth
®
profiles.
Deleting the paired external device
To delete, tap on one of the following function surfaces.
- Delete all external devices
- Delete the desired external device
Confirm the deletion by tapping on the function surface
Delete
.
Telephone functions
Enter telephone number and select
Entering a telephone number and dialling
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface .
Function surfaces of the numeric keypad
Enter the last dialled number/dial the telephone number entered
Emergency call (only applies to some countries)
Breakdown call in case of breakdown
Delete all
or
All areas
134
Infotainment
Information call (for information regarding the products and services of
the ŠKODA brand)
Choose the mailbox number (the function is not supported for Infotain-
ment Swing)
Delete the last number entered
Display the function surfaces for movement of the cursor in the in-
put line
Searching for a contact using the numeric keypad
The numeric keypad can also be used to search for a contact.
For example, if you enter 32, the unit will display contacts with the letter se-
quence DA, FA, EB, etc. next to the numeric keypad.
Voicemail box (does not apply to Infotainment Swing)
To select the voice mailbox number, tap the function surface
.
If the voicemail number was not imported or entered, then this can be entered
or changed as follows.
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Mail-
box number:
.
Enter the number of your voice mailbox.
List of telephone contacts
Fig. 165
Amundsen, Bolero: List of telephone contacts/contact details
Fig. 166 Swing: List of telephone contacts/contact details
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface to display a list of
telephone contacts » Fig. 165 or » Fig. 166.
If the main telephone is connected to the Infotainment system, the telephone
contacts from the telephone are used.
Function surfaces
Contact search
Dial a number in the telephone contact list (if a telephone contact contains
several telephone numbers, a menu containing the telephone numbers as-
signed to this contact is displayed after the contact is selected)
Display the contact details
Select the telephone number in the contact details
Edit the telephone number of the contact before dialling
Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero:
The contact name can be read out by the Infotainment system’s generated
voice
Open the menu for sending a text message (SMS)
Infotainment Amundsen:
Start the route guidance to the contact address
Import list
After the main telephone is connected to the Infotainment system for the first
time, the process for importing the telephone contacts into the device memo-
ry starts. The import can take several minutes.
A
B
C
135
Telephone
The Infotainment system's telephone book contains 2000 free memory loca-
tions for imported telephone contacts. Each contact can contain up to 5 tele-
phone numbers.
The number of imported contacts can be determined in the menu item
User profile
Import contacts:
or
Imp. contacts
.
If an error occurs during the import, a corresponding message appears on the
screen.
Refresh list
When the telephone reconnects with the Infotainment system, the list is auto-
matically updated.
The list can be refreshed manually as follows.
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Import
contacts:
or
Imp. contacts
.
Management of preferred contacts (favourites)
Fig. 167
Amundsen, Bolero: Favourite
contacts
Fig. 168
Swing: Favourite contacts
Assigning favourites
In the main Telephone menu, tap on the desired free function surface
A
» Fig. 167 or » Fig. 168.
Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers).
Connecting to a favourite
The function surfaces for preferred contacts allow you to dial the contact tele-
phone numbers immediately.
The favourites are provided in two storage groups.
To switch storage group, tap the function surface
B
» Fig. 167 or
» Fig. 168 and select the desired group.
To dial, tap the assigned function surface
A
» Fig. 167.
Changing allocated favourites
In the main Telephone menu, press and hold the desired function surface
A
» Fig. 167.
Select the desired contact (if required, one of the contact numbers).
Deleting a favourite
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
User profile
Man-
age favourites
.
Tap the desired function surface of the preferred contact and confirm the
deletion.
You can delete all contacts by tapping on the function surface
Delete all
/
All
areas
and confirming the delete process.
Function surface for emergency call
If the vehicle is not equipped with the buttons for the Care Connect service
» page 15, the position of the last function surface in the first group of favour-
ites will show the function surface for an emergency call . In some coun-
tries, this function may not be available.
The function surface can be assigned a different number for the preferred
contact.
To restore the emergency number, it is necessary to remove the telephone
from the list of paired external devices » page 134 and then to pair and con-
nect again.
136
Infotainment
Call list
Fig. 169 Amundsen, Bolero: Call list/Contact details
Fig. 170
Swing: Call list/Contact details
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface
to display a call list
» Fig. 169 or » Fig. 170.
The call list can also be displayed during a telephone call.
Function surfaces
Set the display depending on the type of call
All areas
- List of all calls
Missed calls
/
Missed
- List of missed calls
A
Dialled numbers
- List of dialled numbers
Received calls
/
Received
- List of received calls
Dial the contact number/telephone number
Call type symbols
- Answered call
- Outgoing call
- Missed call
Edit the telephone number before dialling (not applicable to Infotainment
Swing)
Display the contact details » Fig. 169
C
- Dial the contact number
Telephone call
Depending on the conversation context, the following functions can be carried
out.
End dialling/reject incoming call/end call
Accept an incoming call/return to a held call
Switch ring tone on/off
Keep talking
Switch microphone on/off
Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero:
Set up a conference call
Show caller details (if the contact is stored in the list)
Switch hands-free on/off (call to the telephone/switch to Infotainment)
To deactivate the hands-free system, go to the main Telephone menu and tap
on the function surface
Hands-free
during a call.
To activate the hands-free system, tap on the function surface during a
call.
Conference call
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
The conference call is a shared call with between three and six participants.
Start a conference call/invite additional participants
Make the next call during a call/conference call.
or: Answer the new incoming call by tapping on function surface .
B
137
Telephone
To initiate a conference call or return to a conference call, tap on the func-
tion surface .
Ongoing conference call
During an ongoing conference call, the call duration is displayed on the screen.
Depending on the context, the following functions can be selected.
Hold a conference call - Leave the conference call temporarily (the con-
ference call continues in your absence)
Return to the held conference call
Switch microphone on/off
End conference call
Display conference call details
Conference call details
During the ongoing conference call, tap the function surface
.
A list of other conference participants is displayed. The following functions
can be selected depending on the type of telephone.
Display participant details
Talk to a participant separately, outside of the conference call
End the call to a conference call participant
Text messages (SMS)
Main menu
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 171
Text messages main menu
In the main Telephone menu, tap the function surface and the main menu
for text messages will be displayed » Fig. 171.
Depending on the type of telephone connected, you can perform the following
functions.
Open a list of templates for quick answers
New text message
- Create and send the message
Inbox
- Open a list of received messages
Sent
- Open a list of sent messages
Outbox
- Open a list of messages not sent
Drafts
- Open a list of drafts (messages in progress)
Deleted
- Open a list of deleted messages
New text message
Creating and sending the message
In the main menu of the text messages, tap on function surface
» Fig. 171
on page 138.
Write a text message and confirm. A view of the text message is displayed.
Tap the function surface
.
Select the recipient of the message from the displayed contact list or tap the
function surface
and enter the telephone number.
To add additional recipients, tap the function surface
.
To send the text message, tap the function surface
.
Viewing the text message
After opening the view message function, the following functions can be exe-
cuted.
The text can be read out by the device's generated voice
The text can be stored as a draft
Open a list of templates with the option to replace the recorded text with
the selected template
Open the contact list
The message can be edited, provided the text area is within the view.
Contact list
After the list has been opened the following functions can be executed.
Add a contact to the recipient list
Enter the telephone number
Return to message view
A
138
Infotainment
Tap on the
Find
function surface to open a list of available telephone contacts.
After selecting the contact number or entering the telephone number, the re-
cipient list will be displayed in the screen.
Recipient list
The following functions can be executed by tapping on one of the function
surfaces.
Display the contact list with the option of adding/removing additional
recipients (to return to the recipient list, tap the function surface )
Remove a contact from the recipient list
Send the message
Return to message view
Received text message
When you receive a new message, the number of new messages received is
displayed within the function surface
and at the same time the symbol
is
displayed in the status bar.
To open a list of received messages, go to the Telephone main menu and
tap on function surface
.
Select a message.
The message content and the following menu is displayed.
The text can be read out by the device's generated voice
Display a menu with additional options
Reply with template
- Reply using a template
Display numbers
- Recognition of telephone numbers in the message in-
cluding the contact number (recognised numbers can be dialled directly
or edited before dialling, or may be sent to this message)
Forward a message with the option to edit the message before sending
Reply to the sender via a message
Data connection
Internet connection
Connecting Infotainment Amundsen
Fig. 172
WLAN/Carstick
Possible connection types » Fig. 172,
Using WLAN, by connecting the Infotainment system to the hot spot of
the external device » page 140, Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of
the external device.
Using the CarStick USB device » page 139.
Connecting via the CarStick device
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
The CarStick USB device can be purchased from the original accessories.
Insert a SIM card with activated data services into the CarStick device.
The required dimensions of the SIM card can be found in the instructions en-
closed with the CarStick ŠKODA original accessory.
Switch on the ignition and the Infotainment system.
Insert the CarStick into the USB input at the front » Fig. 79 on page 74,
Wait approximately one minute until the red light on Carstick stays continu-
ously lit (if the red lights up, then disconnect and re-insert the Carstick).
A
B
139
Data connection
If the SIM card is protected by a PIN code, then the PIN code of the SIM card
must be entered.
Confirm the entered PIN code by tapping  .
or: Tap the function surface to save and confirm the PIN code.
If necessary, set the required network of the data service provider.
If your data provider is not available in the list, ask your provider whether one
of the displayed providers can be used.
The parameters of the telephone service provider network can be set in the
menu item

Network
Network settings
.
CAUTION
If you insert a SIM card of the wrong size or in the wrong direction, there is a
risk of damage to the CarStick device.
Connecting via WLAN
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
WLAN can be used to connect to the Internet, to playback audio files in the
menu media or for operating the Infotainment system using an application in
the external device (e.g. ŠKODA Media Command).
It is possible to connect up to 8 external devices to the Infotainment hotspot
and at the same time to connect Infotainment to another hotspot.
Switching the Infotainment hotspot on/off
Switch on the ignition.
Switch the hotspot on/off in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
Setting the Infotainment hotspot
The Infotainment hotspot is factory set.
The setting can be changed in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Security level:
- Type of access security (always set to WPA2)
Network key
- Access password
SSID: ...
- Hotspot name
Do not send network name (SSID)
- Switch the visibility of the hotspot on/off
To save the configured parameters, tap the
Store
function surface.
Connecting an external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on WLAN in the external device and search for the infotainment hot-
spot.
Select the Infotainment hotspot and enter the required password.
Confirm the connection.
Note
The name of the infotainment hotspot (SSID) and the access password can be
found in menu item

WLAN
Mobile hotspot
Hotspot (WLAN) settings
.
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the external device
Fig. 173
Main menu of the Infotainment
WLAN
The Infotainment system can only be connected to a hotspot with WPA2
access protection.
Switch on the ignition.
If the Infotainment WLAN is not activated, activate it in the menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
In area
A
» Fig. 173, a list of available or previously connected hotspots is dis-
played.
The hotspot list can be updated by tapping the function surface
B
.
Select the hotspot and enter the password.
If the hotspot is not visible, you can establish the connection to it manually.
140
Infotainment
Tap the function surface
Manual settings
.
Set the required hotspot parameters.
Tap on the function surface
Connect
.
Icons and function surfaces in the list of available hotspots
A
» Fig. 173
Connected hotspot
Signal strength of the connected hotspot
Delete the hotspot connection parameters
Connect via WPS
It is not necessary to enter the access password when connecting via WPS.
Connecting the Infotainment system to the hotspot of the external device
Switch on the ignition.
In the external device, switch on the hotspot, its visibility, and the WPS con-
nection option.
In the Infotainment system, switch on WLAN in menu item

WLAN
WLAN
WLAN
.
Tap the function surface
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
.
Connecting the external device to the Infotainment hotspot
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment hotspot in menu item

WLAN
Mobile
hotspot
Mobile hotspot
.
Tap the function surface
WPS quick connection (WPS button)
.
In the external device, switch on the WPS connection option.
SmartLink+
Introductory information
Introduction to the subject
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen, Bolero.
Fig. 174
Information on SmartLink on the
ŠKODA websites
SmartLink offers the option of displaying and operating certified applications
on an external device connected via USB on the Infotainment screen.
SmartLink supports the following communication systems.
Android Auto
Apple CarPlay
MirrorLink
®
Using the applications in the connected external device, you can use naviga-
tion, make a call and listen to music.
For safety reasons, the operation of some applications while driving is not pos-
sible or only limited.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 174 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to open the website with information on the SmartLink system.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity-smartlink
Depending on the model of the connected external device, some applications
can be operated via the Infotainment system, using your voice or using the
buttons on the multi-function steering wheel.
Voice control of the connected external device can be activated by pressing
and holding the

button or pressing and holding button on the multi-
function steering wheel.
141
SmartLink+
CAUTION
To establish the connection, the date and time in the Infotainment system
must be set correctly. If the date and time setting is based on the GPS signal,
then problems may arise with establishing a connection when the GPS signal
reception is poor.
Note
We recommend that you use extension cables from ŠKODA Original Acces-
sories.
With some connected external devices, it is necessary for the connected ex-
ternal device to be “unlocked” for trouble-free functioning of the SmartLink
function.
Main menu
Fig. 175
Supported communication systems / Example of available
communication systems of the connected external device
To display the main SmartLink menu, press button

, then tap the function
surface .
If no external device is connected, then a menu with supported communica-
tion systems SmartLink is displayed
A
» Fig. 175,
Main menu » Fig. 175
Supported communication systems
Available communication systems of the connected external device
Display of information about SmartLink
Disconnection of the active connection
Settings of the SmartLink menu » page 110
A
B
Connection set-up / disconnection
Connection set-up
Switch on the ignition.
Switch on the Infotainment system.
Switch on the external device.
For connection via Apple CarPlay, switch on the data connection and the
voice control (Siri) in the external device to be connected.
Connect the external device to the USB input using a cable » page 74.
Select the type of supported communication system
B
» Fig. 175 on
page 142.
Disconnection of the active connection
In the main SmartLink menu, tap on function surface .
or: Disconnect the cable from the USB input (the external device will be con-
nected automatically when re-connected).
Note
Some applications require the data connection in the connected external de-
vice to be switched on.
Android Auto
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established with a supported external device with
the Android Auto application installed.
By connecting the external device with Android Auto, all currently connected
Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected and the external device will automati-
cally be connected as the main telephone.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
If route guidance is taking place at this moment in the Infotainment system,
then there is the option to start the route guidance in the Android Auto appli-
cation. And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place in the
Android Auto application, then there is the possibility that this will be termina-
ted by the start of route guidance by the Infotainment system.
142
Infotainment
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Android
Auto connection supports can be found on the websites of Google Inc..
Main menu
Fig. 176
Android Auto: main menu
Main menu » Fig. 176
Navigation applications
Telephone applications
Overview of running applications, telephone calls, accepted text messag-
es, tasks in the working directory, weather or similar.
Music applications
Display of other available applications as well as the option of returning to
the main SmartLink menu
Switching on voice control (Google Voice)
Next to the function surface in area
A
, the symbol
appears and then, after
tapping on this function surface again, a list of new applications is displayed.
Apple CarPlay
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
Apple CarPlay communication system.
By connecting the external device with Apple CarPlay, all currently connected
Bluetooth
®
devices will be disconnected.
For the duration of the connection, no Bluetooth devices can be connected to
the infotainment system.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
Some phone features of the connected external device can be operated in the
display of the instrument cluster » page 51.
If route guidance is taking place at this moment using the Infotainment sys-
tem, then this is terminated by starting the route guidance in the Apple
CarPlay application. And vice versa, if route guidance is currently taking place
in the Apple CarPlay application, then this will be terminated by the start of
route guidance by the Infotainment system.
A list external of devices, supported regions and applications that the Apple
CarPlay connection supports can be found on the websites of Apple Inc..
Main menu
Fig. 177
Apple CarPlay: main menu
Main menu » Fig. 177
List of available applications
More pages with applications
Depending on how long the function surface is pressed for:
Tap - Return to main Apple CarPlay menu
Hold - Switch on voice control (Siri)
MirrorLink
®
Introduction to the subject
A connection can only be established to an external device that supports the
MirrorLink
®
communication system.
A
B
143
SmartLink+
If you wish to use the device to be connected in the Telephone menu, the ex-
ternal device must be paired with and connected to the Infotainment system
before establishing the MirrorLink
®
connection» page 133.
For the duration of the connection, the external device cannot be used as an
audio source in the Media menu.
Main menu
Fig. 178
MirrorLink®: Main menu
Main menu » Fig. 178
Return to SmartLink main menu » page 142
List of running applications
Display the contents of the connected external device
Settings of the SmartLink menu » page 110
List of applications
More pages with applications
Applications cannot be operated while driving
Display of the function surfaces during the running application
Return to main MirrorLink
®
menu
Display of function surfaces below/above
To show/hide the function surfaces, press the controller (applies to Infotain-
ment Amundsen, Bolero).
function problems
If problems occur with the MirrorLink
®
connection, one of the following mes-
sages may be displayed on the screen.
Error: transfer
– disconnect an reconnect the external device
MirrorLink® audio is unavailable.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external device
A
B
MirrorLink® availability on this mobile device is restricted.
- it is not possible to use the
connected device during the journey or the device only has limited availabili-
ty (applies to Infotainment swing)
The mobile device is locked. Please unlock the mobile device to use MirrorLink®
- “unlock”
the connected external device
Unable to start app or app not working.
- Disconnect and reconnect the external
device
ApplicationŠKODA OneApp
Introductory information
Fig. 179
Information on the ŠKODA
OneApp application on the ŠKO-
DA websites
A mobile telephone connected to the Infotainment system allows you to edit
and evaluate driving data in the ŠKODA One App application.
The ŠKODA OneApp application is available in the App Store and Google Play
online shops.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 179 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to open the website with information on the ŠKODA OneApp application.
http://go.skoda.eu/infotainment
For the full functionality of the ŠKODA One App application, data transfer
from external devices must be activated.
To activate data transfer from external devices, press the

button, then
tap on function surface →
Mobile device data transfer
Activate data transfer
for ŠKODA Apps
.
144
Infotainment
Note
Some functions of the application are not available in all countries or there is a
function restriction during the journey » page 95, Mobile devices and applica-
tions.
Connecting to the Infotainment system
The mobile telephone can be connected to the infotainment system using the
SmartLink function or via WLAN.
Connection via SmartLink
Switch on the ignition.
Establish a connection via SmartLink (e.g. MirrorLink
®
) » page 141.
In the list of available applications, select the ŠKODA One App application.
Depending on the type of external device connected, some applications can be
started using voice activation, via the Infotainment or using the buttons on the
multi-function steering wheel.
Once connected, the contents of the application are displayed on the infotain-
ment screen.
A possible connection between the mobile telephone and the Infotainment
system via WLAN will be terminated after a connection is established using
SmartLink.
Connection via WLAN (applies to Infotainment Amundsen)
Switch on the ignition.
Establish the WLAN connection » page 140.
In the mobile telephone, start the ŠKODA OneApp application.
Disconnection
The connection can be disconnected in one of the following ways.
Switch off the ignition for longer than 5 seconds (for vehicles with a starter
button, switch off the engine and open the driver's door).
End the connection in the ŠKODA OneApp application.
Disconnect the mobile telephone from the USB port or terminate the WLAN
connection.
Navigation
Introductory information
Navigation - function sequence
Applies to Infotainment Amundsen.
Route guidance is started as follows.
Find/enter a new destination or select one of the stored destinations.
Confirm the route calculation in the destination details or, if necessary, adjust
the route options.
Select the preferred route type, if this is requested by the Infotainment sys-
tem.
A route is calculated and route guidance starts.
The route guidance is provided by means of graphical driving recommenda-
tions and navigation announcements.
There is an option to add additional destinations during route guidance, or to
adapt the route.
If a traffic radio station is available, information concerning traffic delays is
evaluated by the Infotainment system and, if necessary, an alternative route is
offered.
If you deviate from the route, then a new route is calculated.
GPS satellite signal
Infotainment uses the GPS (Global Positioning System) satellite signal for
route guidance.
Outside the range of the GPS satellite signal (e.g. in dense vegetation, in tun-
nels, parking garages, etc.), the Infotainment system navigates only with re-
strictions, with the aid of vehicle sensors.
The Infotainment system offers the possibility off showing the following infor-
mation on the current geographical position of the vehicle and the satellite sig-
nal in the
Position
» Fig. 182 on page 147 split screen.
Geographical longitude
Geographical latitude
145
Navigation
Elevation
Number of received/available satellites
If no GPS satellite signal is available, no values are displayed.
Navigation data
Navigation data source
The navigation data is stored on an Original SD Card.
In order to ensure the function of the navigation, the Original SD card, with the
navigation data, must be inserted in the respective slot in the external module
» page 97.
If the original SD card is damaged or lost, a new original SD card can be pur-
chased from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
With a Non-original SD Card, navigation does not work.
Determining the version of the navigation data
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
.
Updating the navigation data
We recommend that you update the navigation data on a regular basis (e.g.
due to newly developed roads and changed traffic signs).
The information on updating the navigation data can be obtained from a
ŠKODA partner or on the following ŠKODA websites.
http://go.skoda.eu/updateportal
Importing/updating the POI categories online
When Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated, it is possible to
download the POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA
Connect portal websites.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Online update
Retrieve
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface .
A menu for the import/update of POI categories is displayed.
Select the desired list entries.
Tap on the function surface
Retrieve
and confirm the download process.
During the update process, the Infotainment system can be used without re-
striction.
Main menu
Fig. 180
Navigation: Main menu
To display, press the

button.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface
.
Description of the function surfaces
A
» Fig. 180
Context-dependent:
Route guidance is deactivated - Search/enter a new destination
Route guidance is activated - The following menu is displayed:
Route details
- Displays the route details » page 159
Congestion ahead
- Manually adjusts traffic conditions » page 162
Enter dest.
- Find/enter a new destination/stopover » page 147
Stop route guidance
- Stops route guidance » page 159
The following menu is displayed:
Save current position
- Store the current vehicle position as the flagged
destination » page 151
Routes
- Displays the list of saved routes » page 160
Destinations
- Displays the list of stored destinations » page 151
Last destinations
- Displays the list of recent destinations to which route
guidance was carried out » page 151
Home address
- Route guidance to your home address » page 152
Search for POIs in categories , and
Map display options » page 154
Operation of Media/Radio playback
Display for the volume setting of the navigation announcements/repeti-
tion of the navigation announcement » page 158
Navigation settings » page 110
146
Infotainment
Map
Fig. 181
Map description
The following information and function surfaces can be displayed in the
map. » Fig. 181
Vehicle position
Route
Function surfaces for card use » page 154
Function surface of the POI
Function surface for the POI list
Function surface for displaying a traffic incident » page 162
Information on the maximum permitted speed
Destination position
Intermediate destination position
Destination position
Home address
Favourite position
Information in the status line
Street name/street number of the current vehicle position
Distance to destination
Route to the stopover
Estimated travelling time to the destination
Estimated travelling time to the stopover
Estimated time of arrival at destination/stopover
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Split screen
Fig. 182
Split screen
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Split screen
.
To select content of the split screen
A
» Fig. 182, tap on the function sur-
face
and select one of the following menus, depending on the context.
Audio
- Operation of
Radio
/
Media
playback
Compass
- Displays the current vehicle location in relation to the compass di-
rections
Most frequent routes
- Display the three most frequent routes (if guidance not
being carried out) » page 159
Manoeuvre
- Displays graphical driving recommendations (if route guidance is
enabled) » page 158
Position
- Displays the geographical coordinates of the current vehicle loca-
tion
Search for destination and enter
Selecting the type of destination search/destination entry
Fig. 183
Selecting the type of destina-
tion search/destination entry
147
Navigation
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface .
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
Enter dest.
.
Function surfaces » Fig. 183
Search for a destination or POI (point of interest) by name » page 148
Destination entry by address » page 149
Online POI search » page 148
Search for a point along the route (only works with active route guidance)
» page 148
Destination input via the map point or using the GPS coordinates
» page 149
Search for destination/POI
Fig. 184
Menu for the destination search
Fig. 185
List of destinations found: in the navigation data/online
The feature allows a full text search of locations or points of interest (POI) by
entering keywords.
A
B
C
D
E
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface .
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
Enter dest.
.
Then tap the function surface of one of the menu items for the destination
search
A
,
C
or
D
» Fig. 183 on page 147.
Function surfaces » Fig. 184 and » Fig. 185
Input line
Depending on the search mode, the following symbols are displayed
- Display of destinations found in the navigation database
- Display of destinations found online
- Select the destination search/destination entry » page 147
List of last destinations (if no character is entered) / List of visited destina-
tions
Keypad
Status of online services
Find destination
Enter the POI name or the POI category (POI) and, if required, the place and
street name or house number/postal code.
A list of the destinations found is displayed in area
D
» Fig. 184.
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
or: Tap on function surface
B
» Fig. 184.
A map with the following symbols and a list of the destinations found is dis-
played.
Destinations found in the navigation data » Fig. 185 - .
Destinations found online » Fig. 185 - .
Select the desired destination and the destination details will be displayed.
A
B
C
D
E
F
148
Infotainment
Enter destination using the address
Fig. 186 Enter destination using the address: Main menu/list of places
found
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
Enter dest.
.
Then tap the function surface
B
» Fig. 183 on page 147.
Enter dest.
Enter the destination address and then confirm » Fig. 186 -
.
Tap the function surface

to see the destination details.
Relevant names (e.g. place/street names) are offered in the entry line during
entry, depending on the context. The location of the proposed destination can
be displayed by tapping the function surface
Map
.
Depending on the number of places visited, a map with a list of visited places
can be displayed automatically » Fig. 186 - .
The map with the list of visited locations can be accessed manually by tapping
the function surface .
Entering a destination via the map point and using GPS coordinates
Fig. 187 Enter destination: via the map point/using GPS coordinates
Show menu
Route guidance is disabled - From the navigation main menu, the function
surface
.
Route guidance is enabled - From the main Navigation menu, tap the func-
tion surface
Enter dest.
.
Then tap the function surface
E
» Fig. 183 on page 147.
Enter destination via map point
Touch the screen to move the desired destination into the cross-hair
» Fig. 187 -
.
Tap the function surface

to see the destination details.
Entering the destination using coordinates
Tap in the values of the GPS coordinates one at a time and adjust » Fig. 187 -
,
Tap the function surface  to see the destination details.
If information about the point entered is available in the Infotainment system's
navigation data, this will be displayed instead of the GPS coordinates (e.g. ad-
dress
A
» Fig. 187).
149
Navigation
Entering a destination via the map point
Fig. 188
Menu after tapping the map
point
Tap on the map to display the symbol and a menu with the following menu
items (depending on the context) » Fig. 188.
Display the destination details » page 157
Display the POI details/display the list of POIs (function surface)
)
Start route guidance to the selected point
Paste the selected point into the current route guidance as the next des-
tination
Start route guidance to the favourite
Start route guidance to the home address
Destination search in the vicinity of the selected point » page 148
Define the starting point for demo mode (if it is turned on) » page 158
Find petrol station, restaurant or car park
Fig. 189
List of petrol stations found: in the navigation data/online
A
B
C
Fig. 190 List of car parks found: in the navigation data/online
The Infotainment allows you to find petrol stations, restaurants or car parks
quickly in the navigation data as well as online.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
.
Tap the function surface of the desired category.
or: Press the

button and then tap function surface
or
.
Find destination in the navigation data
Depending on the context below, a list of POIs from the selected category is
displayed.
No route guidance is taking place - The nearest destinations in a radius of
200 km from the current vehicle position are displayed.
Route guidance is taking place - Destinations on the route or near the route
are displayed.
Find destination online
When Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated, a list of POIs from
the selected category in a radius around the current vehicle position is dis-
played, regardless of whether or not route guidance is taking place.
After searching for a destination, you can switch between the list of destina-
tions found in the navigation data and the list of destinations found online by
tapping one of the following function surfaces at position
A
» Fig. 189 or
» Fig. 190.
Displays the list of destinations found in the navigation data.
Displays the list of destinations found online.
150
Infotainment
Note
With the
Fuel options
Select preferred fuel station
function activated, the pre-
ferred fuel stations are displayed in the first three positions during the fuel sta-
tion search.
Saved destinations
Last destinations
List of last destinations
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Last destinations
.
Details of the last destination
In the main Navigation menu, press the

button.
If route guide is not taking place, the details of the last destination to which
route guidance was carried out are displayed. If route guidance is taking
place, the details of the final destination are displayed.
Last destinations in the destination/POI search menu
In the destination search menu, a short list of last destinations is show in area
D
» Fig. 184 on page 148.
Function surfaces in the list of last destinations
- Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed when
there are more than 5 entries available)
- Display the details of the selected destination » page 157
Destination memory
Fig. 191 Select list of stored destinations/categories of stored destina-
tions
Find
List of stored destinations
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 191 and select one of the following catego-
ries of saved destinations
B
» Fig. 191.
All saved destinations
- Flagged destination (vehicle position at the time of storage)
- Stored destination (manually saved destination/destination impor-
ted in vCard format)
- Favourite (destination with additional favourite property)
Favourites (the favourite location is shown on the map by the symbol).
Telephone contact addresses of the connected telephone.
Online destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website or in the ŠKODA Connect application » page 154
Function surfaces in the list of stored destinations
- Destination search by name (the function surface is displayed if there
are several entries on the next page of the list)
- Display of the destination details » page 157
Store target
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Last destinations
.
Tap the function surface
at the desired destination to display the destina-
tion details.
Tap on the function surface
Store
.
Rename the destination if necessary and confirm storage.
Save “flagged destination” (current vehicle position)
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Store current posi-
tion
.
By tapping again on function surface
Rename
, you can rename the flagged
destination and store it as a destination in the destination memory.
Storing the next flagged destination will overwrite the last flagged destination.
To maintain the existing flagged destination, it must be stored in the Infotain-
ment memory.
Save destination as a favourite/cancel
It is not possible to store a contact address, a vCard or a target image as a fa-
vourite.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the function surface and select the desired list of destinations.
Find
151
Navigation
Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface at the de-
sired destination.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Tap the function surface
Favourite
.
Delete the destination
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the function surface and select the desired list of destinations.
Show the destination details by tapping on the function surface at the de-
sired destination.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
Home address
Define home address
When your home address is not entered, proceed as follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Home address
.
Define the home address using the current vehicle position or by entering
the address.
Change home address
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Define home address
.
Tap the function surface
Edit
.
Edit the home address or set one up using the current vehicle position or by
entering the address.
Delete home address
In the main
Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Home address
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
Import custom destinations
Introduction to the subject
Fig. 192
MyDestination application on
the ŠKODA websites
Fig. 193
ŠKODA Connect websites
This chapter describes destinations which can be imported into the Infotain-
ment memory.
You can create custom destinations using the ŠKODA application
“MyDestination”, in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal website or
in the ŠKODA Connect application.
Scan the QR code » Fig. 192 or enter the following address in your web brows-
er to display more information on the “MyDestination” application.
http://go.skoda.eu/my-destination
Access to the ŠKODA Connect Portal can be found on the ŠKODA Connect
website. You can open this by scanning the QR code » Fig. 193 or entering the
following address in your web browser.
http://go.skoda.eu/connectivity
152
Infotainment
Destinations in vCard format
In the Infotainment memory, you can import a custom destination in vCard
format (*.vcf) from an SD card or a USB source.
Import
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the file of the custom destination.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Import destinations (SD/USB)
.
Select the source and confirm the import.
Route guidance
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Find and select the desired imported destination.
Delete custom destination
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
Tap the function surface
Tap on the desired custom destination.
In the destination details, tap the function surface
Edit
Delete
and confirm
the deletion process.
POI categories created in the “MyDestination” application
Import/update
Insert the SD card into the external module or connect a USB source with
the POI categories.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Update "My POIs" (SD/USB)
.
If the same custom POI category name already exists in the Infotainment
memory, then it will be overwritten during the import.
Show POIs in the map
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Route guidance to an online destination
In the map, tap on the traffic obstruction symbol.
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 157.
Clear all custom POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
POI categories created in the user profile in the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal”
The custom POI categories created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect
Portal website can be imported into the Infotainment memory.
The requirement for importing a POI category is that Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
Importing POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Version information
Online update
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface
.
A menu for importing/updating the navigation data and POI categories is dis-
played.
Tap the function surface
POIs
Retrieve
.
If new POI categories are available, their quantity and file size is displayed by
the Infotainment system.
Tap the function surface
Start
to start route guidance.
To complete the import, tap the function surface
Next
and confirm the im-
port.
Show POIs in the map
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Map
Select cate-
gories for POIs
My points of interest (Personal POI)
.
Select the imported POI category.
Route guidance to a destination in the imported POI category
In the map, tap on the traffic obstruction symbol.
Details of the selected destination will be displayed » page 157.
Clear all custom POI categories
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Manage memory
Delete "My POIs"
.
Tap the function surface
Delete
and confirm the deletion.
153
Navigation
Destinations created in the user profile in the “ŠKODA Connect
Portal”
The destinations created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website or in the ŠKODA Connect application can be imported into the Info-
tainment memory.
The requirement for importing the destinations is that Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
importing destinations
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
or: Press the

button then tap the function surface .
Tap on the function surface
Update
.
If new destinations are available, then confirm the import.
If a destination was created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website or in the ŠKODA Connect application and sent to the Infotainment
system, a message regarding a new destination will be displayed on the Info-
tainment screen after the ignition is switched on, with the option to import the
destination.
Route guidance to an online destination
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Destinations
.
In the list of online destinations, find and select the desired destination.
Deleting online destinations
To delete all online destinations go to the main Navigation menu and tap the
function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Online destinations
.
To delete one online destination, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on
function surface
Destinations
Edit
Delete
.
Image with GPS coordinates
Fig. 194
Image with GPS coordinates
Infotainment enables guidance to the GPS coordinate data stored in the im-
age.
Press the

button then tap the function surface
Images
.
Select the connected source and open the image with GPS coordinates.
Tap the function surface
» Fig. 194 in the image and a menu will open with
the option to start route guidance.
The image can be obtained from an external device in which GPS coordinates
were stored at the time of image creation. This could be created in the
“MyDestination” application and imported » Fig. 192 on page 152.
Map
Map display options
Fig. 195
Map display options
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
.
154
Infotainment
The following function surfaces are displayed » Fig. 195.
2D - Two-dimensional map display
3D - Three-dimensional map display
Display of the route from the current vehicle location to the destination
Display of the position of the destination or the next stopover on the map
(depending on the setting for menu item
Advanced settings
Status line:
)
Automatic map display in day or night mode (depending on the currently
active vehicle lighting)
Daytime map display
Night-time map display
Switch the split screen display on/off » page 147
Switch the display of selected POI categories on/off » page 150, Entering
a destination via the map point
If the map scale of the 2D or 3D display is greater than 10 km (5 miles), then
the map is automatically displayed as 2D and aligned in the direction of north.
If the scale is increased beyond this value, then the map is switched back to
the original representation.
Map scale
Fig. 196
Function surfaces for changing the map scale
It is possible to change the map scale manually or to activate the automatic
scale change.
Tap the function surface
A
» Fig. 196.
In area
B
» Fig. 196, function surfaces for changing the map scale are dis-
played.
A
B
C
D
E
Types of manual scale change
Touch the screen with two fingers and pull them apart or close them togeth-
er.
Press the control knob .
Activating automatic scale change
If the automatic scale is active, the map scale will change automatically de-
pending on the type of roads travelled (motorway - smaller map scale / town -
larger map scale) and the manoeuvre to be carried out.
To activate the automatic scale change, go to the main Navigation menu and
tap on function surface .
Tap the function surface is highlighted in green.
The automatic scale is only active as long as the map is centred on the vehicle
position (the function surface
is hidden).
To deactivate the automatic scale change, go to the main Navigation menu
and tap on function surface
.
The function surface
is highlighted in white.
The function is also deactivated when the map is moved or the map scale is
changed manually.
Map view in reduced scale
In the main Navigation menu, tap on function surface
A
.
The map scale is reduced for a few seconds and then restored.
Changing map orientation
Fig. 197
Changing the map orientation
You can change the map orientation under the following conditions.
155
Navigation
The map is in the 2D display.
The map is centred (the function surface is hidden).
The map scale is max. 10 km.
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented to-
wards north.
You can only change the map orientation in the 2D display, provided the map is
centred on the vehicle position (the function surface is hidden » page 156,
Map centring).
With a map scale greater than 10 km, the map is automatically oriented to-
wards north.
To change the map orientation, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on
function surface
A
» Fig. 197.
The map is oriented to the north
The symbol
for the vehicle position rotates, the map and the polar star sym-
bol
do not rotate.
Map oriented to the direction of travel
The map and the Polar Star symbol
rotate, the vehicle position symbol
does not rotate.
Map centring
Fig. 198
Map centring
The moved map can be centred in the vehicle, destination or route position.
To centre the map, tap on function surface
A
» Fig. 198.
POIs display
The Infotainment system offers the possibility of displaying POI symbols on
the map on the Infotainment screen.
To activate/deactivate the display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
POIs
.
To select the POIs to be displayed, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
on the function surface
Map
Select categories for POIs
and select the de-
sired categories (max. 10).
Road sign display
The Infotainment system offers the option of displaying the traffic signs stor-
ed in the navigation data or detected by the front camera during guidance on
the Infotainment screen
G
» Fig. 181 on page 147.
To activate/deactivate the road sign display, go to the main Navigation
menu and tap on the function surface
Map
Show road signs
.
For some vehicles it is possible to set an alert when exceeding the permitted
speed limited by a road sign.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Driver assistance
Speed warning:
.
When towing a trailer, we recommend that you activate recognition of road
signs relevant to trailers.
Press the

button, then tap on function surface
Driver assistance
Show
road signs relevant to trailers
.
Route guidance
Introduction to the subject
A route is created by starting route guidance to a destination. Additional stop-
overs can be added to the route.
Route guidance takes place as follows
Through graphical driving instructions on the Infotainment screen and in the
display of the instrument cluster.
Through navigation announcements.
156
Infotainment
The Infotainment system tries to allow for continued guidance even if the nav-
igation data is incomplete or there is no data at all for the given area.
The route is recalculated each time you ignore driving recommendations or
change the route.
CAUTION
The navigation announcements provided may vary from the actual situations,
e.g. due to out-of-date navigation data.
Destination details
Fig. 199
Details of: destination found in the navigation data/online
The following menu items and information are displayed in the destination de-
tails » Fig. 199.
Area with function surfaces
Detailed destination information
Destination position in the map
Detailed destination information (if available)
Status of online services
Display the destination details
The destination details can be displayed in one of the following ways.
While entering a destination.
By tapping on the function surface
in the destination list.
Press the

button in the main Navigation menu to display the details of
the last destination.
A
B
C
D
E
Function surfaces
Using the function surfaces in area
A
, the following functions can be per-
formed, depending on the context.
Start/stop route guidance.
Search for a nearby destination » page 148.
Set route options.
Store destination.
Edit destination (the destination can be deleted, renamed or saved as a fa-
vourite).
Dial the POI phone number (if the Infotainment system is connected to a
phone » page 133, Pairing and connecting).
Route calculation and starting route guidance
Fig. 200
Alternative routes
Routes are calculated based on the set route options. The route options can be
set:
Route options
.
Alternative routes
With selection of alternative routes turned on, the following menu is displayed
after calculation of a new route » Fig. 200.
- calculate the most economical route with the shortest driving time
and shortest distance travelled – the route is highlighted green
- calculate the fastest route to the destination, even if a detour is nec-
essary –the route is highlighted in red
- calculate the shortest route to the destination, even if a longer driving
time is required – the route is highlighted in orange
It is possible to select an already calculated alternative route before calculation
of the remaining routes is completed.
Selecting the type of route will start the route guidance.
A
B
C
157
Navigation
If no route selection is made within 30 s of calculation of all routes, route guid-
ance will start automatically according to the preferred route type.
Route calculation for trailer towing
When driving with a trailer or any other accessory connected to the trailer
socket, we recommend that you switch on trailer recognition, if necessary, to
set the maximum speed for towing a trailer.
To calculate the route when driving with a trailer, go to the main Navigation
menu and tap the function surface
Route options
.
To set the maximum speed of the trailer, press the

button, then tap on
function surface
Driver assistance
Trailer recognition
Maximum speed for
trailer
.
Demo mode
Demo mode provides a driving simulation to the entered destination. The func-
tion allows you to travel through the calculated route “virtually”.
When Demo mode is turned on, a menu for route guidance in Demo mode or
in normal mode is displayed before route guidance starts.
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Advanced settings
Demo mode
.
When Demo mode is activated, the route starting point can be defined.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
Define demo mode starting point
.
Define the starting point by entering the address or the current vehicle posi-
tion.
The demo mode starting point can also be set provided demo mode is turned
on by tapping on the desired map location and selecting the menu item
Start
Demo Mode
» page 150, Entering a destination via the map point.
Graphical driving recommendations
Fig. 201 Driving recommendations/driving recommendation detail
The graphical driving recommendations are displayed in the
Manoeuvre
split
screen and in the instrument cluster display.
In the
Manoeuvre
split screen, the following driving recommendations are dis-
played » Fig. 201.
Street name/street number of the current vehicle position
Driving recommendations with street names/road numbers, the route and
the travel time to the manoeuvre location
Driving recommendation details (displayed near the manoeuvre)
Lane guidance
In the
Manoeuvre
split screen, the Infotainment system also draws your atten-
tion to traffic obstructions received via TMC, as well as to motorways, car
parks, petrol stations or restaurants.
Speed limits
With the
Advanced settings
Note: national border crossed
function activated,
the country-specific speed limits are displayed when you cross the national
border.
These speed limits can be displayed by tapping on function surface
Speed
limits
in the main Navigation menu.
Navigation announcements
The Infotainment system issues navigation announcements during route guid-
ance.
A
B
C
D
158
Infotainment
The navigation announcements are generated by the Infotainment system.
Flawless clarity of the message (e.g., road or city name) cannot always be guar-
anteed.
The last navigation announcement can be repeated in the main Navigation
menu by tapping on the function surface .
The timing of the navigation announcement is dependent on the type of road
and on the driving speed.
The type of navigation announcements can be set:
Navigation announcements
.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Most frequent routes
The most frequently travelled routes are automatically saved by Infotainment.
Of these, up to 3 routes can be offered, which best match the current time,
day of the week as well as the vehicle position.
Route guidance to one of the routes used most frequently can be started pro-
vided route guidance is not currently active.
To display the menu with the most frequently travelled routes, go to the split
screen and tap on the function surface
Most frequent routes
Show on map
.
Select the desired route.
The selected route is then calculated and route guidance starts.
The menu display in the split screen can be activated/deactivated in the main
Navigation menu by tapping the function surface
Route options
Most fre-
quent routes
switched on/off.
The stored most frequent routes can be deleted in the main Navigation menu
by tapping the function surface
Manage memory
Delete user data
Most fre-
quent routes
deleted.
Note
Route guidance on the most frequently travelled route takes place without
navigation announcements.
Finish route guidance
Route guidance can be finished in one of the following ways.
The final destination is reached.
In the main Navigation menu by tapping the function surface
Stop route
guidance
.
By turning off the ignition for longer than 120 minutes.
Abort route guidance
If the ignition is switched off and on again, then route guidance is continued in
one of the following ways, depending on the stop time.
Within 15 minutes - route guidance continues, taking the calculated route in-
to account.
From 15 minutes to 120 minutes - after confirming the message on the Info-
tainment screen, the route guidance continues, taking the calculated route
into account.
After 120 min - route guidance is cancelled.
Route
Route details
Fig. 202 Route details: a route destination/several route destinations
During route guidance, the Route details (information about the current route)
can be displayed.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Route details
.
159
Navigation
One route destination
In the route details, the following information is displayed at the destination
» Fig. 202 - .
Area with function surfaces
Destination information
Estimated time of arrival at destination/remaining driving time to desti-
nation
Remaining distance to the destination
Chosen route type (economic, fastest, shortest)
Current vehicle position (address/GPS coordinates)
You can adjust the display of the arrival time or the remaining driving time as
follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Advanced settings
Time display:
.
Several route destinations
In the route details, the following information is displayed at the respective
destinations » Fig. 202 -
.
Area with function surfaces
Stopover (with sequential number)
Final destination
Estimated time of arrival at destination/stopover
Driving distance to destination/stopover
Change positions of the destinations with each other
Delete the destination
Continuation of the route guidance from the selected target (previous
stopovers are skipped)
Display the destination details » page 157
Insert destination into the route
In area
A
, tap the function surface
Enter dest.
and enter a new destination.
or: In area
A
, tap on function surface
Destinations
and select a destination
from the list of stored destinations.
Each additional destination is added to the list as the first subsequent destina-
tion route.
A
B
C
D
A
Change positions of destinations with each other
Press and hold the relevant function surface and move the destination to
the desired position.
For destinations already reached on the route, the note
Destination reached
is dis-
played below the destination name. It is no longer possible to change the posi-
tion of these destinations with each other.
Store route
In area
A
, tap the function surface
Save
.
Save the edited route as a new route or replace the existing saved route.
The route is stored in the route list » page 160.
Stop route guidance
In area
A
, tap the function surface
Stop
.
Route list
In the route list, it is possible to create, import, save or delete routes or start
navigation.
New route
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Routes
New route
.
Insert a route destination in one of the following ways.
Tap the function surface
Enter dest.
and enter a new destination.
or: Tap on function surface
Destinations
and select a destination from the list
of stored destinations.
To save the created route, tap the function surface
Store
.
To start route guidance, tap the function surface
Start
.
Route import
The requirement for importing the route is that the Infotainment Online
» page 13 services are activated.
A route that has been created in the user profile on the ŠKODA Connect Portal
website and sent to the Infotainment system can be imported into the Info-
tainment memory even before switching on the ignition.
If the route has been created with the ignition switched on and sent to the In-
fotainment system, it will be imported from the Infotainment system only af-
ter switching off (for at least 15 minutes) and after switching on the ignition
again.
160
Infotainment
Switch on the ignition. When a new route is available, a message regarding
the option to import this route appears in the Infotainment screen automati-
cally.
If the user opts not to import the route immediately, the route can be impor-
ted manually later, as follows.
In the Navigation main menu, tap the function surface
Routes
to check if
a new route is available.
or: Press the

button, then tap on function surface .
Tap the function surface
Import routes
.
If a new route is available, a message will be displayed by the Infotainment sys-
tem.
Tap the function surface
Retrieve
to start route guidance.
After being successfully imported, the route is displayed in the list of saved
routes.
Managing saved routes
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Routes
.
Choose the desired route, and then select one of the following functions.
- delete the stored route
- Edit the route » page 159, Route details
- Calculate the route and start route guidance » page 157, Route calcula-
tion and starting route guidance
Traffic reports
List of traffic reports
Fig. 203
List of traffic reports
Delete
Edit
Start
The Infotainment systems enables the reception of traffic reports, which in-
clude information regarding traffic congestion, using TMC (Traffic Message
Channel) or online (when Infotainment Online » page 13 services are activated).
To display the list of traffic reports, press the

button then tap the func-
tion surface .
In the list of traffic messages and the map, a max. of 6 messages are displayed,
that are provided with a letter and a traffic obstruction symbol (e.g. , , )
A
» Fig. 203.
The traffic reports available on the route are indicated by a navigation an-
nouncement.
Source of traffic information
At position
C
» Fig. 203, the following symbols can be displayed.
TMC Traffic Information (when the symbol is crossed out, the Infotain-
ment system is out of range of any traffic information provider)
Online traffic report
Display options
Route guidance is not taking place - All traffic messages are displayed.
Route guidance is taking place - After tapping function surface
B
» Fig. 203 in the displayed menu, you can select all traffic messages by tap-
ping the function surface
All areas
, or you can select only the traffic messages
present on the route by tapping the function surface
Route
.
A traffic report may contain some of the following information.
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Number of the road affected
Name of the location affected
Description of the traffic obstruction
Colour differentiation of the importance of the traffic obstruction in a TMC
message
The symbol for the traffic obstruction (e.g. , , ) precedes the obstruction
and the length of the obstruction is shown in the map on the right along the
route.
Depending on the context, the symbol for the obstruction is displayed in one
of the following ways.
No route guidance is taking place
Red - All traffic obstructions

161
Navigation
Route guidance is not taking place
Grey - The traffic obstruction is not on the route
Red - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will not be recalcula-
ted and the route passes through the traffic obstruction
Orange - The traffic obstruction is on the route, the route will be recalcula-
ted and an alternative route is available
Colour differentiation of the importance of a traffic obstruction from an
online message
The colour differentiation of traffic obstructions is dependent on the provider
of the online traffic reports.
To set the traffic obstructions display, go to the main Navigation menu and tap
the function surface
Map
Traffic flow settings
.
Update
The list of traffic reports is continuously updated by the Infotainment system.
Details of the traffic report
Fig. 204
Details of the traffic report
The display of traffic report details is dependent on whether the respective
traffic report is based on a TMC source or an online source.
To display this, select the desired traffic report from the list of traffic re-
ports.
or: Tap on the traffic obstruction icon in the map.
Depending on the context, the following information and function surfaces are
displayed » Fig. 204.
Map of the affected location
Description of the traffic obstruction
A
B
The time of arrival and information relating to the traffic report provider
(if ŠKODA Connect is the provider, it is an online traffic report)
Symbol of the traffic obstruction
Length of the traffic obstruction
Dynamic route
The Infotainment system allows an evaluation of the traffic reports received
during the route guidance. If the following conditions are met, a bypass route
is calculated and the appropriate announcement is issued.
The dynamic route function is turned on.
The traffic obstruction included in the traffic information is on the route.
The traffic obstruction is evaluated by the Infotainment system as being
significant.
To activate/deactivate, go to the main Navigation menu and tap on the func-
tion surface
Route options
Dynamic route
.
Entering/removing a traffic obstruction on the route manually
If a traffic obstruction is detected during route guidance (e.g. traffic jam), this
traffic obstruction be entered into the route manually.
Once entered, the Infotainment system recalculates and provides an alterna-
tive route.
Enter traffic obstruction
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
Congestion ahead
.
Adjust the length of the traffic obstruction.
The traffic obstruction is displayed in red in the map to the right along the
route.
Remove traffic obstruction
The traffic obstruction is removed from the route after completion of the
route guidance or can manually be removed as follows.
In the main Navigation menu, tap the function surface
"Delete "congest.
ahead"
.
C
D
E
162
Infotainment
Vehicle systems
CAR - Vehicle settings
Introduction to the subject
Does not apply to Infotainment Blues.
In the CAR menu, you can display driving data and vehicle information and can
configure some vehicle systems.
Reset to factory settings
You can reset the factory settings in the Infotainment system in menu

Factory settings
.
Note
Settings relating to the vehicle systems can only be made when the ignition is
switched on.
Main menu
Fig. 205
Function surfaces in the main
menu
Press the

button to display the main menu with the following function
surfaces » Fig. 205.
Select the following menu points
Journey data
DriveGreen
Vehicle status
Operating playback - Radio/Media
Vehicle system settings

163
Vehicle systems
Driving
Starting-off and driving
Starting and stopping the engine
Introduction
Depending on equipment fitted, it is possible to switch the ignition on/off and
start/stop the engine with the key in the ignition or using the starter button.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine before the vehicle is stationary – risk of acci-
dent!
While driving with the engine stopped the ignition must always be
switched on. Otherwise, the steering may lock - The is a danger of an acci-
dent!
Do not withdraw the ignition key from the ignition lock until the vehicle
has come to a stop » page 169, Parking. Otherwise, the steering may lock -
danger of an accident!
Never leave the vehicle unattended with the engine running - there is a
risk of theft, accident etc.!
Never (e.g. in garages) run the engine in a closed place - there is the dan-
ger of poisoning and death!
CAUTION
Only start the engine when the engine and the vehicle are stationary - there
is a danger of starter and engine damage!
Do not push-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine and the
catalytic converter! The battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-
start aid.
On vehicles with the starter button, pay attention to where the key is loca-
ted. The system can recognize the valid key, even if it has been accidentally
left on the vehicle roof - there is danger of loss or damage to the key!
Note
Do not warm up the engine while the vehicle is stationary. If possible, start
your journey as soon as the engine has started. Through this, the engine rea-
ches its operating temperature faster.
Electronic immobiliser and steering lock
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
The electronic immobiliser (hereinafter referred to as immobiliser) makes the
theft or unauthorised use of your vehicle more difficult.
Immobiliser
The immobilizer allows the engine to be started only with the original car key.
Malfunction of the immobiliser
If the immobiliser in the key fails, it is not possible to start the engine. A corre-
sponding message appears in the display of the instrument cluster to explain
the immobiliser is active.
To start, use the other vehicle key or seek help from a specialist garage.
Steering lock - locking
On vehicles with ignition lock, remove the key and turn the steering wheel
until the steering lock engages.
On vehicles with a starter button, switch off the ignition and open the driv-
er's door. If the driver's door is opened and the ignition is switched off after-
wards, the steering is only locked automatically after the vehicle has been
locked.
Steering lock - unlock
On vehicles with ignition lock, insert the key into the ignition and turn on the
ignition. If this is not possible, then move the steering wheel slightly back and
forth, as a result of which the steering lock should unlock.
On vehicles with starter button, get into the vehicle and close the driver's
door. Under certain circumstances, the steering lock can be unlocked only
when the ignition is switched on or the engine is started.
WARNING
Never let the vehicle roll with locked steering lock - risk of accident!
164
Driving
Switching the ignition on/off
Fig. 206 Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock / starter button
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
Positions of the vehicle key in the ignition lock » Fig. 206 -
Ignition switched off, engine switched off
Ignition switched on
Starting engine
Switching on /off ignition in vehicles with starter button
Press the» Fig. 206 -
button, the ignition is turned on / off.
On vehicles with manual transmission the pedal must not be depressed to
switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, the brake pedal must not be de-
pressed to switch on / off the ignition, otherwise the engine will start.
Starting/Stopping the engine
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
Before starting the engine
Firmly apply the handbrake.
For vehicles with manual transmission, shift gear stick to neutral, depress
the clutch pedal and hold it there until the engine starts.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in position
P or N and » depress the brake pedal until the engine starts.
1
2
3
Starting engine
On vehicles with Ignition lock, turn the key to position
3
and the engine
starts» Fig. 206 on page 165 . Then release the key, the engine will start
automatically.
If the engine does not start within 10 seconds, turn the key to position
1
. Re-
peat the start-up process after 30 s.
On vehicles with starter button, press the button briefly» Fig. 206 on
page 165 - , the motor will start automatically.
In vehicles with diesel engines, the glow plug warning lights up after the
ignition is switched on. The engine can be started after the indicator light goes
out.
Switching the engine off
Stop the vehicle.
On vehicles with ignition lock, turn the key to position
1
» Fig. 206 on
page 165
.
On vehicles with starter button, press the button» Fig. 206 on page 165 -
,
the engine and the ignition will be switched off simultaneously.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, the ignition key can only be removed
if the selector lever is in position P .
Do not switch the engine off immediately at the end of your journey if the en-
gine has been working at high revs over a prolonged period, but leave it to run
at an idling speed for about 1 minute. This prevents any possible accumulation
of heat when the engine is switched off.
Emergency shutdown of the engine in vehicles with starter button
The system is equipped with a protective device against accidental switching
off, the engine can only be shut off while driving in the event of an emergency.
Keep the knob pressed » Fig. 206 on page 165 - or press it twice within 1
second.
After the emergency stop of the engine, the steering lock will remain un-
locked.
CAUTION
When the outdoor temperature is below -10 ° C, the selector lever when start-
ing must always be in P mode.
165
Starting-off and driving
Note
The engine running noises may be louder at first for a short time after start-
ing the cold engine.
You should not switch on any major electrical components during the heating
period, otherwise the vehicle battery will be drained unnecessarily.
After switching off the ignition, the radiator fan may (also intermittently)
continue to operate for approx. 10 minutes.
Problems with starting the engine - Vehicles with starter button
Fig. 207
Starting the engine - Press the
button with the key
Read and observe and on page 164 first.
If no engine start is possible and the display of the instrument cluster shows a
message that the key could not be detected by the system or there is a sys-
tem fault, then try to start the engine as follows.
Press the starter button with the key » Fig. 207.
If the engine does not start, the help of a specialist garage is required.
CAUTION
The key may not be detected by the system if the battery in the key is running
out of charge or the signal fails (strong electromagnetic field) or is shielded
(e.g. in an aluminium case).
START-STOP system
Introduction
The START-STOP system (hereinafter only referred to as "system") reduces
the CO
2
emissions, as well as harmful emissions and saves fuel.
If the system determine that the engine is not needed when the vehicle stops
(e.g. at the traffic lights), it turns off the engine and starts it again when mov-
ing off.
The system function depends on many factors. Some of them must be met by
the driver, the others are related to the system and cannot be influenced nor
recognised.
For this reason, the system can react differently in situations which are
identical from the driver's perspective.
The system is automatically activated every time the ignition is switched on
(even if this was manually deactivated using the key ).
Note
If the engine was stopped by the system, the ignition remains on.
Functionality
Fig. 208
Display
Vehicles with manual transmission
The motor is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
halt, the shift lever is shifted to the neutral position and the clutch pedal is re-
leased.
The motor is automatically started as soon as the clutch pedal is depressed.
Vehicles with automatic transmission
The motor is automatically switched off as soon as the vehicle comes to a
standstill and the brake pedal is actuated.
The motor is automatically started as soon as the brake pedal is released.
166
Driving
Conditions for the system function
The following conditions are required for the correct system function.
The driver's door is closed.
The driver has fastened the seat belt.
The driving speed exceeded 4 km/h after the last stop.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the trailer socket.
System status
The system status is shown on the display » Fig. 208 when stopped.
The engine is automatically switched off; when driving off again, the en-
gine is started automatically.
The motor is not automatically switched off.
The engine does not shut down when the vehicle stops, if e.g. the following
applies.
The engine temperature for the proper function of the system has not yet
been reached.
The charge state of the vehicle battery is too low.
The current consumption is too high.
High air conditioning or heating output (high fan speed, big difference be-
tween the desired and actual interior temperature).
If the engine has shut down automatically but the system detects that the en-
gine is required to run (e.g. if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly) then the
system automatically starts up the engine.
More information about the current system status can be displayed in the In-
fotainment screen, in the

Vehicle status
menu.
If there is a system fault, the following message will appear in the display of
the instrument cluster. Seek help from a specialist garage.
Note
If the driver's seat belt is removed for more than 30 seconds or the driver's
door is opened after the engine has switched off automatically, the engine will
have to be restarted manually.
No automatic engine shut-down takes place when a vehicle with automatic
transmission is moving at low speed (e.g. during a traffic jam) and remains sta-
tionary after pressing the brake pedal lightly. Automatic engine shutdown
takes place if you press the brake pedal down with more force.
For vehicles with automatic transmission there is no automatic engine shut-
down when the system detects a manoeuvring action due to a large steering
angle.
Deactivate/activate the system manually
Fig. 209
Button for the START-STOP sys-
tem
To deactivate/activate the system, press the
button» Fig. 209.
When the system is deactivated, the symbol in the button lights up
.
If the system is deactivated, then it is automatically activated again after
switching the ignition off and on.
Note
If the system is automatically deactivated when the engine is turned off, then
the automatic start process takes place.
167
Starting-off and driving
Braking and parking
Introduction
The wear and tear on the brake pads is dependent on the operating conditions
and driving style. In difficult conditions (e.g. urban, sporty driving), the condi-
tion of the brakes should be checked between service intervals by a specialist
garage.
Brake response can be slower if the brakes are covered in moisture or, in
winter, have a layer of ice or salt on them. The brakes should be cleaned and
dried by applying the brakes many times over » .
Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt on the brake pads can occur if the vehi-
cle has been parked for a long period and if you do not make much use of the
braking system. The brakes should be cleaned by applying the brakes several
times over » .
Before negotiating a long or steep gradient, reduce speed and shift down a
gear. As a result, the braking effect of the engine will be used, reducing the
load on the brakes. If, nevertheless, there is a need for additional braking, it
should be carried out at intervals.
Emergency braking warning - If it is necessary to brake hard, the system may
cause the brake lights to automatically flash, to alert the traffic behind.
New brake pads must first be““run in”” because these do not initially have the
best possible braking effect. Drive especially carefully for the first 200 km or
so.
If the brake fluid level is too low, it can cause faults in the braking system;
the warning light will light up in the instrument cluster » page 38, Braking
system. If the warning light does not light up, yet the stopping distance is per-
ceived to be longer than before, the driving style should be adapted in view of
the unknown cause of the problem, and braking kept to a minimum - seek the
help of a specialist garage without delay.
The brake booster increases the pressure generated with the brake pedal. The
brake booster only operates when the engine is running.
WARNING
Greater physical effort is required for braking when the engine is switch-
ed off – risk of accident.
The clutch pedal must be depressed when braking on a vehicle with man-
ual transmission, when the vehicle is in gear and at low revs. Otherwise, the
functionality of the brake system may be impaired – risk of accident!
Do not depress the brake pedal, if there is no requirement to slow down.
This causes the brakes to overheat and can also result in a longer braking
distance and excessive wear - The is a risk of an accident!
Only brake for the purpose of drying and cleaning the brake discs if the
traffic conditions permit this. Do not place any other road users in jeopardy.
Recommendations for new brake pads should be followed.
When stopping and parking, the parking brake should always be applied
firmly, otherwise the vehicle could move off - The is a risk of an accident!
If a front spoiler, full wheel trim, etc. is mounted retrospectively, it must
be ensured that the air supply to the front wheel brakes is not reduced.
Otherwise, the front brakes could be in danger of overheating – The is a
risk of an accident!
Handbrake
Fig. 210
Handbrake
Read and observe on page 168 first.
The handbrake secures the vehicle against unwanted movement when stop-
ping and parking.
Apply
Pull the handbrake lever firmly upwards.
168
Driving
Undoing
Pull the handbrake lever up slightly and at the same time push in the locking
button » Fig. 210.
Move the lever right down while pressing the lock button.
The handbrake warning lightlights up when the handbrake is applied, provi-
ded the ignition is on.
A warning signal sounds if the vehicle is inadvertently driven off with the hand-
brake applied. The handbrake warning is activated if the vehicle is driven at a
speed of over 5 km/h for more than 3 seconds.
WARNING
Disengage the handbrake completely. A handbrake which is only partially
disengaged can result in the rear brakes overheating. This can have a nega-
tive effect on the operation of the brake system – risk of accident!
Parking
Read and observe on page 168 first.
When stopping and parking, look for a place with a suitable surface » .
Only carry out the activities while parking in the specified order.
Bring the vehicle to a stop and depress the brake pedal.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
For vehicles with Automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with
Manual transmission, select first gear or Reverse gear R.
Release the brake pedal.
WARNING
The parts of the exhaust system can become very hot. Therefore, never
stop the vehicle in places where the underside of your vehicle could come
into contact with flammable materials (e.g. dry grass, leaves, spilled fuel
etc.) There is a risk of a fire and could result in severe injuries!
When leaving the vehicle never leave people unattended in the car who
could, for example, lock the vehicle or release the brake - The is a risk of
accidents and injury!
Manual gear shifting and pedals
Introduction
CAUTION
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Manual gear changing
Fig. 211 The shift pattern: Variant 1 (5-speed or 6-speed manual gear-
box) / variant 2 (5-speed gearbox with the 1.0 litre MPI engine)
Read and observe on page 169 first.
On the gear lever, the shift pattern for the individual gear positions is shown
» Fig. 211.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 47.
Always depress the clutch pedal all the way down. This prevents uneven wear
on the clutch.
Engage reverse gear - Version 1
Stop the vehicle.
The clutch pedal must be fully depressed.
Switch the gear lever to N.
Push the shift lever downwards fully to the left and then forward into R
» Fig. 211.
Selecting reverse gear - variant 2 (applies to the 1.0 l MPI motor)
Stop the vehicle.
169
Starting-off and driving
The clutch pedal must be fully depressed.
Switch the gear lever to N.
Wait briefly.
Push down on the shift lever, then push fully over to the right and then back-
wards, to position R.
The reversing lights will come on once reverse gear is engaged, provided the
ignition is on.
WARNING
Never engage reverse gear when driving – risk of accident!
CAUTION
If not in the process of changing gear, do not leave your hand on the gearshift
lever while driving. The pressure from the hand can cause the gearshift mecha-
nism to wear excessively.
Pedals
Read and observe on page 169 first.
The operation of the pedals must not be hindered under any circumstances!
Only a floor mat (ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original Accessories range)
which can be secured to the attachment points should be used in the driver's
footwell.
WARNING
There should be no objects in the driver's footwell, otherwise the pedal op-
eration can be impeded - risk of accident!
Automatic transmission
Introduction
The automatic transmission performs an automatic gear change irrespective
of the engine load, the operation of the accelerator, the vehicle speed and the
selected driving mode.
The modes of the automatic transmission can be adjusted by the driver by
means of the selector lever.
WARNING
Do not accelerate when selecting drive mode prior to moving off - The is
a risk of an accident!
Never move the selector lever to mode R or P when driving – The is a risk
of an accident!
If the vehicle stalls with the engine running, in the D, S, R or Tiptronic
mode, then the vehicle must be prevented from rolling away by means of
the brake pedal, parking brake or using the Auto Hold function. Even when
the engine is idling, power transmission is never completely interrupted –
the vehicle will creep.
When leaving the vehicle, the selector lever must always be set to P .
Otherwise, the vehicle may start to move - risk of accident.
CAUTION
If you want to move the selector lever from position N to position D / S
whilst driving, the engine must be running at idling speed.
When stopping on a slope, never try to hold the vehicle using the accelerator
pedal – this may lead to gear damage.
Select selector lever position
Fig. 212
Selector lever settings / display
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
The selector lever can be moved through shifting to one of the following posi-
tions » Fig. 212. In some positions you have to push the locking button
» page 171, Selector lever lock.
When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox mode and the currently selected
gear are indicated in the display » Fig. 212.
170
Driving
Park - the position can be set only when the vehicle is at a standstill.
The drive wheels are mechanically locked.
Reverse gear - The position can only be selected when the vehicle is sta-
tionary and the engine is idling.
Neutral (idle position) - Power transmission to the drive wheels is inter-
rupted.
Forward mode / sports programme - the gear change takes place in the
position S at higher engine speeds than in mode D
(Sprung position) - choice between positions D and S
In mode D or S, the forward gears are shifted automatically depending on the
engine load, the operation of the accelerator pedal, the vehicle speed, and the
selected driving mode .
Selector lever lock
Fig. 213
Shift lock button
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
The selector lever is locked in the P and N modes to prevent the forwards
travel mode from being selected accidentally and setting the vehicle in motion.
The selector lever is locked only when the vehicle is stationary and at speeds
up to 5 km/h.
The selector lever lock is indicated by the illumination of the warning light.
Disengage selector lever from P mode or N
Press the brake pedal and, at the same time, push the lock button in the di-
rection of arrow
1
» Fig. 213.
To move the selector lever from mode N to D/S only the brake pedal is press-
ed.
P
R
N
D/S
The selector lever is not locked when quickly moving across the position N
(e.g. from R to D/S). This, for example, helps to rock out a vehicle that is stuck,
e.g. in a bank of snow. The selector lever lock will engage if the lever is in posi-
tion N for more than approx. 2 seconds without the brake pedal being de-
pressed.
If it is not possible to release the gear selector from mode P in the usual man-
ner, then this can be emergency unlocked » page 231.
Note
If you want to switch the selector lever from mode P to mode D/S or vice ver-
sa, move the selector lever quickly. This prevents modes R or N from being se-
lected accidentally.
Manual shifting (Tiptronic)
Fig. 214
Selector lever
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
Tiptronic mode makes it possible to manually shift gears on the selector lever.
This mode can be selected both while halted and while driving.
Switching to manual shifting using the selector lever
Push the gear selector from position D/S towards the right, or left in a right-
hand drive vehicle. The current gear is maintained.
Changing gear
To change up, tap the selector lever forwards
+
» Fig. 214.
To change down, tap the selector lever backwards
-
» Fig. 214.
The currently selected gear is indicated in the » Fig. 212 on page 170 display.
The gearshift indicator must be observed when changing gear » page 47.
171
Starting-off and driving
When accelerating, the gearbox automatically shifts up into the higher gear
just before the maximum permissible engine speed is reached. If a lower gear
is selected, the gearbox does not shift down until there is no risk of the engine
overrevving.
Note
It may be advantageous to use manual gear shifting when driving downhill, for
example. Shifting to a lower gear reduces the load on the brakes and hence the
wear of the brakes.
Start and drive
Read and observe and on page 170 first.
Moving off and pausing temporarily
Firmly depress and hold the brake pedal.
Start the engine.
Press the locking button and move the selector lever to the desired position
» page 170.
Release the brake pedal and accelerate.
The selector lever position N does not have to be selected when stopping for a
short time (e.g. at a crossroads). However, the brake pedal should be de-
pressed, in order to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Accelerate to max. speed during the journey (kickdown function)
If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the vehicle is in forward drive mode,
the kick-down function is turned on.
The gear change is adjusted accordingly to achieve maximum acceleration.
WARNING
Rapid acceleration ( e.g. on slippery roads) can lead to a loss of control over
the vehicle – There is a risk of accident!
Running in and economical driving
Run in engine
During the first 1 500 km, the driving style is decisive for successful the run-
ning in process is.
During the first 1 000 km, the engine should not be charged with more than
3/4 of the maximum permitted engine revs and without the trailer.
From about 1 000 to 1 500 km the engine can be pushed up to the maximum
permitted engine speed.
Tips on economical driving
Fuel consumption depends on the driving style, road and weather conditions,
and similar such factors.
For an economical driving style, the following instructions must be observed.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking.
Observe the recommended gear » page 47.
Avoid full throttle and high speeds.
Reduce idling.
Avoid short distances.
Ensure the correct tyre inflation pressure is maintained » page 216.
Avoid unnecessary ballast.
Remove the roof rack before driving if it is not needed.
Only turn on electrical consumers (e.g. seat heating) for as long as necessary.
Briefly ventilate before turning on the cooling system, do not use the cooling
system with the windows open.
Do not leave windows open at high speeds.
Drive Green function
Fig. 215
Display on Infotainment screen
The DriveGreen function (hereinafter referred to as "DriveGreen") evaluates
the driving efficiency based on information relating to the driving style.
DriveGreen can be displayed on the Infotainment as follows.
172
Driving
Press the

button in Infotainment and then tap the function surfaces on
the screen
DriveGreen
.
A
driving liquid display
With the driving is fluid, the display is located in the middle (near the green
dot). When accelerating, the display moves down, and upwards when braking.
B
“Green leaf”
The greener the leaf, the more economic the driving style. With less economi-
cal driving, the leaf is presented without any green colouring or it can be com-
pletely hidden.
C
bar graph
The higher the green bars, the more economical the driving style. Each bar
shows the driving efficiency in 5-second steps, the current bar is on the left.
D
scoring (0 - 100)
The higher the indicated value, the more economical the driving style. When
you tap the function surface
D
, a detailed assessment showing the driving ef-
ficiency during the last 30 minutes is displayed.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the assessment from the previous journey (the bars are shown in dark green).
E
the average fuel consumption from the start
When you tap the
E
function surface, a detailed overview of the average fuel
consumption during the last 30 minutes is shown.
If the trip lasts less than 30 minutes from the start, then the overview will add
the overview of the average fuel consumption from the previous journey (the
bars are shown in dark green).
F
symbols
The display may show the following four symbols, which give information on
the current driving style.
Economical driving style
The current speed has a negative effect on fuel consumption.
The journey does not take place in a free-flowing manner, avoid unneces-
sary acceleration and braking
Recommended gear
Tips for economical driving
Tap on the
B
leave to display tips for economical driving.

Note
When resetting the single-trip memory “Since start”, the average consumption
E
, the driving assessment
D
, and the diagram
C
are also reset.
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
Driving Tips
Only drive on roads and terrain that correspond to the vehicle parame-
ters» page 244, Technical data.
The driver is always responsible for deciding whether the vehicle can cope
with the conditions and the terrain.
WARNING
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions. Too high a speed or an erroneous manoeuvre may
cause serious injury and damage to the vehicle.
Combustible objects such as dry leaves or twigs caught under the base of
the vehicle could ignite on hot vehicle parts - risk of fire!
CAUTION
Pay attention to the ground clearance of the vehicle! When driving over ob-
jects which are larger than the ground clearance, the vehicle can get damaged.
Any objects that get trapped under the vehicle floor must be removed as
soon as possible. These items can cause damage to the vehicle (e.g. to parts of
the fuel or brake system).
Driving through water
Fig. 216
Maximum permissible water lev-
el when driving through water
173
Starting-off and driving
The following instructions must be observed if vehicle damage is to be avoided
when driving through water (e.g. flooded roads).
Therefore, always determine the depth of the water before driving through
water. The water level must not go above the web of the lower beam
» Fig. 216.
Drive at no more than walking pace, otherwise a wave may form in front of
the vehicle, which could cause the water to enter into the vehicle’s systems
(e.g. the air intake system for the engine).
Never stop in the water, do not reverse and do not switch the engine off.
CAUTION
If water gets into the vehicle’s systems (e.g. the air intake system for the en-
gine) it can cause serious damage to the vehicle!
Oncoming vehicles can generate water waves which can exceed the permis-
sible water level for your vehicle.
Do not drive through salt water, as the salt can cause corrosion. A vehicle
coming into contact with salt water is to be thoroughly rinsed with fresh wa-
ter.
Assist systems
General information
Introduction
WARNING
The assistance systems only serve to support and do not relieve the driv-
er of the responsibility for driving the vehicle.
The increased safety provision, as well as the increased occupant protec-
tion provided by the assistance systems must not tempt you to take risks -
risk of accident!
Adjust the speed and driving style to the current visibility, weather, road
and traffic conditions.
The assistance systems have physical and system-related limitations. For
this reason, the driver may experience some undesired or delayed system
responses in certain situations. You should therefore always be alert and
ready to intervene!
Only enable, disable or set the assistance systems so that you have the
car fully under control in every traffic situation - risk of accident!
Radar sensor
Fig. 217
Installation location of the radar
sensor
Read and observe on page 174 first.
The radar sensor (hereinafter on referred to as sensor) uses electromagnetic
waves to capture the traffic situation ahead of the vehicle » Fig. 217.
The sensor is part of the ACC» page 184 and Front Assist» page 189systems.
174
Driving
The sensor function may be impaired in the events of one of the following.
The sensor cover is soiled (e.g. with mud, snow etc.).
The area in front of and around the sensor cover is obscured (e.g. by labels,
auxiliary headlights etc.).
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
If the sensor is covered or dirty, the corresponding message appears in the in-
strument cluster display for the ACC system» page 189, Malfunctionsor Front
Assist system » page 191, Malfunctions.
WARNING
If you suspect that the sensor is damaged, deactivate the ACC system
and Front Assist system» page 186, » page 191. Have the sensor checked
by a specialist garage.
A collision or damage in the front or lower area of the vehicle could affect
the sensor function - there is risk of accident! Have the sensor checked by
a specialist garage.
Do not cover the area in front of and around the sensor cover. This can
lead to impaired function of the sensor - risk of accidents!
CAUTION
Remove the snow with a brush and the ice with a solvent-free de-icer.
Braking and stabilisation systems
Introduction
The brake and stabilization systems are automatically activated each time the
ignition is switched on, unless otherwise indicated.
The error display is in Chapter » page 37, Warning lights.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
Stability Control (ESC)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
ESC improves vehicle stability in critical driving situations (e.g. if the vehicle
starts to skid) by the braking the individual wheels to maintain the direction.
If there is a TCS intervention, the indicator light flashes in the instrument
cluster.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
ABS prevents the wheels locking when braking. Thereby, it helps the driver to
maintain control of the vehicle.
An ABS intervention can be noticed through pulsating movements of the
brake pedal and distinct noises.
When the ABS system is active, do not pump the brakes or lift off the brake
pedal.
Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
MSR counteracts the tendency of the drive wheels to lock during downshifts
or sudden deceleration (e.g. on icy or an otherwise slippery road surface).
If the drive wheels should lock, then the engine speed is automatically in-
creased. This reduces the braking effect of the engine and the wheels can ro-
tate freely again.
175
Assist systems
Traction control (TCS)
Fig. 218
Key for the TCS system
Read and observe on page 175 first.
The TCS prevents the drive wheels from spinning. TCS reduces the drive pow-
er transmitted to the wheels in the case of slipping wheels. Thereby, for exam-
ple, driving on road surfaces with low grip is made easier.
During a TCS intervention, the indicator light
flashes in the instrument clus-
ter.
Deactivation
Press the
» Fig. 218 button.
or: In the Infotainment system, press the

button, then tap the function
surface
ESC system:
ASR off
.
During deactivation the warning light lights up in the instrument cluster
and
an appropriate message is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Activation
Press the » Fig. 218 button.
or: In the Infotainment system, press the

button, then tap the function
surface
ESC system:
Activated
.
During activation extinguished the warning light is and an appropriate mes-
sage is displayed in the instrument cluster.
The TCS should normally always be enabled. The system should be deactivated
only in the following situations, for example.
When driving with snow chains.
When driving in deep snow or on a very loose surface.
When “rocking a car free” when it has become stuck.
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL and XDS)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
EDL prevents the turning of the respective wheel of the driven axle. EDL
brakes a spinning wheel if required and transfers the drive power force to the
other drive wheel. Driving becomes easier on road surfaces with different
traction under each wheel of the driven axle.
EDL switches off automatically to avoid excessive heat generation on the
brake of the wheel being braked. Once the brakes have cooled down, there is
an automatic re-activation of EDL.
XDS+ is an extension to the electronic differential lock (EDL). The XDS+ re-
sponds to the release of pressure on the wheels during fast cornering by
means of a braking intervention on the wheel on the inside of the corner on
the driven axle. By decelerating the individual wheels, this prevents the vehicle
from over-steering or understeering. This has a positive effect on the driving
stability and steerability of the vehicle.
Brake Assist (HBA)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
HBA increases the braking effect and helps to shorten the braking distance.
The HBA is activated by very rapid depression of the brake pedal. To achieve
the shortest possible braking distance, the brake pedal must be applied firmly
until the vehicle has come to a complete standstill.
HBA is automatically switched off when the brake pedal is released.
Hill Start Assist
Read and observe on page 175 first.
When driving on slopes, Hill Start Assist (hereinafter referred to simply as the
system) allows you to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator
pedal without the vehicle rolling downhill on its own.
The vehicle is braked by the system for about 2 seconds after releasing the
brake pedal.
The system is active as of a 5% slope, if the driver door is closed. The system is
only ever active on slopes when starting off in forward or reverse.
176
Driving
Multicollision brake (MCB)
Read and observe on page 175 first.
MCB helps to decrease speed after a collision by means of automatic braking
interventions and to stabilise the vehicle. This reduces the risk of a subsequent
crash due to uncontrolled vehicle movement.
The automatic brake interventions can take place only if the following condi-
tions are met.
There was a front, side and rear-end collision of a certain severity.
The impact speed was greater than approx. 10 km/h.
The brakes, the ESL and other required electrical systems remain function-
al after impact.
The accelerator pedal is not actuated.
Parking aid (ParkPilot)
Introduction
The parking aid (hereinafter simply referred to as the system) uses acoustic
signals on the Infotainment screen when manoeuvring around obstacles in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
Moving persons or objects may not be recognised by the system sensors.
Under certain circumstances, surfaces of certain objects and types of
clothing cannot reflect the system signals. There is a danger that such ob-
jects or people may not be recognised by the system sensors.
External noise sources may affect the signals of the system sensors.
There is a danger that obstacles may not be recognised by the system sen-
sors.
Before reversing, make sure that there are no small obstacles, such as
rocks, thin posts, etc., in front of or behind your vehicle. Such obstacles
may not be recognised by the system sensors.
CAUTION
Keep the system sensors » Fig. 219 on page 178 clean and free from snow
and ice, and do not cover them with any objects of any kind, otherwise the
functioning of the system may be restricted.
In adverse weather conditions (heavy rain, water vapour, very low or high
temperatures, etc.), the functioning of the system may be impaired - “incorrect
recognition of obstacles”.
Accessories additionally installed on the vehicle rear, such as bicycle carriers,
can impair the system function.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Parking and
manoeuvring
.
ParkPilot – Settings for the parking aid
Activate automatically
– Activate/deactivate the compact parking aid display
(when driving forward)
Front volume
– Adjust the volume of the beeps for obstacle detection in front
Front tone setting
– Setting the pitch of the beeps for obstacle detection in
front
Rear volume
– Set the volume level of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Rear tone setting
– Setting the pitch of the beeps for the rear obstacle detec-
tion
Entertainment fading while parking
– Lowers the audio volume (e.g. radio vol-
ume) with activated parking aid
177
Assist systems
Operation
Fig. 219 Installation location of the sensors on the left side of the vehi-
cle: front/rear
Fig. 220
Sampled areas and range of the
sensors
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The system uses ultrasound waves to calculate the distance between the
bumper and an obstacle. The ultrasonic sensors are, depending on vehicle
equipment,, located in the back or in the front bumper » Fig. 219.
Depending on the equipment, the following system versions are possible
» Fig. 220.
Variant 1: warns of obstacles in areas
C
,
D
.
Variant 2: warns of obstacles in areas
A
,
B
,
C
,
D
.
Approximate range of sensors (in cm)
Area » Fig. 220 Variant 1
(3 sensors)
Variant 2
(7 sensors)
A
- 120
B
- 60
C
160 160
D
60 60
Audible signals
The interval between the acoustic signals becomes shorter as the clearance is
reduced. At a distance of approx. 30 cm a continuous tone starts to sound -
danger area.
The acoustic signals can be set in the Infotainment system » page 177.
Towing a trailer
When towing, or when another accessory is connected to the trailer socket,
only areas
A
and
B
» Fig. 220 are active in the system.
Note
The signal tones for front obstacle recognition are factory-set to be higher
than for rear obstacle recognition.
Display Infotainment screen
Fig. 221
Screen display
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Function surfaces and warnings » Fig. 221
A
Road display.
178
Driving
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switching off park assistant dis-
play.
Switching audible parking signals on/off.
Change to rear-view camera display .
There is an obstacle in the collision area (the distance to the obstacle
is less than 30 cm). Stop moving in the direction of the obstacle!
There is an obstacle in the road (the distance to the obstacle is great-
er than 30 cm).
An obstacle is located outside of the road (the distance to the obsta-
cle is greater than 30 cm).
System failure (there is no indication of obstacles).
Road display
The road display
A
» Fig. 221 indicates the road on which the vehicle would
take the current steering wheel and shift / selector lever position.
The shift lever is in the neutral position and the gear selector is in mode N. the
road display is at the front.
Activation / deactivation
Fig. 222
System key (option 2)
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
Activation
The system is activated when the reverse gear is engaged, or, in vehicles with
variant 2, also by pressing the button » Fig. 222.
When activating, an alarm sounds and the symbol illuminates in the button.
Deactivation
On vehicles with Version 1, the system can be deactivated by moving out of
reverse gear.
For vehicles with variant 2, the system is automatically deactivated by press-
ing the button or at a speed above 15 km/h (the symbol in the button
goes out).
Displaying an error
If a warning signal sounds for 3 seconds after activating the system and there
is no obstacle close to your car, this indicates a system fault. The fault is also
indicated by the symbol flashing in the button. Seek help from a specialist
garage.
Note
The system can only be activated with the button at a speed of below 15
km/h.
Automatic system activation when moving forward
Fig. 223
Infotainment screen: Display
with automatic activation
Read and observe and on page 177 first.
The automatic system activation occurs when moving forward at a speed be-
low 10 km/h when the vehicle approaches an obstacle.
After activation, the following is shown in the left pane of the Infotainment
screen » Fig. 223.
Acoustic signals are sounded as of a distance from the obstacle of around
50 cm.
The automatic display can be activated / deactivated in the Infotainment sys-
tem » page 177.
179
Assist systems
Reversing camera
Introduction
The reversing camera (hereinafter the system) helps the driver to park and ma-
noeuvre the vehicle by displaying the area behind the vehicle on the Infotain-
ment screen (hereinafter only referred to as the screen).
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
The camera may not be soiled or obscured, otherwise the system func-
tion will be significantly affected - there is a risk of accident. For informa-
tion on cleaning » page 204.
CAUTION
The camera image is distorted by contrast with eyesight. For this reason, the
screen display is only of limited use for estimating distances to vehicles be-
hind.
Some items, such as narrow columns, chain link fences or lattice, may not be
represented adequately in terms of screen resolution.
In a crash or damage the vehicle's rear camera can possibly deviate from the
correct position. If this is the case, have the sensor checked by a specialist ga-
rage.
Note
The camera can be equipped with a cleaning system » page 67. The spraying is
carried out automatically when the rear window is sprayed.
Operation
Fig. 224 Installation location of the camera / scanned area behind the
vehicle
Read and observe
and on page 180 first.
The camera for capturing the area behind the vehicle is in the boot lid handle
» Fig. 224.
Area behind the vehicle » Fig. 224
Detection range of the camera
Area outside the detection range of the camera
The system can assist the driver when parking and manoeuvring under the fol-
lowing basic conditions.
The ignition is switched on.
Reverse gear is engaged.
The luggage compartment lid is completely closed.
The vehicle is travelling at less than 15 km/h.
The area behind the vehicle is clearly visible.
The selected parking / manoeuvring area is clear and even.
Note
The screen display can be interrupted by pressing the symbol button
» Fig. 222 on page 179.
After disengaging reverse gear, automatic screen display of the parking aid is
carried out (variant 2, 3) » page 178.
A
B
180
Driving
Guidelines and function surfaces
Fig. 225 Infotainment screen: orientation lines/function surfaces
Read and observe and on page 180 first.
On the screen, orientation lines are shown along with the monitored area be-
hind the vehicle.
Distance of the orientation lines behind the vehicle » Fig. 225
The distance is about 40 cm (safety distance limit).
The distance is about 100 cm.
The distance is about 200 cm.
The distance may vary slightly depending on the load of the vehicle and the
road inclination.
The distance between the side lines corresponds approximately to the vehicle
width including mirrors.
Function surfaces » Fig. 225
Depending on the Infotainment type: Switches off the display of the
area behind the vehicle
Screen settings – brightness, contrast, colour
Switching audible parking signals on/off
Enabling and reduced park assistance display
Change to park assistance display
CAUTION
The objects shown on the screen can be closer or even further away than they
appear. This is especially the case in the following situations.
Protruding objects, such as the rear of a truck and the like.
A
B
C
When driving from a horizontal surface into a slope or a depression.
When driving from a slope or a depression onto a horizontal surface.
Cruise Control System
Introduction
The Cruise Control System (CCS) maintains a set speed without you having to
actuate the accelerator pedal. The status where the CCS maintains the speed
is referred to hereinafter as the control.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
After pressing the clutch pedal, no interrupted control occurs! For exam-
ple, if a different gear is engaged and the clutch pedal is released, control is
continued.
Operation
Fig. 226
MAXI DOT display (monochromatic): Examples of CCS status
displays
181
Assist systems
Fig. 227 Segment display: Examples of CCS status displays
Read and observe on page 181 first.
CCS status displays » Fig. 226, » Fig. 227
Speed set, but control is inactive.
Control is active.
No speed set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for starting the control
The CCS is activated.
On vehicles with a manual transmission, the second gear or higher is en-
gaged.
On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the selector lever is in the
D/S position or in the Tiptronic position.
The current speed is higher than 20 km/h.
This, however, is only possible to the extent permitted by the engine output
and braking power of the vehicle.
WARNING
If the engine output or engine braking effect is insufficient to maintain the
set speed, the driver must assume control of the accelerator and brake
pedals!
Operation description
Fig. 228
Cruise control system controls
Read and observe on page 181 first.
Overview of the CCS controls » Fig. 228
A
 Activate CCS (control deactivated)
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Deactivate CCS (delete set speed)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ Increase speed
C
 Start control / reduce speed
D
 Switch between CCS and Speed Limiter
a)
If no speed is set the current speed is adopted.
Once the controls are activated, the CCS maintains the vehicle at the set
speed; the indicator light
lights up in the instrument cluster.
Controls are automatically interrupted if any of the following occur.
The brake pedal is operated.
When one of the brake assist systems (e.g. ESC) intervenes.
Through an airbag deployment.
By pressing button
D
» Fig. 228.
WARNING
Always deactivate the cruise control system after use to prevent the sys-
tem being enabled unintentionally.
The control does not resume if the set speed is too high for the existing
traffic conditions.
182
Driving
Note
During control, speed can be increased by pressing the accelerator pedal. Re-
leasing the accelerator pedal will cause the speed to drop again to the set
speed.
By pressing the button
D
» Fig. 228 during the control procedure this is can-
celled and the Speed Limiter is activated.
Speed limiter
Introduction
The Speed Limiter limits the maximum driving speed to the set speed limit.
The speed limit can only be exceeded by depressing the accelerator pedal fully.
The condition in which the speed limiter prevents a set speed limit from being
exceeded is referred to hereinafter as Regulation.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
Operation
Fig. 229 MAXI DOT display (monochromatic): Examples of speed limiter
status displays
Fig. 230 Segment display: Examples of speed limiter status displays
Read and observe on page 183 first.
Speed limiter status displays » Fig. 229, » Fig. 230
Speed limit set, but regulation is inactive.
Control is active.
No speed limit set.
System fault - seek assistance from a specialist garage immediately.
Basic requirements for starting the control
The Speed Limiter is activated.
The current speed is higher than 30 km/h.
183
Assist systems
Description of operation
Fig. 231 Operating elements of the speed limiter: Vehicle with Speed
Limiter / vehicle with CCS and Speed Limiter
Read and observe
on page 183 first.
Overview of the control elements of the speed limiter » Fig. 231
A
 Activate Speed Limiter (regulation deactivated)
For vehicles with CCS and Speed Limiter, the CCS is activated by
the switch in the  position by being adjusted. The activation of
the speed limiter occurs only after pressing the button
D
.
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
 Speed Limiter disable (set limit delete)
B
 Take control again
a)
/ increase speed - press (in increments of 1
km/h), hold (in increments of 10 km/h)
C
 Start control/ reduce speed - press (in increments of 1 km/h), hold
(in increments of 10 km/h)
D
 Switching between CCS and speed limiter
a)
If no speed limit is set, the current speed is set as the speed limit.
After starting the system, the current speed is set as the speed limit, the warn-
ing light lights up in the instrument cluster.
Exceeding the speed limit during the regulation
If, during the setting, it is necessary to exceed the speed limit (e.g. to over-
take), the accelerator pedal must be pressed fully.
When exceeding the speed limit (e.g. driving down a hill), an acoustic signal
sounds and the warning light flashes in the instrument cluster.
The regulation is resumed once the speed has fallen below the set limit.
Note
By pressing the button
D
during the control this is cancelled and the CCS is
activated.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Introduction
The Adaptive Cruise Control (hereinafter referred to as ACC) maintains the set
speed and at the same time the distance to the vehicle ahead without the ac-
celerator or brake pedal being pressed.
The front of the vehicle and the distance to the vehicle ahead is monitored by
a radar sensor » page 174.
The state in which the ACC maintains the speed or the proximity is described
as control from here on.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
The driver must always be ready to take over the operation of the accel-
erator and brake pedal.
The ACC does not react when approaching a stationary obstacle, such as
traffic jams, vehicle breakdowns or vehicles waiting at a traffic light.
The ACC does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
If the ACC does not decelerate fast enough, immediately apply the vehi-
cle's foot brake.
WARNING
For safety reasons, do not use the ACC under the following conditions.
When driving in turning lanes, motorway exits or construction sites, to
avoid an unwanted acceleration to the stored speed.
When visibility is poor, (e.g. fog, heavy rain, thick snowfall).
When road conditions are poor (e.g. ice, slippery road, gravel, dirt road).
Driving into “sharp” corners or in steep gradients / on steep inclines.
184
Driving
WARNING (Continued)
When driving through places where metal objects (such as metal build-
ings, railway tracks, etc.) can be found.
When driving through very divided and enclosed spaces (such as large-
capacity garages, car ferries, tunnels and the like.).
Note
The ACC is designed primarily for use on motorways.
The ACC reduces the speed by automatically releasing the accelerator or by
means of a braking procedure as appropriate. If the brakes are used for an au-
tomatic speed reduction at any moments, then the brake light illuminates.
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the con-
nected trailer, the ACC becomes unavailable.
The control automatically cancels the engagement of the brake supportive
assistance systems (e.g. ESC) or when the maximum permitted engine speed is
exceeded.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe on page 184 first.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Driver assis-
tance
.
ACC (adaptive cruise control) - Setting for the ACC
Driving programme:
- Sets the vehicle acceleration when the ACC is activated
Last selected. distance
- Switch on/off the last distance selected
Distance:
- Sets the distance to the vehicle in front
Operation
Fig. 232 Instrument cluster display: Examples for ACC displays
Fig. 233
Instrument cluster display: Examples for ACC status displays
Read and observe on page 184 first.
The ACC makes it possible to set a speed of 30-160 km/h as well as to set the
distance from the vehicles in front.
The ACC can detect a vehicle that is up to approx. 120 m ahead using the radar
sensor.
ACC displays » Fig. 232
Vehicle detected (control active)
Line showing the displacement of the distance during setting » page 187,
Setting the distance
Set distance to the vehicle ahead
Vehicle detected (control deactivated)
1
2
3
4
185
Assist systems
ACC status displays » Fig. 233
Control deactivated.
Control activated - no vehicle detected.
Regulation deactivated - no speed stored.
Control activated (vehicle detected).
Note to reduce speed
If the delay of the ACC is insufficient in relation to the vehicle in front, the
warning light lights up in the instrument cluster and the display shows a
message to engage the brake pedal.
Note
Some ACC notifications in the display of the instrument cluster may be hidden
by notifications for other functions. An ACC notification automatically appears
for a brief moment when there is a change in status of the ACC.
Automatic stopping and starting
Read and observe on page 184 first.
Vehicles with an automatic transmission can decelerate to a complete stop
and start moving again using the ACC.
Decelerate to a complete stop
If a vehicle ahead decelerates to a standstill, the ACC will also decelerate your
vehicle to a complete stop.
Starting to drive again after a holding period
As soon as the vehicle ahead starts moving again after a holding period, your
vehicle will also move and the speed will continue to be controlled. Control is
automatically disconnected in case of longer holding periods.
Operation overview
Fig. 234 Operating lever
Read and observe on page 184 first.
Overview of ACC functions operated with the lever » Fig. 234
1
 Activate ACC (control deactivated)
2
 Start control (resume) / increase speed by 1 km/h at a time
(sprung position)
3
 Interrupt control (sprung position)
4
 Deactivate ACC
5
 Increase speed by 10 km/h at a time
6
 Decrease speed by 10 km/h at a time
A
 Set proximity level
B
 Start control / reduce speed in increments of 1 km/h
If the lever is set from the position  directly into the sprung position 
the current speed is stored and the control process is started.
186
Driving
Start control
Read and observe on page 184 first.
Basic requirements for start of control
The ACC is activated.
On vehicles with manual transmission, the second gear or a higher gear is
selected and the current speed is greater than 30 km/h.
On vehicles with automatic transmission the selector lever is in the posi-
tion D/S or in the Tiptronic position and the current speed is higher than 2
km / h.
Start control
Press the button  » Fig. 234 on page 186 .
or: Set the lever to the sprung position

» Fig. 234 on page 186 .
The ACC takes the current driving speed and performs the control, the warn-
ing light
illuminates in the instrument cluster.
If the control is started by moving the lever to the position

and if the
speed is already stored, the ACC adopts this speed and carries out the control.
Note
If control is started at a speed of less than 30 km/h on vehicles with an auto-
matic transmission, the speed of 30 km/h is stored. The speed increases auto-
matically to 30 km/h or is regulated with respect to the speed of the vehicle
ahead.
Stop/resume control
Read and observe on page 184 first.
Stop control
Set the lever into the sprung position  » Fig. 234 on page 186 .
or: Press the brake pedal.
Control stops, the speed remains stored.
Resume control
Start control » page 187, Start control.
Note
Control is also stopped when the clutch pedal is held down for longer than 30
s or the TCS is deactivated.
Setting/changing the desired speed
Read and observe on page 184 first.
The desired speed can be set or changed using the control lever » Fig. 234 on
page 186.
Setting/changing the speed by increments of 10 km/h at a time () - re-
quirements
The ACC is activated.
Increasing/reducing the speed by increments of 1 km/h at a time (

/

- requirements
The ACC is activated.
Vehicle control takes place.
Changing the speed by adopting the current speed () - requirements
The ACC is activated.
The vehicle is moving at a speed other than that which is stored.
Note
If during control the speed is increased by pressing the accelerator, control is
temporarily stopped. Upon releasing the accelerator, control is automatically
resumed.
If during control the speed is reduced by applying the brake, control is stop-
ped. Control needs to be restarted in order to resume » page 187.
If the vehicle is controlled by a lower speed than the stored speed, then 
the current speed is stored by pressing the button again  and the speed is
reduced in increments of 1 km/h.
Setting the distance
Read and observe on page 184 first.
The ACC allows you to set five distance steps to the preceding vehicle.
The distance is adjustable in a range of 1 to 3.6 s.
187
Assist systems
Adjusting the distance in the Infotainment system
In the ACC menu in the Infotainment system, select menu item
Distance:
and
set the distance » page 185, Settings in Infotainment.
Adjust the distance with the lever
Set the switch  to the sprung position or » Fig. 234 on page 186.
The display of the instrument cluster shows line
2
» Fig. 232 on page 185,
which indicates the proximity.
Using the switch  on the lever, adjust the line
2
to the desired dis-
tance.
Note
If the distance is changed in the Infotainment, the change will only come into
effect after a subsequent activation of the ACC.
Special driving conditions
Fig. 235
Cornering / narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
Fig. 236
Lane changes of other vehicles / stationary vehicles
Read and observe on page 184 first.
The following (and similar) situations require special attention and possibly the
intervention of the driver (braking, accelerating etc.).
When cornering
When driving into or driving out of long corners, it could be that a vehicle is
travelling in the adjacent lane and is scanned by the radar » Fig. 235 - . The
host vehicle is then controlled according to this vehicle.
Narrow vehicles or vehicles travelling side by side
A narrow or offset vehicle driving can only be recognized by the ACC if this is
located in the scanning range of the radar » Fig. 235 - .
Other vehicles changing lanes
Vehicles that change onto the lane with a small distance » Fig. 236 -
may not
be detected by ACC in good time.
Stationary vehicles
The ACC does not detect stationary objects! When a vehicle detected by the
ACC turns or sheers off and there is a stationary vehicle in front of this vehicle,
» Fig. 236 -
the ACC does not respond to the stationary vehicle.
Vehicles with special load or special body parts
Other vehicles with a load or with body parts protruding from the sides, back
or top of the vehicle contour may not be detected by the ACC.
Overtaking and towing
Read and observe on page 184 first.
When overtaking
When your vehicle is being controlled at a speed that is lower than the set
speed and the turn signal is operated, ACC assesses this situation as meaning
that the driver wishes to overtake. The ACC automatically accelerates the ve-
hicle, thereby reducing the proximity to a vehicle ahead.
If your vehicle changes to the overtaking lane and no vehicle is detected
ahead, ACC accelerates until the set speed is reached and then keeps it con-
stant.
Acceleration can be cancelled at any time by touch on the brake pedal or
pressing the button  on the lever » Fig. 234 on page 186.
188
Driving
Towing a trailer
When towing, or if another accessory is connected to the trailer socket, ACC
control is set with a lower rate. The manner of driving should therefore be
adapted to this limitation.
Malfunctions
Read and observe on page 184 first.
If ACC is not available, the warning light appears in the display of the instru-
ment cluster and an appropriate message is shown.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
view appears. Clean the sensor or remove the obstacle » page 174.
ACC not available
If the ACC is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If ACC continues
to be unavailable, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
ACC fault
With an ACC fault, an error message appears. Seek help from a specialist ga-
rage.
Front Assist
Introduction
The Front Assist (hereinafter referred to as "system") warns you of the danger
of a collision with a vehicle or another obstacle in front of the vehicle, and tries
to avoid a collision or mitigate its consequences by automatically applying the
brakes where necessary.
The area in front of the vehicle is monitored by a radar sensor» page 174.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
The system does not respond to crossing or oncoming objects.
CAUTION
In case of failure of more than one brake light on the vehicle or on the electri-
cally connected trailer, the system becomes unavailable.
Settings in Infotainment
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface
Driver assis-
tance
.
Front Assist (ambient traffic monitor. sys.) – Set the assist system for dis-
tance monitoring to the vehicles ahead
Active
– Activate/deactivate the assis system
Advance warning
- Activate/deactivate and set the distance level at which a
warning occurs
Display distance warning
– Activate/deactivate distance warnings
Operation
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
The system support is provided in the following manner.
Alerts you about a dangerous proximity to the vehicle ahead.
Warns you of an impending collision.
Assists with a brake action triggered by the driver.
If the driver fails to respond to a detected danger, an automatic braking ac-
tion is performed.
The system can work only if the following basic conditions are met.
The system is activated.
TCS is activated » page 176.
The vehicle is travelling forwards at a speed of more than approx. 5 km/h.
Note
The system can be impaired or may not be available, for example when driving
in “sharp ”curves or with an ESC engagement » page 175.
189
Assist systems
Distance warning
Fig. 237
Instrument cluster display: distance warning
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
The display of the distance warning is for vehicles with MAXI DOT display.
If a safe distance from the vehicle ahead is undershot, the warning light ap-
pears in the display
» Fig. 237.
Immediately increase the proximity if the current traffic situation allows
you to do so!
The proximity at which the warning is displayed depends on the current speed.
The warning may occur when driving between about 60 km/h and 210 km/h.
Warning and automatic braking
Fig. 238
Instrument cluster display: Warning or emergency
braking at low speed
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
Emergency braking at low speed
If there is a risk of collision in a vehicle speed range of about 5 km/h to 30
km/h, the system triggers an automatic braking.
With automatic braking, the warning light » Fig. 238appears in the display.
Advance warning
If the system detects a risk of collision, the warning light » Fig. 238appears
in the display and you will hear an acoustic signal.
The pre-warning display can occur in the following situations.
If there is a risk of collision with a moving obstacle at a driving speed range
of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 210 km/h.
If there is a risk of collision with a stationary obstacle at a driving speed
range of approx. 30 km/h to approx. 85 km/h.
With a warning the brake pedal must be pressed or the moving obstacle is
to be avoided!
Acute alert
If the driver does not react to the advance warning when in danger of a colli-
sion with a moving obstacle, the system briefly applies the brake automatically
via an active brake intervention to draw attention to the potential danger of a
collision again.
Automatic Braking
If the driver does not respond to acute warning, the system begins to auto-
matically brake the vehicle.
If an automatic brake intervention is triggered by the system, the pressure in
the brake system increases and the brake pedal cannot be operated with the
normal pedal stroke.
The automatic braking interventions can be cancelled by pressing the acceler-
ator pedal or by steering intervention.
Brake assist
If the driver brakes inadequate with an impending collision, the system auto-
matically increases braking force.
The braking assistance only occurs as long as the brake pedal is being firmly
pressed down.
190
Driving
Deactivation/activation
Fig. 239 Buttons/dial: on the operating lever/the multifunction steering
wheel
Read and observe
and on page 189 first.
The function is automatically activated each time the ignition is switched on.
The system should only be disabled in exceptional cases » .
On vehicles with the MAXI DOT display, the system can be activated/deactiva-
ted in the main menu » page 51, Menu item
Assist systems
.
Deactivation / activation in vehicles with segment display
Button
» Fig. 239
Action Operation
A
Hold up / down Show Front Assist menu item
B
Press Deactivate/activate system
Deactivation / activation in vehicles with multi-function steering wheel
Button /
dial
» Fig. 239
Action Operation
C
Press Show Front Assist menu item
D
Press Deactivate/activate system
Disable / enable and setting in the Infotainment
In Infotainment, the entire system or the function advance warning and dis-
tance warning can be deactivated/activated» page 189, Settings in Infotain-
ment.
If the distance-warning function was deactivated before switching off the ig-
nition, it remains deactivated after switching on the ignition.
WARNING
In the following situations, Front Assist should be switched off for safety
reasons.
When the vehicle is being towed away.
When the vehicle is on a rolling test bench.
If an unfounded warning or a system action was taken.
When on a truck, or a car ferry service or similar.
Malfunctions
Read and observe and on page 189 first.
If the system is not available, an appropriate message appears in the display of
the instrument cluster.
Sensor covered / dirty
If the sensor is dirty or covered, a message indicating that there is no sensor
view appears. Clean the sensor cover or remove the obstacle » Fig. 217 on
page 174.
System unavailable
If the system is unavailable, a message concerning the unavailability appears.
Stop the vehicle, switch off the engine and then start it again. If the system
still is not available, seek the assistance of a specialist garage.
Fatigue detection system
The fatigue detection system (hereinafter simply the system) advises the driv-
er to take a break from driving when driver fatigue can be detected based on
the driver's steering behaviour.
The system evaluates the steering behaviour at speeds of 65-200 km/h.
Conditions under which a break from driving is detected by the system
The vehicle is stopped and the ignition switched off.
The vehicle is stopped, the seat belt removed and the driver's door opened.
The vehicle is stopped for more than 15 minutes.
If none of these conditions are met or if the driving style is not changed, the
system recommends a driving break again after 15 minutes.
191
Assist systems
The system can be activated/deactivated in Infotainment menu

Driv-
er assistance
.
Pause recommendation
The icon appears and the following message for a few seconds in the display
of the instrument cluster and a message about the detected fatigue. An au-
dible signal is also emitted.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
For the driving ability is always the driver's responsibility. Never drive if
you feel tired.
The system may not detect all cases where a break is needed.
Therefore, take regular, sufficient breaks during long trips.
There will be no system warning during the so-called micro-sleep.
Note
In some situations, the system can evaluate the steering behaviour incorrect-
ly and therefore falsely display a break recommendation.
The system is designed primarily for use on motorways.
Tyre pressure monitoring
Introduction
The tyre pressure monitoring function (hereinafter known as "system") moni-
tors the tyre pressure while driving.
If the tyre inflation pressure changes, the warning light lights up in the in-
strument cluster and an audible signal is heard » page 41.
The system can only function properly if the tyres have the prescribed tyre
pressure and this pressure values are stored in the system.
The tyre pressure valuesare always stored in the system, if one of the fol-
lowing events is present.
Change of tyre pressure values.
Change one or more wheels.
Change in position of a wheel on the vehicle.
The warning light in the instrument cluster.
WARNING
The general information relating to the use of assistance systems must be
observed » page 174, in section Introduction.
The correct tyre pressure values is always the driver's responsibility. The
tyre pressure should be checked regularly » page 216.
The system cannot warn in case of very rapid loss of tyre pressure, e.g. in
the event of a sudden puncture.
Before storing the tyre pressures they must be inflated to the specified
inflation pressure » page 216. If incorrect pressure values are storedthe
system may not warn even with a tyre pressure that is too low.
CAUTION
To ensure proper system function, the tyre pressure values must be stored ev-
ery 10,000 km or 1x a year.
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotainment display
Fig. 240
Button for storing / Example of
screen display: it indicates a
front left tyre pressure change
Read and observe and on page 192 first.
Procedure for storing the tyre pressure values
Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure.
Turn on the ignition and switch on Infotainment.
In the Infotainment, in menu

, tap in the function surface Tap →
Vehicle
status
.
Use the function interfaces
to select menu item Tyre Press. Loss Indica-
tor.
Tap the function surface  » Fig. 240.
In addition, follow the instructions that appear on the screen.
192
Driving
A message on the screen informs you about the storage of the tyre pressure
values.
Note
When a warning light in the instrument cluster appears, the affected tyre
can be displayed on the infotainment » Fig. 240.
Storing the tire pressure values using the key
Fig. 241
Button for storing the pressure
values
Read and observe and on page 192 first.
Inflate all of the tyres to the specified inflation pressure.
Switch on the ignition.
Press the symbol key » Fig. 241 on the button and hold.
The warning light
in the instrument cluster illuminates.
An acoustic signal sounds and the warning light goes out, indicating that the
tyre pressure values have been stored.
Release the symbol key .
Towing device and trailer
Hitch
Introduction
The maximum trailer load is dependent on the engine and the vehicle equip-
ment. The valid specification for your vehicle can be found in the technical ve-
hicle documentation, the declaration of conformity (the so-called COC docu-
ment) or at a ŠKODA partner.
Other data (e.g. shown onthe nameplate of the hitch) on provides information
about the test values of the device .
WARNING
Check that the ball head is seated correctly and is secured in the mount-
ing recess before starting any journey.
When the knee-joint bar is not used and properly secured in the receiving
shaft, it is damaged or incomplete, this must not be used - there is a risk of
an accident.
Do not modify or adapt the towing equipment in any way.
Keep the mounting recess of the towing equipment clean at all times.
Such dirt prevents the ball head from being attached securely.
193
Towing device and trailer
Description
Fig. 242 Carrier for the towing device / tow bar
Read and observe on page 193 first.
The tow bar is detachable and is located in the storage compartment for the
spare wheel.
Support for the towing device and tow bar » Fig. 242
Cover for the mounting recess
Mounting recess
Dust cap
Ball head
Operating lever
Lock cap
Release pin
Key
Locking ball
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Adjusting the ready position
Fig. 243 Remove cap from the lock / insert key into the lock
Fig. 244
Lock unlock / press release bolt and lever and push
Read and observe on page 193 first.
The tow bar can only be fitted if it is in the ready position.
Grip the tow bar below the protective cap.
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 243.
Insert the key
B
into the lock in the direction of arrow
2
, so that its green
marker points upward.
Turn key
B
in the direction of arrow
3
so that the red marking is pointing
upwards » Fig. 244.
Push in the release bolt
C
in the direction of arrow
4
until it stops and si-
multaneously press the operating lever
D
in the direction of arrow
5
until it
stops.
The operating lever
D
remains locked in this position.
194
Driving
Check the setting of the standby position
Fig. 245
Ready position
Read and observe on page 193 first.
Correctly adjusted standby position » Fig. 245
The operating lever
A
is locked in the lower position.
The release bolts
B
can be moved.
The red mark on the key
C
is pointing upwards.
In the ready position, the key cannot be removed or turned into a different po-
sition. The tow bar is thus set ready for installation.
Assembling the bar ball - Step 1
Fig. 246
Removing the cap: on the rear bumper / for the receiving shaft
Fig. 247 Insert ball rod / trigger bolt in the extended state
Read and observe on page 193 first.
Preparing installation
Remove the cover cap
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 246using the on-
board tool clamp for pulling off the wheel trims.
Remove cover cap
B
in the direction of arrow
2
» .
Fitting
Grip the tow bar from underneath » Fig. 247 and insert into the mounting
recess in arrow direction
3
until you hear it click into place » .
The operating lever
C
automatically turns upwards in the direction of arrow
4
and the release pin
D
pops out (both its red and green parts are visible)
»
.
If the operating lever
C
does not turn automatically, or if the release pin
D
does not pop out, remove the tow bar from the mounting recess by turning
the operating lever
C
downwards as far as it can go. Clean the contact surfa-
ces on the tow bar and the mounting recess.
WARNING
Carefully remove the cap for the mounting recess
B
- there is a risk of
hand injury.
Keep your hands outside the operating lever's range of motion when at-
taching the ball head – there is a risk of finger injury.
Never attempt to pull the operating lever upwards forcibly to turn the
key. Doing so would mean the ball head is not attached correctly.
195
Towing device and trailer
Assembling the bar ball - Step 2
Fig. 248 Secure the lock and remove key / place cap on lock
Read and observe on page 193 first.
Turn key
A
in the direction of arrow
1
so that the green marking is pointing
upwards » Fig. 248.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Fit the cap
B
on the lock in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Check that the tow bar is securely attached » page 196.
WARNING
After fitting the tow bar, always secure the lock and remove the key. The
tow bar must not be operated with the key inserted.
Check proper fitting
Fig. 249
Correctly secured ball head
Read and observe on page 193 first.
Correctly secured tow bar » Fig. 249
The tow bar must sit securely in the receiving shaft. There must be no play
when “shaken” roughly.
Operating lever
A
is located as far up as possible.
The release pin
B
is completely exposed (both its red and green parts are
visible).
The key is removed and the cap
C
attached to the lock.
Removing the bar ball - Step 1
Fig. 250
Remove the cap from the lock
Fig. 251
Insert the key into the lock / unlock the lock
Read and observe on page 193 first.
No trailer or other accessory is connected to the tow bar. We recommend
putting the protective cover onto the ball head before removing the tow bar.
Remove the cover
A
from the lock in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 250.
196
Driving
Insert the key
B
into the lock in the direction of arrow
2
, so that its green
marker points upward » Fig. 251.
Turn the key in the direction of arrow
3
so that the red marking points up-
wards.
Removing the bar ball - Step 2
Fig. 252
Release tow bar
Read and observe on page 193 first.
Removing
Grasp the tow bar from below » Fig. 252.
Push in the release bolt
A
in the direction of arrow
1
until it stops and si-
multaneously press the operating lever
B
in the direction of arrow
2
until it
stops.
The ball head is released in this position and falls freely into the hand. If it does
not fall freely into the hand, use your other hand to push it upwards.
Subsequent steps
Insert the cover
B
» Fig. 246 on page 195in the opposite direction to arrow
2
.
Fix the cap
A
» Fig. 246 on page 195 aligning it with “check mark” in the
lower bumper area.
Push the cap in first on the left and right and then at the top.
If the operating lever
B
is held firm and not pushed downwards as far as it can
go, it will go back up after the ball head is removed and will not latch into the
ready position. The knee-joint bar will then need to be brought into this posi-
tion before the next time it is installed» page 194, Adjusting the ready position.
The knee-joint bar must be cleaned before storing in the box with the vehicle
tool always.
WARNING
Never allow the ball head to remain unsecured in the boot. This can cause
damage to the boot upon sudden braking, and could put the safety of the
occupants at risk.
CAUTION
Place the tow bar in the standby position, with the key upwards, and store in
the box - otherwise there is a risk of damage to the key!
Do not use excessive force when handling the operating lever (e.g. do not
step on it).
Vertical load with mounted accessories
Read and observe on page 193 first.
When using the accessories (e.g. bicycle carrier), the maximum length and the
permissible total weight including load must be considered.
The maximum length of the mounted accessories (from the ball of the towing
device) is 70 cm .
The permissible total weight of the installed accessories, including load, cor-
responds to the maximum trailer load on trailers, but must not exceed 50 kg.
This value applies when the centre of gravity of the load is a maximum of 30
cm from the ball head of the tow bar.
As the distance of the centre gravity of the load from the ball head of the
towing device increases, the permissible total weight of the accessory, in-
cluding the load, decreases (e.g. at a distance of 60 cm from the ball head,
the permissible weight decreases approximately by half).
CAUTION
Never exceed the permissible total weight of the accessories incl. load and
maximum length of the accessories – There is a risk of damage to the towing
device.
Note
We recommend that you use the accessories from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries.
197
Towing device and trailer
Using hitch
Trailer (accessory) connect and disconnect
Fig. 253
Housing of the 13 pin socket,
safety eyelet
Connecting / disconnecting
Install the tow bar and the remove the protective cap
3
» Fig. 242 on
page 194.
Place the trailer (the accessory) onto the tow ball.
Plug the trailer (accessory) connector into the 13-pin socket
A
» Fig. 253. (If
the trailer / accessories have a 7-pin connector, use a corresponding reduc-
tion piece from the ŠKODA Original Accessories).
Suspend the breakaway cable of the trailer at the safety eyelet
B
(the
breakaway cable must sag in all trailer settings in view of the vehicle).
Uncoupling takes place in reverse order.
Exterior mirrors
You should have additional exterior mirrors fitted if you are not able to see the
traffic behind the trailer using the standard rear-view mirrors.
Headlights
The front of the vehicle may lift up when a trailer (accessory) is being towed
and the headlights may dazzle other road users. Set the range of the headlights
» page 61.
Power supply of the trailer / accessory power system
In the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accessory), the
trailer (accessories) is supplied with power from the vehicle (with ignition
switched on and off).
With the engine switched off, the vehicle battery is discharged by the connec-
ted consumers.
At low charge state of the vehicle battery, the power supply to the trailer (ac-
cessories) is interrupted.
WARNING
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories)
may result in an accident or serious injury from electrical shock.
Do not make any adjustments to the electrical installation of the vehicle
and the trailer (accessories) - risk of an accident or serious injury from elec-
trical shock.
After the electrical connection between the vehicle and trailer (accesso-
ry) the trailer / accessory lights should be checked for function.
Never use the securing eye to tow - The is a risk of accident!
CAUTION
An improperly connected electrical installation of the trailer (accessories) can
lead to the inoperability of the vehicle electronics.
The total power consumption of all the connected loads to the trailer power
supply must not exceed 350 watts, otherwise there is a risk of damage to the
electrical system of the vehicle.
Loading a trailer
Correct the tyre inflation pressure on the vehicle for “full load”» page 216.
Distribution of the cargo
Distribute the cargo in the trailer in such a way that heavy items are located as
close to the trailer axle as possible. Secure the load from slipping.
The distribution of the weight is very poor if your vehicle is unladen and the
trailer is laden. Drive with particular caution if you cannot avoid driving with
this combination.
WARNING
An unsecured load can adversely affect stability and driving safety signifi-
cantly - there is a risk of accident!
Trailer load
The permissible trailer load must not be exceeded under any circumstances.
198
Driving
Permissible trailer load - Fabia
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer weight, unbraked (kg)
1.0 l/44 kW MPI MG 800 540
1.0 ltr./55 kW MPI MG 800 540
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI MG 1000 550
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI
MG 1100 560
DSG 1100 570
1.6 ltr./66 kW MPI MG 1100 540
1.6 ltr./81 kW MPI AG 1100 560
1.4 ltr./55 kW TDI CR MG 1000 580
1.4 ltr./66 kW TDI CR
MG 1100 580
DSG 1100 590
1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI CR MG 1100 590
Permissible trailer load - Fabia Combi
Engine Transmission
Permissible trailer weight, braked (kg)
with gradients up to 12%.
Permissible trailer weight, unbraked (kg)
1.0 ltr./55 kW MPI
MG (EU6) 800 550
MG (EU4) 800 540
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI MG 1000 560
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI
MG 1100 570
DSG 1100 590
1.6 ltr./66 kW MPI MG 1100 550
1.6 ltr./81 kW MPI AG 1100 570
1.4 ltr./55 kW TDI CR MG 1000 590
1.4 ltr./66 kW TDI CR
MG 1100 590
DSG 1100 600
1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI CR MG 1100 600
199
Towing device and trailer
Towing a trailer
Driving speed
For safety reasons, do not drive with the trailer any faster than 100 km/h
(when the towing vehicle is a passenger car of category M1) or 80 km/h (when
the towing vehicle is a truck of category N1).
Immediately reduce your speed as soon as even the slightest swaying of the
trailer is detected. Never attempt to stop the trailer from “swaying” by accel-
erating.
Brakes
Apply the brakes in good time! If the trailer is fitted with a trailer brake, apply
the brakes gently at first, then brake firmly. This will avoid brake jolts resulting
from the trailer wheels locking.
On downhill sections shift down a gear in good time to also use the engine as a
brake.
WARNING
Always drive particularly carefully with the trailer.
CAUTION
With frequent towing, the vehicle is excessively loaded so this must also be
checked between service intervals.
Anti-theft alarm system
The alarm is triggered if, with a vehicle with activated anti-theft alarm (herein-
after only warning system), the electrical connection to the trailer (accessory)
is interrupted.
Always switch off the anti-theft alarm system before a trailer (accessory) is
coupled or uncoupled » page 57.
Conditions for including a trailer (accessory) in the anti-theft alarm system.
The vehicle is factory-fitted with an anti-theft alarm system and a towing
device.
The trailer (accessory) is electrically connected to the towing vehicle by
means of the trailer socket.
The electrical system of the vehicle and trailer (accessory) is functional.
The vehicle is locked and the anti-theft alarm system is activated.
The trailer (accessory) is not equipped with LED taillights.
200
Driving
General Maintenance
Care and maintenance
Service work, adjustments and technical alterations
Introduction
The instructions and guidelines from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. must be observed
when using accessories or carrying out any modifications, repairs or technical
alterations to your vehicle.
Compliance with these guidelines and instructions is in the interest of the
roadworthiness and technical condition of your vehicle.
WARNING
Adjustments, repairs and technical changes to the vehicle should only be
carried out by a specialist. Work carried out incorrectly (including work on
the electronic components and their software) can result in malfunctions -
there is a risk of accident and, potentially, increased wear on parts!
We recommend that you use only ŠKODA Original Accessories and ŠKO-
DA Original Parts which have been expressly approved for use on your ve-
hicle. Reliability, safety and suitability for your vehicle are guaranteed with
these.
Do not use any products which have not been approved by ŠKODA AU-
TO, even though these may be products with a type approval or which have
been approved by a nationally recognised testing laboratory.
Vehicle operating under different weather conditions
Read and observe on page 201 first.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with the
intended weather conditions, you should contact a ŠKODA partner. He or she
will advise you if certain precautions need to be taken to ensure the full func-
tioning of the vehicle or to prevent damage (e.g. coolant, changing the battery
or similar).
ŠKODA service partner
Read and observe on page 201 first.
All ŠKODA service partners work according to the instructions and guidelines
from ŠKODA AUTO a.s. All service and repair work is therefore carried out on
time and to the appropriate quality. Adhering to these instructions and guide-
lines helps ensure road safety and helps keep your vehicle in a good technical
condition.
We therefore advise you to have all modifications, repairs and technical altera-
tions to your vehicle carried out by a ŠKODA Service Partner.
ŠKODA Original parts
Read and observe
on page 201 first.
We recommend the use of ŠKODA Genuine Parts for your vehicle, as these
parts are approved by ŠKODA AUTO. These parts comply wholly with ŠKODA
AUTO regulations and are identical to the parts used in series production.
ŠKODA AUTO is able to warrant the safety, suitability, and long life of these
products.
ŠKODA service partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA original parts for a
period of 2 years after sale in accordance with materials defect liability under
the law unless otherwise agreed in the purchase agreement.
ŠKODA Original accessories
Read and observe on page 201 first.
You should note the following if you wish to fit accessories to your vehicle:
We recommend that you use ŠKODA Genuine Accessories in your vehicle.
ŠKODA AUTO has selected these accessories to ensure that they are reliable,
safe and suitable for your particular vehicle. Although we constantly monitor
the market, we are not able to assess or vouch the suitability of other products
for your vehicle, despite the fact that some products may have operational ap-
proval or may have been approved by a nationally recognised testing laborato-
ry.
201
Care and maintenance
ŠKODA Service Partners are liable for any defects in ŠKODA Genuine Parts for
a period of 2 years after installation or delivery in accordance with materials
defect liability legislation, unless otherwise agreed in the purchase contract or
in any other agreements.
Spoiler
Read and observe on page 201 first.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with a Genuine Accessories spoiler on the front
bumper in combination with the spoiler on the boot lid, the following in-
structions must be observed - otherwise there is a risk of accidents and se-
rious injuries!
The vehicle can only be equipped with a spoiler on the front bumper in
combination with the corresponding spoiler on the boot lid.
A Genuine Accessories spoiler cannot be fitted to the front bumper ei-
ther on its own (without a spoiler on the boot lid) or in combination with an
unsuitable spoiler on the boot lid.
We recommend that you consult the ŠKODA Service Partner for any re-
pairs to or replacement, addition or removal of spoilers.
Improperly conducted work on the spoilers of your vehicle may result in
malfunction.
Component protection
Read and observe on page 201 first.
Some electronic vehicle components (such as the instrument cluster) are fac-
tory-equipped with component protection. This ensures the functional limita-
tion of these components in a non-legitimate installation in another vehicle
(e.g. after a theft) or operation outside the vehicle.
Airbags
Read and observe on page 201 first.
WARNING
Adjustments, repairs and modifications which have been carried out un-
professionally can cause damage, operational faults, and can also seriously
impair the effectiveness of airbag system – there is the risk of an accident
and fatal injury.
A change to the vehicle's wheel suspension, including the use of non-ap-
proved wheels and tire combinations, can impair the functioning of the air-
bag system - risk of accident and fatal injury!
WARNING
No changes may be made to airbag system components, the front bump-
er and the bodywork.
Any work on the airbag system including the installation and removal of
system components due to other repair work (e.g. removal of the steering
wheel) must only be carried out by a specialist garage.
Do not manipulate individual parts of the airbag system, as this might re-
sult in the airbag being deployed.
If the airbag has been deployed, the airbag system must be replaced.
WARNING
The airbag system operates using pressure sensors located in the front
doors. For this reason, no adjustments may be carried out to the doors or
door panels (e.g. installation of additional loudspeakers). Resulting damage
can impair the functioning of the airbag system - risk of accidents and fatal
injuries! The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
Any work on the front doors and their door panels must be carried out by
a specialist garage.
Never drive the vehicle with the inner door panels removed or with open-
ings in the panelling.
Cleaning and care
Introduction
Regular and thorough care helps to retain the value of your vehicle.
202
General Maintenance
The instructions for use on the packaging must be observed when using care
products. We recommend that you use ŠKODA Original Accessories care
products.
WARNING
Vehicle care products may be harmful to your health if not used according
to the instructions.
Always keep the vehicle care products safe from people who are not
completely independent, e.g. children - There is a danger of poisoning!
CAUTION
Do not use any insect sponges, kitchen scrubbers or similar cleaning prod-
ucts – there is a risk of damaging the paintwork finish.
Do not use aggressive cleaning agents or chemical solvents - danger of dam-
aging the surface to be cleaned.
Note
We recommend that the vehicle is cleaned and maintained at a ŠKODA service
partner.
Car washing
Read and observe and on page 203 first.
The best way to protect your vehicle against harmful environmental influences
is frequent washing.
The longer insect residues, bird droppings, road salt and other aggressive de-
posits remain adhering to your vehicle, the more detrimental their destructive
effect can be. High temperatures, such as those caused by intensive sun's rays,
accentuate this caustic effect.
It is also essential to thoroughly clean the underside of the vehicle at the end
of the winter.
Washing by hand
Wash the vehicle from top to bottom, with a soft sponge or a wash mitt and
plenty of water, and, if necessary, with the appropriate detergents. Wash out
the sponge or washing glove thoroughly at short intervals.
For wheels, door sills and lower areas of the vehicle use a different sponge.
Give the vehicle a good rinse after washing it and dry it off using a chamois
leather.
Automatic Car Washes
The usual precautionary measures must be taken before washing the vehicle
(e.g. closing the windows and the tilt/slide roof etc.).
If your vehicle is fitted with any special attached parts (e.g. spoiler, roof rack
system, two-way radio aerial etc.) it is best to consult the operator of the car
wash system beforehand.
After an automatic wash with wax treatment, the wiper blades should be
cleaned with cleaning agents specially designed for the purpose, and then de-
greased.
Pressure Washers
When washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner, the instructions for
use of the equipment must be observed. This particularly applies to instruc-
tions regarding the pressure and spraying distance from the vehicle surface.
WARNING
Washing your vehicle in the winter: Water and ice in the brake system can
affect the braking efficiency – there is the risk of an accident.
Take care when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel wells -
there is a risk of injury from sharp metal parts!
CAUTION
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight, do not exert pressure on the body
while washing. The temperature of the washing water should be no more than
60 °C max. - otherwise there is a risk of damaging the vehicle paint.
Before driving through a car wash fold in the exterior mirrors - There is a risk
of damage.
For vehicles with a roof antenna, the antenna rod should be unscrewed be-
fore driving through a car wash - there is a risk of damage.
CAUTION
Washing the vehicle with high-pressure cleaners
Do not wash the foils using pressure washers - there is a risk of damage.
203
Care and maintenance
Do not aim the water jet directly at the lock cylinders or the door or opening
joints when washing the vehicle in the winter – there is a risk of freezing.
During cleaning, always keep a sufficiently large spraying distance in particu-
lar from the parking sensors, the reversing camera lens, the external decorative
and protective plastic parts (e.g. roof racks, spoilers, protective strips) and oth-
er vehicle parts made of non-metallic materials, such as rubber hoses or insula-
tion materials – otherwise there is a risk of damage.
Exterior car care
Read and observe and on page 203 first.
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Paint
Spilled fuel
Clear water, cloth, (clean as soon as
possible)
No water drop-
lets form on the
paint
Use hard wax preserve (at least twice a
year), apply wax to clean and dry body
Paint has gone
matt
Use polish, then wax (if the polish does
not contain any preservative ingredi-
ents)
Plastic parts Soiling
Clear water, cloth / sponge, possibly
cleaners provided for this purpose
Chrome
and anodised
parts
Soiling
clear water, cloth, possibly cleaners
provided for this purpose, clean then
polish with a soft dry cloth
Films Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Windows
and door mirrors
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
wipe specifically for that purpose
Head / tail lights Soiling soft sponge and mild soap solution
a)
Reversing camera
Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
soft cloth
Snow/ice Hand brush / de-icer
Door lock cylin-
ders
Snow/ice
De-icing fluid specifically for that pur-
pose
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Wipers / wiper
blades
Soiling Windscreen cleaner, sponge or cloth
Wheels Soiling
Clear water, then apply appropriate
substance
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
The jack is maintenance-free. If necessary, the moving parts of the jack should
be lubricated with a suitable lubricant.
The towing device is maintenance-free. Coat the ball head of the towing de-
vice with a suitable grease whenever necessary.
Protection of cavities
All the cavities of your vehicle which are at risk from corrosion are protected
by a layer of long-lasting protective wax applied in the factory.
If any small amount of wax flow out of the cavities at high temperatures, these
must be removed with a plastic scraper and the stains cleaned using a petrole-
um cleaner.
Underbody
The underside of your vehicle is already permanently protected by the factory
against chemical and mechanical influences.
We recommend having the protective coating — preferably before the begin-
ning of winter and at the end of winter.
Product life of the films
Environmental influences (e.g. sunlight, humidity, air pollution, rockfall) affect
the life of the films. The films age and become brittle, which is normal; this
shall not be considered a fault.
The sunlight may also affect the depth of the film colour.
When transporting a load on the roof rack (e.g. roof box, etc.), there is an in-
creased risk of film damage (e.g. due to rockfall from the secured load).
CAUTION
Vehicle paint
Repair damaged areas as soon as possible.
Matt-painted parts should not be treated with polishes or hard waxes.
204
General Maintenance
Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of paint scratches.
Do not apply polish to door seals or window guides.
Plastic parts
Do not use paint polish.
Chromed and anodised parts
Do not polish in a dusty environment - risk of surface scratches.
Films
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of film
damage.
Do not use dirty cloths or sponges for cleaning.
Do not use a scraper or other means to remove ice and snow.
Do not polish the films
Do not use a high pressure cleaner on the films.
Rubber seals
Do not treat the door seals and window guides deal with anything - the
protective varnish coating could be damaged.
Windows and door mirrors
Do not clean the insides of the windows/mirrors with sharp objects - risk of
damage to the filaments or the antenna.
Do not use a cloth which has been used to polish the body - this could dirty
the window and impair visibility.
Head / tail lights
Do not wipe head/tail lamps dry, do not use any sharp objects - risk of dam-
age to the protective coating and cracks forming on the headlamp glass cov-
ers.
Reversing camera
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of
camera damage.
Do not remove snow / ice with warm / hot water.
To wash, never use a pressure washer or steam jet.
For cleaning, do not use abrasive cleaners.
Door lock cylinders
Make sure that as little water as possible gets into the locking cylinder
when washing the vehicle - there is a risk of freezing the lock cylinder!
Wheels
Heavy soiling of the wheels can affect the balance of the wheels - the re-
sult can be a vibration, which can cause premature wear of the steering.
Removing snow and ice from the windscreens
Fig. 254
Installation location of the ice
scraper, removing the scraper
Read and observe and on page 203 first.
Use a plastic ice scraper for removing snow and ice from the windows and
mirrors. This can be on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Open the fuel filler flap and slide the scraper in the direction of arrow
» Fig. 254.
CAUTION
Move the scraper in one direction only, otherwise there is a risk of damage to
the glass surface.
Do not remove snow / ice on the surface that is soiled (e.g. pea gravel, sand,
road salt) - there is a risk of damaging the surface.
Remove snow / ice carefully, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the labels
that have been fitted to the vehicle by the factory.
205
Care and maintenance
Caring for the interior
Read and observe and on page 203 first.
Vehicle compo-
nents
Circumstances Remedy
Natural leather /
Faux leather /
Alcantara
®
/
Material
Dust, surface
soiling
Vacuum cleaner
Soiling (fresh)
Water, slightly damp cotton / wool
cloth, if necessary, mild soap solution
a)
,
then wipe off with a soft cloth
Stubborn stains Cleaning fluid specifically for this task
Care (natural
leather)
Treat the leather periodically with a
leather protecting fluid / use a care
cream with light blocker and impregna-
tion after each cleaning
Care (Alcan-
tara
®
/ material)
Remove stubborn hair using a “cleaning
glove”
Remove pills from materials with a
brush
Plastic parts Soiling
Water, slightly damp cloth or sponge, if
necessary cleaners specifically for this
purpose
Windows Soiling
Wash with clean water and dry with a
wipe specifically for that purpose
Covers on electri-
cally heated seats
Soiling Cleaners specifically for this purpose
Seat belts » Soiling soft cloth and mild soap solution
a)
a)
A mild soap solution consisting of 2 tablespoons of natural soap to 1 litre of lukewarm water.
WARNING
Never clean the seat belts chemically as chemical cleaning products could
destroy the fabric.
Air fresheners and scents can be hazardous to heath when the tempera-
ture inside the vehicle is high.
CAUTION
Natural leather / Faux leather / Alcantara
®
/ material
Avoid standing for lengthy periods in bright sunlight, and protect the mate-
rials by covering to prevent them from fading.
Remove fresh stains (e.g. from pens, lipstick, shoe polish and similar) as
soon as possible.
Ensure that no part of the leather is soaked through during cleaning and
that no water gets into the seams - risk of damaging the leather!
Do not clean the roof panelling with a brush – risk of damage to the surface
of the panelling.
Do not use leather cleaners, floor wax, shoe cream, stain remover or similar
agents on Alcantara
®
seat upholstery.
Some clothing fabrics (e.g. dark denim) do not have sufficient colour fast-
ness - this could lead to clearly visible discolouration on the upholstery. This
is not a defect in the fabric.
Sharp objects on garments (e.g. zips, rivets, sharp- edged belts) can dam-
age the upholstery fabrics in the vehicle. Such damage will not be recognised
as a justified complaint.
Plastic parts
Do not attach scents or air fresheners to the dash panel – risk of damage to
the dash panel.
Windows
Do not attach any stickers to the filaments or glass antenna - there is risk
of damage.
Covers on electrically heated seats
Do not clean either with water or with other liquids - risk of damage to the
heating system.
Do not dry by switching on the heating.
Seat belts
After cleaning the belts, allow them to dry before retracting them.
Note
During vehicle use, some minor changes may become visible on the leather
and Alcantara
®
(due to e.g. folds, discolouration).
206
General Maintenance
Inspecting and replenishing
Fuel
Introduction
Fig. 255
Stickers showing the prescribed
fuel
The correct fuel for your vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 255.
The fuel tank has a capacity of about 45 litres, including a reserve of approx.
7 litres.
WARNING
The fuel and fuel vapours are explosive - risk to life!
CAUTION
Never drive until the fuel tank is completely empty! Irregular supply of fuel
can cause misfiring, which can result in damage to parts of the engine and the
exhaust system.
Immediately remove any fuel that has spilled onto the vehicle's paintwork –
risk of paint damage.
If you would like to operate your vehicle in countries other than those with
the intended weather conditions, please contact a ŠKODA partner. They will
tell you whether the fuel specified by the manufacturer is offered in that coun-
try and/or whether the manufacturer will sanction operating the vehicle with
another fuel.
Refuelling with petrol and diesel
Fig. 256 Open fuel filler flap / unscrew tank cap / place the tank cap on
the fuel filler flap
Read and observe
and on page 207 first.
Perform the refuelling under the following conditions.
The vehicle is unlocked.
The ignition is switched off.
Press the fuel filler flap in direction of arrow
1
and fold in the direction of
arrow
2
» Fig. 256.
Unscrew the tank cap in the direction of arrow
3
.
Remove the tank cap and place on top of the fuel filler flap in direction of ar-
row
4
.
Insert the pump nozzle into the fuel filler tube as far as it will go.
The fuel tank is full as soon as the pump nozzle switches off for the first time.
Do not continue refuelling.
Remove the pump nozzle from the fuel filler neck and put it back in the
pump.
Place the filler cap onto the fuel filler neck and turn it in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow until it securely engages
3
.
Close the fuel filler flap until it clicks into place.
Unleaded petrol
Read and observe and on page 207 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 255 on page 207.
207
Inspecting and replenishing
The vehicle can only be operated with unleaded petrol containing a maximum
of 10% bioethanol (E10).
Unleaded petrol must correspond to European Standard EN 228 (in Germany
DIN 51626-1 or E10 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95 and 91 or
DIN 51626-2 or E5 for unleaded petrol with octane number 95).
Unleaded petrol 95/91 or 92 or 93 RON/ROZ
We recommend using petrol 95 RON.
Optionally, the petrol 91, 92 or 93 RON can be used (slight power loss, a slight-
ly increased fuel consumption).
Specified petrol is unleaded, min. 95 RON / ROZ
Use at least 95 ROZ petrol.
In an emergency, 91, 92 or 93 ROZ petrol can be used (slight loss of power,
slightly increased fuel consumption) » .
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of dam-
age to the engine and to the exhaust system.
When petrol with a lower than the prescribed octane is used, only continue
driving at mid-range engine speeds and with minimal strain on the engine. Re-
fuel using petrol of the prescribed octane number as soon as possible.
Lower than 91 octane petrol should not be used, even in an emergency!
If a fuel other than unleaded fuel which complies to the above mentioned
standards (e.g. leaded petrol) is put in the tank by mistake, do not start the en-
gine or switch on the ignition.
CAUTION
Petrol additions (additives)
Unleaded petrol in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
conditions for a smooth running engine. We therefore do not recommend mix-
ing fuel additives into the petrol - risk of engine damage or damage to the ex-
haust system.
The following additives may not be used - risk of engine damage or dam-
age to the exhaust system!
Additives with metal components (metallic additives), in particular with
manganese and iron content.
Fuels with metallic content (e.g. LRP - lead replacement petrol).
Note
Unleaded petrol that has a higher octane number than that required by the
engine can be used without limitations.
On vehicles with prescribed unleaded petrol 95/91, 92 or 93 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON does not result in a noticea-
ble power increase or a lower fuel consumption.
On vehicles using the prescribed unleaded petrol of min. 95 RON, the use of
petrol with a higher octane number than 95 RON can lead to an increase in
power and reduction in fuel consumption.
Diesel fuel
Read and observe and on page 207 first.
The correct fuel for the vehicle is specified on the inside of the fuel filler flap
» Fig. 255 on page 207.
Your vehicle can only be operated with diesel fuel that complies with Europe-
an Standard EN 590 (also standard DIN 51628 in Germany, standard
ÖNORM C 1590 in Austria, GOST R 52368-2005/EN 590:2004 in Russia).
The diesel fuel may contain a maximum of 7% biodiesel (B7 - In Germany in
accordance with DIN 52638, in Austria ÖNORM C 1590, in France EN 590).
Operating under different weather conditions
Use only diesel in accordance with the current or expected weather condi-
tions. Ask the petrol station personnel whether the diesel fuel offered corre-
sponds to these conditions.
CAUTION
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is a risk of dam-
age to the engine and to the exhaust system.
If a different fuel other than diesel fuel, which complies to the above men-
tioned standards (e.g. petrol) is used, do not start the engine or switch on the
ignition!
The biofuel RME must not be used!
208
General Maintenance
CAUTION
Diesel fuel additives
The diesel fuel in accordance with the prescribed standards meets all the
conditions for a smooth running engine. Therefore, we recommend that you
do not add any fuel additives to the diesel - - there is a risk of engine damage
or damage to the exhaust system.
Engine compartment
Introduction
WARNING
Never cover the engine with additional insulation material (e.g. with a blan-
ket) – risk of fire.
WARNING
When working in the engine compartment, the following instructions must
be observed - otherwise risk of injury or fire. The engine compartment of
your car is a hazardous area.
WARNING
Instructions before beginning work in the engine compartment
Stop the engine and remove the ignition key, on vehicles with the KESSY
system, open the driver's door.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
On vehicles with manual transmission, move the lever to the neutral po-
sition. For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in
the P position.
Allow the engine to cool.
Never open the bonnet if you can see steam or coolant flowing out of the
engine compartment – risk of scalding! Wait until the steam or coolant has
stopped escaping.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine room
Keep everyone away from the engine compartment.
Do not touch any hot engine parts – there is a risk of burns.
WARNING (Continued)
Never touch the radiator fan. The radiator fan may still turn suddenly
about 10 minutes after switching off the ignition!
Do not smoke in the vicinity of the engine and avoid the use of open
flames or sparks.
Do not leave any items (e.g. cleaning cloths or tools) in the engine com-
partment. There is a fire hazard and the risk of engine damage.
Read the information and warning instructions on the fluid containers.
WARNING
Information for working in the engine compartment with the engine run-
ning
If it is necessary to work on the engine with the engine running, beware
of rotating engine parts and electrical plants - they can be fatal!
Never touch the electric wiring on the ignition system.
Avoid short circuits in the electrical system, particularly on the vehicle's
battery.
CAUTION
Only refill using fluids with the proper specification - risk of damage to the ve-
hicle!
Note
Fluids with the proper specifications can be purchased from the ŠKODA
Original Accessories or from the ŠKODA Genuine Parts ranges.
We recommend you have the operating fluids replaced by a specialist ga-
rage.
209
Inspecting and replenishing
Opening and closing the bonnet
Fig. 257 Opening the bonnet
Read and observe and on page 209 first.
Open flap
Ensure that the windscreen wipers are not raised away from the windscreen
- risk of damage to the bonnet.
Open the front door and pull the release lever below the dash panel in the
direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 257.
Press the release lever in the direction of arrow
2
and the bonnet will be un-
locked.
Raise the bonnet in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Remove the lid prop in the direction of arrow
4
from the holder.
Secure the open flap inserting the end of the post into the opening in the di-
rection of arrow
5
.
Close the flap
Lift the bonnet.
Decouple the bonnet support and press into the holder designed to hold it.
Drop down the bonnet lid from a height of about 20 cm applying light pres-
sure until it clicks safely into place.
WARNING
Never drive with the bonnet lid not properly closed - risk of accident!
Make sure that when closing the bonnet, no body parts are crushed -
there is danger of injury!
CAUTION
When closing the bonnet “do not press down” - there is a risk of damaging the
bonnet.
Engine compartment overview
Fig. 258 Arrangement (example) in the engine compartment
Read and observe and on page 209 first.
Coolant expansion reservoir
212
Engine oil dipstick 211
Engine oil filler opening
211
Brake fluid reservoir
213
Vehicle battery
213
Windscreen washer fluid reservoir 211
A
B
C
D
E
F
210
General Maintenance
Windscreen washer fluid
Fig. 259
Windscreen washer fluid reser-
voir
Read and observe and on page 209 first.
The windscreen washer fluid reservoir
A
is located in the engine compart-
ment » Fig. 259.
The contents of the container is 3.5 litres, for vehicles with a headlamp clean-
ing system 5.4 litres (for some countries, both versions have container vol-
umes of 5.4 litres).
Use a suitable windscreen washer fluid for the current or expected weather
conditions. We recommend that you use windscreen washer fluid from
ŠKODA Original Accessories.
CAUTION
If the vehicle is equipped with a headlight cleaning system, then only use
windscreen washer fluid types that do not attack the polycarbonate coating of
the headlights - otherwise there is a risk of damage to headlights.
Do not remove the filter from the windscreen washer fluid reservoir when
replenishing it with liquid otherwise the liquid transportation system can be-
come contaminated, which can cause the windscreen washer system to mal-
function.
Engine oil
Specification
To find out which type of engine oil you can use for your vehicle, contact a
specialist garage.
If this oil is not available, other oils can also be refilled. To prevent engine dam-
age, a maximum of 0.5 l of engine oil with the following specifications may be
used until the next oil change:
Petrol engines: VW 504 00, VW 502 00, VW 508 00, ACEA A3/ACEA B4 or
API SN, (API SM);
Diesel engines: VW 507 00, ACEA C3 or API CJ-4.
Check and refill
Fig. 260
Dipstick variants
The engine uses up some oil, depending on driving style and operating condi-
tions (up to 0.5 l / 1 000 km). Consumption may be slightly higher than this
during the first 5 000 km.
Have the oil change carried out by a specialist garage during the inspection.
Check and refill oil under the following conditions.
The vehicle is standing on a horizontal surface.
The engine operating temperature is reached.
The engine is turned off.
Check the status
Wait a few minutes until the engine oil flows back into the sump.
Pull the dipstick out and wipe with a clean cloth.
Push the dipstick back to the stop and then pull it out again.
Read the oil level and push the dipstick back in.
The oil level must lie in range
A
» Fig. 260. If the oil level is below range
A
, oil
must be added.
Refilling
Unscrew the cap of the engine oil filler opening
C
» Fig. 258 on page 210.
Add oil of the correct specification in portions of 0.5 litres» page 211.
211
Inspecting and replenishing
Check the oil level.
Screw the lid of the engine oil filler closed carefully.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 209.
CAUTION
The oil level must never fall outside range
A
» Fig. 260 – otherwise there is a
risk of damaging the engine and the exhaust system.
If a top up with oil is not possible or the oil level is above range
A
, stop
driving! Switch off the engine and seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Do not add any additives to the engine oil - risk of engine damage.
Note
An engine oil level which is too low is shown in the instrument cluster by the
warning light illuminating and also indicated by the message.» page 44 Nev-
ertheless, we recommend checking the oil level on a regular basis using the
dipstick.
We recommend that you use oils from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Coolant
Introduction
The coolant helps to keep the engine temperature down, and consists of water
and coolant additive (with additives that protect the cooling system against
corrosion and prevent furring).
The proportion of coolant additive in the coolant must be 40 to 60 %.
The correct mix of water and coolant additive should be checked and if neces-
sary corrected by a specialist garage.
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 209.
Never open the end cover of the coolant expansion reservoir while the
engine is still warm. The cooling system is pressurised - risk of scalding or
injury from splashes of coolant!
WARNING (Continued)
To protect against the coolant splashing, cover the cap with a cloth when
opening.
Coolant and coolant fumes are harmful - avoid contact with the coolant.
If the coolant comes into contact with the eye or skin, wash the affected
area with plenty of water for several minutes, and where appropriate seek
medical help.
CAUTION
Do not cover the radiator and install any parts (e.g auxiliary lights.) in front of
the air intakes - risk of the engine overheating.
Checking and refilling
Fig. 261
Coolant expansion reservoir
Read and observe and on page 212 first.
Check and refill coolant under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is not warm (if the engine is warm the result of the check may
be wrong).
The engine is turned off.
Check the coolant level – The coolant level must lie between the marks
A
and
B
» Fig. 261. If the coolant level is below the mark
B
, top up with coolant.
Refilling
The reservoir must always contain a small amount of coolant »
.
Place a cloth over the cap of the coolant expansion tank and carefully un-
screw the cap.
Always top up using coolant of the correct specification.
212
General Maintenance
Turn the cap until it clicks into place.
The specification for the coolant is shown in the coolant expansion reservoir
» Fig. 261.
If the specified coolant is not available, then refilling only with distilled or dem-
ineralised water, and get a specialist garage to correct the water-coolant addi-
tive mix as soon as possible.
CAUTION
With an empty expansion tank top up coolant. The system could aerate - risk
of engine damage! Do not drive the vehicle. Switch off the engine and seek
assistance from a specialist garage.
Do not fill the coolant above the mark
A
» Fig. 261. The coolant could, when
heated, be expelled from the cooling system - risk of damage to the engine
parts.
If it is not possible to add coolant,stop driving! Switch off the engine and
seek assistance from a specialist garage.
A coolant additive which does not correspond to the correct specification
can reduce the anti-corrosion effect of the cooling system - risk of damage to
the cooling system and the engine.
If non-distilled (non-demineralised) water has been used to top up, the cool-
ant should be replaced by a specialist garage - risk of engine damage.
A loss of coolant indicates leaks in the cooling system - risk of engine dam-
age. Top up with coolant and then seek assistance from a specialist garage.
Note
A coolant level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and a corresponding message » page 43. We still recommend
inspecting the coolant level directly at the reservoir from time to time.
Brake fluid
Fig. 262
Brake fluid reservoir
Check the brake fluid under the following conditions.
The vehicle is on a horizontal surface.
The engine is turned off.
Checking the brake fluid level – The brake fluid level must lie between the
markings “MIN” and “MAX”» Fig. 262.
Specification - The brake fluid must comply with the standard VW 501 14
(this standard meets the requirements of FMVSS 116 DOT4).
The brake fluid change is carried out during the inspection.
WARNING
If the date of the brake fluid change is exceeded, steam bubbles could
form in the brake system during heavy braking. This can impair the efficien-
cy of the brakes – There is a risk of accident!
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 209.
If the fluid level drops significantly within a short time or if it drops below
the “MIN” » Fig. 262 mark, this may be an indication of a leak in the brake
system. Stop driving – There is a risk of an accident! Seek help from a
specialist garage.
Note
A brake fluid level which is too low is indicated in the instrument cluster by the
warning light and a corresponding message » page 38. We still recommend
inspecting the brake fluid level in the reservoir from time to time.
Vehicle battery
Introduction
The vehicle battery represents a power source for the motor to start and for
the supply of electrical consumers in the car.
213
Inspecting and replenishing
Automatic consumer shutdown - Discharge protection of the vehicle
battery
The on-board power supply system tries to prevent the vehicle battery from
discharging in the following ways when it is subject to heavy loading.
By increasing the engine idle speed.
Through the power limitation of certain loads.
By switching off some loads(heated seats, heated rear window) for as long as
necessary.
Warning symbols on the vehicle battery
Symbol Meaning
Always wear eye protection.
Battery acid is severely caustic. Always wear gloves and eye pro-
tection.
Keep fire, sparks, open flames and lit cigarettes well clear of the
vehicle battery.
When charging the vehicle battery, a highly explosive gas mixture
is produced.
Keep children away from the vehicle battery.
WARNING
Battery acid is highly corrosive - it can cause injury, chemical burns or poi-
soning! Corrosive vapours in the air irritate and damage the respiratory
tract and the eyes. The following guidelines must be observed.
Always wear protective gloves, eye and skin protection when handling
the vehicle battery.
If your eyes or skin come into contact with the electrolytic fluid, immedi-
ately wash the affected area for a few minutes long with a lot of water. Get
medical assistance without delay.
Keep the vehicle battery away from people who are not completely inde-
pendent (e.g. children).
Do not tilt the battery otherwise battery electrolyte may flow out of the
battery vent openings.
WARNING
Working on the car battery may cause explosion, fire, injury or chemical
burn! The following guidelines must be observed.
Do not smoke, use open flames or light or transmitting devices.
A discharged vehicle battery may freeze slightly. Never charge up a fro-
zen or thawed vehicle battery. Replace a frozen vehicle battery.
Never use a damaged vehicle battery.
Do not connect the battery terminals, bridging the two poles will cause a
short circuit.
CAUTION
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with the bodywork – risk
of damage to the vehicle.
Note
We recommend having all work on the vehicle battery carried out by a spe-
cialist garage.
You should replace batteries older than 5 years.
Checking the condition
Fig. 263
Vehicle battery: Electrolyte level
indicator
Read and observe and on page 214 first.
The battery condition is checked regularly by a specialist garage as part of the
inspection service.
Check the acid level
For car batteries with acid level indicator, acidity can be checked on the basis
of a colour display. In vehicle batteries with the label “AGM” there is no acid
level examination.
214
General Maintenance
Air bubbles can influence the colour of the indicator. For this reason carefully
tap on the indicator before carrying out the check » Fig. 263.
Black colour - electrolyte level is correct.
Colourless or light yellow colour - electrolyte level too low, the battery must
be replaced.
Battery discharge
If frequent short journeys are made, the vehicle battery does not recharge suf-
ficiently.
The battery capacity decreases at low temperatures.
If the vehicle is not used for longer than 3 to 4 weeks, then disconnect the
negative terminal of the battery or charge the battery constantly with a very
low charging current.
Charging
Read and observe and on page 214 first.
Only charge the battery when the ignition and all consumers are switched off.
Refer to the instructions of the charger manufacturer.
Charging
For vehicles with the START-STOP system or auxiliary heater
, connect the
-terminal of the charger on the battery’s
- pole,
the - terminal of the
charger to the ground point of the engine » page 227.
For vehicles without the START-STOP system or auxiliary heating, connect
the charger terminals to the corresponding battery poles (
to
,
to
).
Plug the mains cable of the charger into the power socket and switch the
charger on.
Once charging is complete: Switch off the charger and remove the mains ca-
ble from the power socket.
Disconnect the terminals of the charger from the vehicle battery.
A charging current of 0.1 multiple of the total vehicle battery capacity (or low-
er) must be used until full charging is achieved.
WARNING
When charging the vehicle battery, hydrogen is released - risk of explo-
sion. An explosion can be caused through sparking while unclamping or
loosening the cable plug.
So-called “quick-charging” of the vehicle battery is dangerous and re-
quires a special charger and specialist knowledge. Therefore, have “Quick
loading” carried out by a specialist garage.
Disconnecting/reconnecting and replacing
Read and observe and on page 214 first.
The new vehicle battery must have the same capacity, voltage, current and the
same size as the original battery.
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
To disconnect, switch off the ignition and disconnect the negative terminal
first , then disconnect the positive terminal .
When reconnecting the battery, reconnect the positive terminal first
,
then connect the negative terminal
.
After disconnecting and re-connecting the vehicle battery, the following func-
tions or devices are partially or completely inoperative.
Function / device Operating measure
Power windows » page 60
Time settings » page 46
CAUTION
Disconnect the battery only with the ignition and consumers turned off - risk
of damaging the electrical system of the vehicle.
Before disconnecting the battery, always close all electric windows other-
wise malfunctions of the window can occur.
Under no circumstances mix up the charging cables – risk of fire.
Note
After disconnecting and reconnecting the vehicle battery, we recommend
having the vehicle checked by a specialist to ensure that the full functionality
of the vehicle is guaranteed.
215
Inspecting and replenishing
Wheels
Wheels and tyres
Advice on tyre/wheel usage
New tyres, during the first 500 km, new tyres do not offer optimum grip and
appropriate care should therefore be taken when driving.
Tyres with the deeper profiles should always be fitted to the front wheels.
Rims and wheel bolts are matched to each other in terms of design. We rec-
ommend that you use rims and wheel bolts from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheels and tyres should always be stored in a cool, dry and dark place. The
tyres themselves should be stored vertically.
Tyre life
Tyres age losing their original characteristics, even if they are not used. Do not
use tyres that are older than 6 years.
The manufacturing date is indicated on the tyre sidewall (possibly on the in-
side). E.g. DOT ... 10 17... means that the tyres were produced in the 10th week
of the year 2017.
Tyre damage
We recommend checking your tyres and wheel rims for damage (punctures,
cuts, splits and bulges etc.) on a regular basis.
Remove any foreign objects in the tyre’s profile immediately (e.g. small
stones).
Foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. screws or nails)
should not be removed and help should be sought from a specialist garage.
Fitting new tyres
Only fit approved radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and
the same tread pattern on one axle on all four wheels.
When mounting new tyres the tyres have to be replaced axle by axle.
Directional tyres
Some tyres may be directional. The direction of rotation of the tyres is marked
by arrows on the wall of the tyre.
The specified running direction must be strictly adhered to, otherwise the fol-
lowing tyre characteristics may be degraded.
Driving stability.
Traction.
Tyre noise and tyre wear.
WARNING
Never use damaged tyres or tyres that are older than 6 years old – risk of
accident.
CAUTION
The tyres must be protected from contact with substances (e.g. oil, grease
and fuel) which could damage them. If the tyres with these substances come
into contact, then we recommend that you check this in a specialist workshop.
Do not use rims with ground or polished surfaces in winter conditions - there
is a risk of rim damage (e.g through salt spreading).
Tyre pressure
Fig. 264
Label with a table of tyre sizes and tyre pressure value / inflate
tyres
The prescribed tyre pressure is indicated on the sticker with pictograms
A
» Fig. 264 (for some countries, the pictograms are replaced with a text).
Tyre pressure is always to match the load.
Inflation pressure for half load
Inflation pressure for environmentally friendly operation (slightly lower
fuel consumption and emissions)
Inflation pressure for full load
B
C
D
216
General Maintenance
Tyre diameter in inches
This information serves merely as information for the prescribed tyre
pressure. This is not a list of shared tyre sizes for your vehicle. These are in
the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of con-
formity (in so-called COC document).
Tyre pressure value on the front axle
Tyre pressure value on the rear axle
Check tyre pressures
Check the tyre pressure, including that of the spare wheel, at least once a
month and also before setting off on a long journey.
Always check the inflation pressure when the tyres are cold. Do not reduce
the higher pressure of warm tyres.
In vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, tyre pressure values must be saved
each time the pressures are changed » page 192.
WARNING
Do not drive with incorrect tyre pressure - risk of accident.
In the event of very rapid pressure loss (e.g. in the event of tyre damage)
an attempt should be made to bring the vehicle carefully to a stop without
sudden steering movements and without any hard braking - risk of acci-
dent.
Note
The declaration of conformity (the so-called COC document) can be obtained
from a ŠKODA partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
E
F
G
Tyre wear and wheel change
Fig. 265 Tyre wear indicator / wheel change
Tyre wear increases in the following circumstances.
Incorrect tyre pressures.
Driving style (e.g. fast cornering, rapid acceleration / braking).
Incorrect wheel balancing (you should have the wheels balanced after chang-
ing/repair tyres or if the steering “is drifting”).
Wheel alignment errors.
There are wear indicator markers in the tyre treads, indicating whether the
minimum permissible tread depth has been reached » Fig. 265 -
. A tyre
should be regarded as worn out when this indicator is flush with the tread.
Markings on the walls of the tyres with the letters “TWI” or other symbols (e.g.
) indicate the position of the wear indicators.
To ensure uniform wear on all tyres, we recommend that you change the
wheels every 10 000 km, in line with the schedule » Fig. 265 -
.
WARNING
Change the tyres at the latest when they are worn down to the wear indi-
cators - risk of accident.
Faulty wheel alignment affects handling - risk of accident.
Unusual vibrations or the vehicle “pulling” to one side could be a sign of
tyre damage. Reduce speed and stop! If there are no external signs of tyre
damage, seek the help of a specialist garage.
Spare wheel
A full spare wheel is identical to the wheels mounted on the vehicle.
217
Wheels
A temporary spare wheel is provided with a warning label on the rim. Only use
this temporary spare wheel to reach the nearest specialist garage since it is
not intended for permanent use.
Instructions for using a temporary spare wheel
Do not cover the warning sign.
Be specially attentive when driving.
Inflate the spare wheel to the maximum prescribed inflation pressure
» page 216.
WARNING
A temporary spare wheel can only be used for a short time in the event of a
breakdown and with a correspondingly careful driving method.
Tyre marking
Explanation of tyre markings - e.g. 185/60 R 15 84 H
185 Tyre width in mm
60 Height/width ratio in %
R Code letter for the type of tyre – Radial
15 Diameter of wheel in inches
84 load index
H Speed symbol
Load index - indicates the maximum permissible load for each individual
tyre
load index
83 84 85 86 87 88
Load
(In kg)
487 500 515 530 545 560
Speed symbol - indicates the maximum permissible speed for a vehicle fit-
ted with tyres in a given category
Speed
symbol
S T U H V W
Maximum
speed
(in km/h)
180 190 200 210 240 270
WARNING
Never exceed the maximum permissible load bearing capacity and speed
for the tyres fitted – risk of accident.
Operating in winter conditions
All-year (or “winter”) tyres
All-year or “winter”tyres (indicated by an M+S or a mountain peak/snowflake
symbol
) to improve the performance of the vehicle in winter conditions.
To get the best possible driving characteristics, all-year or “winter”tyres, with a
minimum tread depth of 4 mm on all four wheels, should be fitted.
If “winter” tyres are mounted, summer tyres should be fitted again in good
time as they provide better handling properties, a shorter braking distance,
less tyre noise and reduced tyre wear on roads which are free of snow and ice
as well as at temperatures above 7 °C.
Speed symbol
All-year or “winter”tyres (marked with M+S and a peak/snowflake symbol
)
of a lower speed category than listed in the vehicle’s technical documentation
can be used provided that the maximum permissible speed for these tyres is
not exceeded even if the maximum possible speed of the vehicle is higher.
On vehicles with Infotainment, the speed limit for all-season or “winter” tyres
can be set with the button

in menu

Tyres
. For other vehicles,
there is the option to set the speed limit for winter tyres at a specialist garage.
If the vehicle has all-season or “winter”tires of a lower speed category then the
specified maximum speed of the vehicle (referring to tyres that have not been
delivered by the factory, a warning label with the maximum value of the speed
category provided for the mounted tyres must be fixed in the interior of the
vehicle in a constantly visible place in the driver’s field of vision. The warning
218
General Maintenance
label (sticker) can be replaced by setting the maximum value of the speed cat-
egory specified for the mounted tyres in Infotainment (only applies to certain
countries). This specification defines the maximum vehicle speed with moun-
ted all-season or “winter”tyres that may not be exceeded.
Snow chains
The snow chains improve handling in wintry road conditions.
Before fitting the snow chains, remove the full wheel trims.
Snow chains must only be fitted on the front wheels and are applicable only to
the following wheel / tyre combinations.
Rim size Press depth D Tyre size
5J x 14 35 mm 175/70 R14
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 9 mm.
Rim size Press depth D Tyre size
6J x 15 38 mm 185/60 R15
Only fit snow chains with links and locks not larger than 12 mm.
WARNING
Do not use chains on snow and ice-free routes - the handling would be im-
paired and there is a risk of damage to the tyres.
219
Wheels
Do-it-yourself
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Emergency equipment
Placement of the first aid kit and warning triangle
Fig. 266
Placement of the first aid kit
and warning triangle - version 1
Fig. 267 Placing the first aid kit and the warning triangle - variant 2 /
release the warning triangle
The following information is for the first aid kit and warning triangle from the
ŠKODA Original accessories valid.
Placing the first-aid kit
The first-aid kit can be attached to the right-hand side of the boot using a
strap » Fig. 266 or » Fig. 267.
Placing of the warning triangle - variant 1
The warning triangle can be stored in the recess under the loading edge
» Fig. 266.
Position of the warning triangle - variant 2
The first-aid kit can be attached to the right-hand side of the boot using a
strap » Fig. 267.
To release, press the clasp on the strap in the direction of arrow
1
and fold
open the strap
A
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 267.
To secure, fold up the belt
A
against the arrow direction
2
until it locks in-
to place.
WARNING
Properly secure the first aid kit and the warning triangle, or there is a risk of
injury in the event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Location of reflective vest
Fig. 268
Stowage compartment for the
reflective vest in the front door
The reflective vest can be stowed in the storage compartment
A
inside the
storage compartment of the front door » Fig. 268.
Fire extinguisher
Fig. 269
Release the fire extinguisher
The fire extinguisher is attached by two straps in a bracket under the front
passenger's seat.
220
Do-it-yourself
To remove the fire extinguisher, release the safety catches on the two straps
in the direction of arrow » Fig. 269 and remove the fire extinguisher.
To secure, place the fire extinguisher back in the mount and secure with the
belts.
The Owner´s Manual is fitted next to the fire extinguisher.
Pay attention to the expiration date of the fire extinguisher. After this date, the
correct function of the device is not guaranteed.
WARNING
Always properly secure the fire extinguisher, there is a risk of injury in the
event of sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
Vehicle tool kit
Fig. 270 Vehicle tool kit
The box containing the vehicle tool kit is located in the stowage compartment
for the spare wheel, and can be secured with a tape depending on the equip-
ment fitted.
Depending on the equipment, not all of the following components in the on-
board tool kit have to be contained in it.
Screwdriver
Top section for the anti-theft wheel bolts
Towing eye
Clamps for removing the wheel trims
1
2
3
4
Jack with sign
Wheel brace
Extraction pliers for the wheel bolt caps
Breakdown kit
WARNING
The factory-supplied lifting jack is only intended for your model of vehi-
cle. Under no circumstances attempt to lift other vehicles or loads with it –
there is a risk of injury.
Always stow the tool in the box securely and make sure that it is secured
to the spare wheel using the tape - there is a risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking or a vehicle collision.
CAUTION
Screw the jack back to its starting position prior to putting it back in its box –
Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the box.
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the jack or the log folder.
Changing a wheel
Preliminary work
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
changing a wheel on the road.
Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission select 1, gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
Have all the occupants get out. The passengers should not stand on the
road while the wheel is being changed (they should remain behind a crash
barrier, for instance).
Uncouple any trailers.
5
6
7
8
221
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Changing a wheel
Remove the spare wheel » page 222.
Remove the full wheel trim» page 223or caps» page 223.
Loosen the wheel bolts » page 224 » .
Jack up the vehicle» page 224 until the wheel that needs changing is clear of
the ground.
Unscrew the wheel bolts and place them on a clean surface (cloth, paper,
etc.).
Remove the wheel carefully.
Attach the spare wheel and slightly screw on the wheel bolts.
Lower the vehicle.
Tighten the wheel bolts opposite each other using the wheel wrench (“pull-
ing crossways”) » page 224.
Replace the wheel trim» page 223and caps» page 223.
When fitting a wheel with directional tyres, ensure that the direction of rota-
tion is correct » page 216.
All bolts must be clean and must turn easily. If screws are corroded and diffi-
cult to move, these must be replaced.
WARNING
Undo the wheel bolts just a little (about one turn), provided the vehicle
has not yet been jacked up. Otherwise the wheel could come loose and fall
off – risk of injury.
Under no circumstances must the bolts be greased or oiled - cause an ac-
cident.
Subsequent steps
After changing the wheel, the following work should be carried out.
Stow the replaced wheel in the well under the floor covering of the luggage
compartment and secure with a locking screw.
Stow the tool kit in the space provided and secure using the strap.
Check tyre pressure on the mounted wheel and adjust if necessary and, with
vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring, save the tyre pressure values in the
system » page 192.
Have the tightening torque of the wheel bolts checked as soon as possible.
The prescribed tightening torque is 120 Nm.
Replace the damaged tyre. Repairing the tyre is not recommended.
WARNING
Tightening torque which is too high can damage the threads and this can
result in permanent deformation of the contact surfaces on the rim. Where
tightening torque is too low, the wheels may become loose while driving -
risk of accident. Therefore, drive cautiously and only at a moderate speed
until the tightening torque has been checked.
Removing/stowing the spare wheel
Fig. 271
Taking the wheel out
The spare wheel is located in a well under the floor covering in the luggage
compartment and is fixed in place with a fastening screw » Fig. 271.
Taking the wheel out
Lift up the floor in the luggage compartment.
Loosen the retaining belt and take out the box with the tool kit.
Unscrew the fastening screw in the direction of arrow » Fig. 271 and the re-
move the wheel.
Stowing the wheel
Place the wheel into the wheel well with the wheel rim pointing downward.
Pull the fixing band through the opposite holes in the wheel rim.
Screw the fastening screw opposite to the direction of arrow until it stops
» Fig. 271.
Place the box with the tool kit back inside the wheel and secure it with the
tape.
Fold back the floor in the luggage compartment.
222
Do-it-yourself
Full wheel trim
Remove trim
Hang the clamps for removing the full wheel trims at the edge of one of the
ventilation openings in the full wheel trim.
Push the wheel wrench through the clamp, support on the tyre and pull off
the wheel trim.
Install trim
Press the wheel trim onto the wheel rim at the designated valve opening.
Then press the trim into the wheel rim until its entire circumference latches
correctly into position.
The position of the anti-theft wheel bolt is indicated by means of a symbol on
the back of the wheel trim supplied ex-factory or from the ŠKODA Original
Accessories. If using the anti-theft wheel bolt it should be fitted at this point
» .
WARNING
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accesso-
ries. A sufficient air supply may not be able to be guaranteed with other
wheel trims to cool the braking system – Otherwise there is a risk of an ac-
cident.
CAUTION
If the wheel trim is positioned outside the position marked for the anti-theft
wheel bolt, there is a risk of damaging the wheel cover.
Use only manual pressure and do not hit the full wheel trim – otherwise there
is a risk of damaging the trim.
Note
We recommend that you use wheel trims from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
Wheel bolts
Fig. 272
Remove the cap
To remove the cap insert the extraction pliers as far as they will go on the
cap and pulling them out in the direction of arrow » Fig. 272.
To install, insert the cap onto the wheel bolt as far as it will go.
Anti-theft wheel bolts
Fig. 273
Anti-theft wheel bolt and at-
tachment
The anti-theft wheel bolts protect wheels from being stolen. This can only be
loosened/tightened with attachment
B
» Fig. 273.
Insert the upper section
B
on the anti-theft wheel bolt
A
until it stops.
Insert the key as far as it will go onto attachment
B
and loosen / tighten the
wheel bolt.
Remove the attachment.
The attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts must always be kept in the
vehicle in case of a possible wheel change!
For wheel trims supplied ex-factory or from ŠKODA Original Accessories, the
anti-theft wheel bolt should be installed in the position marked on the back of
the wheel trim.
223
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Note
We recommend that you retain the label with the code number. A replacement
upper section can be acquired from ŠKODA Original Parts based on this.
Loosening/tightening wheel bolts
Fig. 274
Loosening the wheel bolts
Insert the wheel wrench onto the wheel bolt to the stop. Use the associated
attachment for the anti-theft wheel bolts » Fig. 273 on page 223.
To loosen the screws, grasp the key end and turn the screw about one turn
rotation in the direction of the arrow » Fig. 274.
To tighten the screws grasp the key end and turn the screw against the di-
rection of the arrow » Fig. 274, until it is tight.
WARNING
If it proves difficult to undo the bolts, carefully apply pressure to the end of
the wrench with your foot. Keep hold of the vehicle when doing so, and
make sure you keep your footing - danger of injury.
Raising the vehicle
Fig. 275
Jacking points for the jack
Fig. 276 Attach lifting jack
Before the vehicle is raised, please take note of the safety instructions » .
To lift the vehicle, us the jack from the tool kit. Position the jack at the jacking
point closest to the wheel to be replaced.
The jacking points are located on the lower sill » Fig. 275.
Position the base plate of the jack with its full area resting on level ground
and ensure that the jack will fit in the jacking point when raised » Fig. 276 -
.
Use the crank to raise the jack until its pawl covers the jacking point
» Fig. 276-
.
Raise the vehicle until the wheel is a little off the floor.
WARNING
The following instructions must be observed, otherwise there is risk of in-
jury.
Ensure the vehicle cannot unexpectedly roll away.
Always ensure the base plate of the lifting jack cannot slip.
Place a wide and stable base material under the jack if on a loose surfa-
ces (e.g. gravel).
Place an anti-slip base material (e.g. a rubber mat) under the jack if on a
smooth surface (e.g. cobblestones).
Always raise the vehicle with the doors closed.
Never position any body parts (e.g. arms or legs) under the vehicle while
the vehicle is raised.
When the vehicle is raised, never start the engine.
224
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
It is important to ensure that the jack is correctly attached to the bar of the
lower beam – otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle.
Breakdown kit
Introduction
The following information applies for the breakdown kit supplied ex-factory.
The breakdown kit can be used to seal punctures with a diameter of up to
about 4 mm.
A repair made using the breakdown kit is never intended to replace a perma-
nent repair on the tyre. Its purpose is to get you to the nearest specialist ga-
rage.
Replace the tyre that was repaired using the breakdown kit as soon as possi-
ble, or consult a specialist garage about repair options.
Do not remove foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre (e.g. nails).
Do not use the breakdown kit in the following cases.
The rim is damaged.
The outdoor temperature is below the minimum temperature indicated in
the instruction manual for the tyre filling bottle with sealant.
Tyre punctures greater than 4 mm.
Damage to the tyre wall.
The use-by date (see inflation bottle) has passed.
WARNING
If there is skin contact with the sealant wash the affected area immedi-
ately.
Observe the instructions provided in the puncture repair kit manufactur-
er's instructions for use.
Description of the breakdown kit
Fig. 277
Description of the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 225 first.
The kit is located in a box under the floor covering in the luggage compart-
ment.
Sticker with “max. 80 km/h”/“max. 50 mph” speed designation
Valve remover
Inflation hose with plug
Air compressor (the layout of the controls may be different depending on
the type of air compressor delivered with the vehicle)
Tyre inflation hose
Button for tyre pressure reduction
Tyre pressure indicator
12 volt cable connector
ON and OFF switch
Tyre inflator bottle with sealant
Replacement valve core
Note
The declaration of conformity is included with the air compressor or the log
folder.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
225
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Preparing to use the breakdown kit
Read and observe on page 225 first.
For safety's sake, the following instructions must be observed before
undertaking a wheel repair on a road.
Park the vehicle as far as possible away from the traffic flow - choose a place
with a flat and firm surface.
Switch off the engine.
For vehicles with manual transmission select 1st gear.
For vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle at the
prescribed distance.
Have all the occupants get out. While the repair is being carried out, the
passengers should not stand on the road (instead they should remain behind
a crash barrier, for instance).
Uncouple any trailers.
Sealing and inflating tyres
Read and observe on page 225 first.
Sealing
Unscrew the valve cap from the damaged tyre.
Attach the valve remover
2
» Fig. 277 on page 225 onto the valve insert, so
that the valve insert fits into the slot of the valve remover.
Unscrew the valve insert and place it on a clean base (rag, paper etc.).
Forcefully shake bottle
10
several times.
Firmly screw the inflation hose
3
onto the tyre inflater bottle
10
. The film
on the bottle cap is pierced.
Remove the plug from the inflation hose
3
and insert the bottle onto the
tyre valve.
Hold the bottle
10
with the bottom facing upwards and fill all of the sealing
agent from the tyre inflator bottle into the tyre.
Remove the filler plug from the tyre valve.
Screw in the valve insert with the valve remover
2
.
Inflating
Screw the air compressor tyre inflation hose
5
» Fig. 277 on page 225 firmly
onto the tyre valve.
For vehicles with manual transmission, set the lever in the neutral position.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, place the selector lever in the P
position.
Start the engine.
Plug the connector
8
into the 12 volt socket » page 79.
Switch on the air compressor with the ON and OFF switch
9
.
Once tyre inflation pressure of 2.0-2.5 bar has been reached, turn off the air
compressor. Observe the maximum running time of the air compressor ac-
cording to the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer » .
If an air pressure of 2.0 - 2.5 bar has not been reached, unscrew the tyre in-
flation hose
5
from the tyre valve.
Drive the vehicle 10 metres forwards or backwards to allow the sealing
agent to “distribute” in the tyre.
Firmly screw the tyre inflation hose
5
back onto the tyre valve and repeat
the inflation process.
Stick the corresponding sticker
1
onto the dashboard in the driver's field of
view.
At a tyre inflation pressure of 2.0–2.5 bar, the journey can be continued at a
maximum speed of 80 km/h or 50 mph.
WARNING
If the tyre does not inflate to at least 2.0 bar, the damage is too great. The
sealing agent cannot be used to seal the tyre. Do not drive the vehicle.
Seek help from a specialist garage.
The tyre inflation hose and air compressor may get hot while the tyre is
being inflated – there is a risk of injury.
CAUTION
Switch off the air compressor at the latest after the running time according to
the instructions of the repair kit manufacturer has elapsed – otherwise there is
the risk of compressor damage! Allow the air compressor to cool a few mi-
nutes before switching it on again.
226
Do-it-yourself
Information on driving with repaired tyres
Read and observe on page 225 first.
The filling pressure of the repaired tyre is a 10-minute test drive.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or less
You cannot properly seal the tyre using the breakdown kit. Do not contin-
ue to drive! Seek help from a specialist garage.
If the tyre pressure is 1.3 bar or more
Set the tyre pressure back to the correct value » page 216.
Continue driving carefully to the nearest specialist garage at a maximum
speed of 80 km/h (50 mph).
WARNING
A tyre filled with sealant has the same driving characteristics as a standard
tyre. The following guidelines must therefore be observed.
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph).
Avoid accelerating at full throttle, sharp braking and fast cornering.
Jump-starting
Introduction
WARNING
The following instructions must be followed at all times when working on
the engine compartment » page 209.
When handling the vehicle battery, the following warnings must be ob-
served » page 213.
A discharged vehicle battery can freeze at temperatures just below 0 °C.
If the battery is frozen, do not carry out a jump start with the battery of
another vehicle – risk of explosion and injury!
Never jump-start vehicle batteries with an electrolyte level that is too low
– risk of explosion and caustic burns!
Jump-starting using the battery from another vehicle
Fig. 278 Jump-starting: - discharged battery, - power-supplying
battery/ground point of the engine for the START-STOP system
Read and observe
on page 227 first.
If, because of a discharged battery, it is not possible to start the engine, the
battery of another vehicle can be used to start the engine. To do this, jump-
start cables are required which have a sufficiently large cross-section and insu-
lated terminal clamps.
The rated voltage of the two batteries must be 12 V. The capacity (Ah) of the
power-supplying battery must not be significantly lower than the capacity of
the discharged battery.
The jump-start cables must be attached in the following sequence.
Attach clamp
1
to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
Attach clamp
2
to the positive terminal of the power-supplying battery.
Attach clamp
3
to the negative terminal of the power-supplying battery.
For vehicles with the START-STOP system, attach clamp
4
to the ground
point of the engine
A
» Fig. 278.
For vehicles without the START-STOPsystem, attach clamp
4
to a solid
metal part firmly attached to the engine block or directly to the engine block.
Starting engine
Start the engine on the vehicle providing the power and allow it to idle.
Initiate the starting process in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
If the engine does not start within 10 s, then cancel the starting procedure
and repeat after half a minute.
Detach the jumper cables in the exact reverse order that they were attach-
ed.
227
Emergency equipment, and self-help
WARNING
Never clamp the jump cable to the negative terminal of the discharged
battery - risk of explosion.
The non-insulated parts of the terminal clamps must never touch each
other – risk of short circuit.
The jump-start cable connected to the positive terminal of the battery
must not come into contact with electrically conducting parts of the vehi-
cle – risk of short circuit.
Position the jump cables so that they cannot be caught in rotating parts in
the engine compartment - danger of injuries and the risk of vehicle dam-
age.
Towing the vehicle
Information about the towing process
Fig. 279
Braided tow ropes/spiral tow rope
To tow with a tow rope, use only a braided synthetic fibre rope » Fig. 279 -
» .
Attach the tow rope or the tow bar to the towing eyes at the front
» page 229, towing eyes at the rear » page 229 or to the towing device of the
trailer device » page 193.
Conditions for towing.
Cars with automatic gearboxes must not be towed with the rear wheels
raised - there is a risk of gearbox damage!
If the gearbox has no oil, your vehicle must be towed with the front axle
raised clear of the ground or on a breakdown vehicle or trailer.
The maximum towing speed is 50 km/h.
The vehicle must be transported on a special breakdown vehicle or trailer
if it is not possible to tow the vehicle in the way described or if the towing
distance is greater than 50 km.
Driver of the tow vehicle
On vehicles with manual transmission, engage gear slowly when starting.
On vehicles with automatic transmission, accelerate with particular care.
Only then, approach correctly when the rope is taut.
Driver of the towed vehicle
If possible, the vehicle should be towed with the engine running. The brake
booster and power steering only operate if the engine is running, otherwise
much greater force has to be applied to the brake pedal and more power has
to be expended for steering.
If it is not possible to start the engine, switch on the ignition so that the
steering wheel does not lock and so that the turn signal lights, windscreen
wipers and windscreen washer system can be used.
Take the vehicle out of gear or move the selector lever into position N if the
vehicle is fitted with an automatic gearbox.
Keep the tow rope taut at all times during the towing procedure.
WARNING
Spiral tow ropes must not be used for towing » Fig. 279- , the towing
eye may unscrew out of the vehicle – risk of accident.
The tow rope should not be twisted - risk of accident.
CAUTION
Do not tow-start the engine – There is a risk of damaging the engine. The
battery from another vehicle can be used as a jump-start aid » page 227,
Jump-starting.
For off-road towing manoeuvres, there is a risk to both vehicles that the fas-
teners may become overloaded and damaged.
Note
We recommend that you use a tow rope from ŠKODA Original Accessories.
228
Do-it-yourself
Front towing eye
Fig. 280 Remove cap / install towing eye
Cap removal/fitting
To remove, press down on the cap in the direction of arrow
1
and remove it
in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 280.
To fit it, insert the cap in arrow range
1
and then press on the opposite edge
of the cap. The cap must engage firmly.
Removing/installing the towing eye
To fit, screw in the towing eye by hand in the direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 280 until it clicks into place » .
Tighten the towing eye using a wheel wrench or similar object. To do this, in-
sert the wheel wrench through the eye.
To removeit, unscrew the towing eye in the opposite direction to arrow
3
.
WARNING
The towing eye must always be firmly in place, otherwise the towing eye
could break whilst being towed.
Towing eye rear
Fig. 281
Rear towing eye
The rear towing eye is located below the bumper on the right.
Vehicles with a tow hitch
For vehicles with a factory-fitted towing device, the pre-installed detachable
tow-bar may be used» page 193, Hitch.
Remote control – Changing the battery
Introduction
CAUTION
The replacement battery must correspond to the original specification.
Pay attention to the correct polarity when changing the battery.
Note
We recommend you have the battery replaced by a specialist garage.
If a key has an affixed decorative cover, this will be destroyed when the bat-
tery is replaced. A replacement cover can be purchased from a ŠKODA Part-
ner.
229
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Key with fold-out key bit
Fig. 282 Opening the cover/removing the battery
Read and observe on page 229 first.
Pop out the key bit.
Press off the battery cover
A
» Fig. 282 with your thumb or by using a flat
screwdriver in region
B
.
Open the battery in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Remove the discharged battery in the direction of arrow
2
and install a new
battery.
Insert the battery cover
A
and press it down until it clicks audibly into place.
The key has to be synchronised if the vehicle cannot be unlocked or locked
with the key after replacing the battery » page 56.
Emergency unlocking/locking of doors
Unlocking/locking the driver's door
Fig. 283 Handle on the driver's door: open lock cover/lock cylinder with
key
The driver's door can be emergency unlocked / emergency locked using the
key via the lock cylinder.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Insert the key into the recess on the lower side of the cover and fold up the
cover in the direction of arrow » Fig. 283.
Release the door handle.
For vehicles with LHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing upwards » Fig. 283 into the lock cylinder and unlock/lock the ve-
hicle.
For vehicles with RHD, insert the key with the fold-out key bit with the but-
tons facing downwards into the lock and unlock/lock the vehicle.
Pull on the door handle and hold.
Replace the cover.
CAUTION
Make sure you do not damage the paint when performing an emergency lock-
ing/unlocking.
230
Do-it-yourself
Locking the door without locking cylinders
Fig. 284 Left door/right door
Open the corresponding door.
In vehicles with panel
A
, remove this panel » Fig. 284.
Insert the key into the slot and turn in the direction of the arrow (spring-loa-
ded position).
Replace the cover
A
.
After closing, the door is locked.
Unlocking the boot lid
Fig. 285
Unlocking the door
The boot lid can be unlocked manually from inside the vehicle.
Insert a screwdriver or similar tool into the opening in the trim » Fig. 285 as
far as the latch.
Unlock the lid by moving it in the direction of the arrow.
Selector lever emergency unlocking
Fig. 286 Remove / release the selector lever
Firmly apply the handbrake.
Insert a flat-head screwdriver or similar tool into the gap in the arrow area
1
» Fig. 286 and carefully lift the cover in arrow direction
2
.
Likewise lift the cover with your hand as well.
Press on the yellow plastic part in the direction of arrow
3
, simultaneously
press the lock button in the selector lever handle and put the lever in position
N.
If the selector lever is moved again to position P, it is once again blocked.
CAUTION
Make sure when lifting not to damage cover parts by the screwdriver in the
shift lever environment.
Replacing windscreen wiper blades
Introduction
WARNING
Replace the windscreen wiper blades once or twice a year for safety rea-
sons.
231
Emergency equipment, and self-help
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Fig. 287
Setting the service position for
the wiper arms
Fig. 288
Changing the front windscreen wiper blade
Read and observe on page 231 first.
Before replacing the windscreen wiper blades, close the bonnet and put the
windscreen wiper arms into the service position.
Setting the service position
Switch the ignition on and off again.
Push the lever in the direction of arrow » Fig. 287 within 10 seconds and hold
for approximately 2 seconds.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the window in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 288.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch
A
down in the direction of ar-
row
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow
3
until
it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attach-
ed.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
Turn on the ignition and press the lever in the direction of the arrow
» Fig. 287.
Move the windscreen wiper arms into the home position.
Replacing the rear window wiper blade
Fig. 289
Changing the rear window wiper blade
Read and observe on page 231 first.
Removing the wiper blade
Lift the wiper arm from the windscreen in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 289.
Tilt the wiper blade to the stop in the same direction.
Grip the wiper arm and press securing latch
A
down in the direction of ar-
row
2
.
Remove the wiper blade in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Attaching the windscreen wiper blade
Slide the windscreen wiper blade in the opposite direction to arrow
3
until
it locks into place. Check that the windscreen wiper blade is correctly attach-
ed.
Fold the windscreen wiper arm back to the windscreen.
232
Do-it-yourself
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuses
Introduction
Fig. 290
Blown fuse
Individual electrical circuits are protected by fuses. A blown fuse is recognisa-
ble by the molten metal strip » Fig. 290
/
.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 209.
CAUTION
Replace the faulty fuse with a new one of the same amperage.
If a newly inserted fuse again blows after a short time, then seek assistance
from a specialist garage.
“Do not repair” the fuses and do not replace them with stronger fuses - dan-
ger of fire and damage to another electrical system.
Note
We recommend always carrying replacement fuses in the vehicle.
One fuse may cover several consumers. A single consumer may use several
fuses.
Fuses in the dashboard
Fig. 291
Remove the cover
Read and observe and on page 233 first.
The fuses are located on the bottom of the dash panel behind a cover.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Remove the cover of the fuse box » Fig. 291 in the direction of the arrow.
Remove the plastic clip from the holder in the fuse box cover.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Replace the clamp in the original position.
Insert the top edge of the cover into the dash panel first.
Push the lower edge of the cover in the region
A
.
233
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuse assignment in the dashboard
Fig. 292
Fuses: - LHD /
- RHD
Read and observe and on page 233 first.
No. Power consumer
1 Left parking light, parking light, high-mounted brake light
2
Central locking, front and rear window washer system (only with
KESSY or ACC)
3 Ignition
4 Right-hand light, rear fog light, license plate light
5 Power windows - driver
6 Interior lighting
7 Horn
8 Towing hitch
9
Operating lever beneath the steering wheel, engine control unit (only
without KESSY), automatic gearbox (only without KESSY), selector
lever of the automatic transmission (only without KESSY), ESC (only
without KESSY), towing equipment (only without KESSY), power
steering (only without KESSY)
10 Power windows - rear left
11 Headlight cleaning system
No. Power consumer
12 Infotainment screen
13 12 volt socket in luggage compartment
14
Operating lever under the steering wheel, light switch, ignition key
removal lock (automatic transmission), diagnostic connector, head-
light flasher, rain sensor, light sensor, reversing camera
15 Air conditioning, automatic transmission
16 Instrument cluster, emergency call
17 Anti-theft alarm, horn
18 Not assigned
19 Not assigned
20 Not assigned
21 Not assigned
22
Front and rear window washer system (only without KESSY or with-
out ACC)
23 Not assigned
24
Blower fan for the air conditioning system, heating, air conditioning,
heating
25 Not assigned
26 Heated front seats
27 Rear window wiper
28 Not assigned
29 airbag
30
Electric windows, light switches, reversing light switch, exterior mir-
rors, feed for the central toolbar, feed for the side toolbar, rear view
mirror, air-conditioning system, park assist
31
Fuel pump, radiator fan, cruise control, front and rear window wash-
er, engine start
32 Diagnostic connector, headlight range adjustment
33 Clutch pedal switch
34 Heated windscreen washer jets
35 Not assigned
36 Heated front seats
234
Do-it-yourself
No. Power consumer
37 Radar
38 Not assigned
39 Electrical auxiliary heating system
40 Not assigned
41 Rear window heating
42 Power windows - front passenger
43 Towing hitch
44 Cigarette lighter, 12-volt power socket
45 Power windows - rear right
46
Front and rear window washer, operating lever under the steering
wheel
47 Towing hitch
48 Towing hitch
49 Fuel pump
50 Infotainment
51 Heating of the external mirror
52 KESSY
53 KESSY steering lock
54 Not assigned
55 Heated front seats
56 Not assigned
57 Not assigned
58 Not assigned
59 Not assigned
Fuses in the engine compartment
Fig. 293 Remove the cover
Read and observe and on page 233 first.
Replacing fuses
Remove the ignition key, turn off the lights and all electrical consumers.
Press together the lock buttons of the cover simultaneously in the direction
of arrow
1
and remove the cover in the direction of arrow
2
» Fig. 293.
Remove the plastic clip from the holder on the cover of the fuse box in the
dash panel.
Use the clip to pull the fuse out, then insert a new fuse.
Replace the cover, push the lock buttons of the cover together and lock.
Replace the clamp in the original position.
CAUTION
The cover of the fuse box in the engine compartment must always be used
correctly, otherwise water may penetrate into the fuse box – there is a danger
of damage to the vehicle!
235
Fuses and light bulbs
Fuse assignment in engine compartment
Fig. 294
Fuses
Read and observe and on page 233 first.
No. Power consumer
1 Radiator fan
2 Glow plug system
3 ABS or ESC
4 Electrical auxiliary heating system
5 Electrical auxiliary heating system
6 Automatic gearbox
7 Engine control system
8 Windscreen wipers
9 Battery data module
10 ABS or ESC
11 Not assigned
12
Injectors, valve for fuel metering, control valve for oil pressure, valve
for exhaust gas recirculation cooler, negative pressure pump
13 Brake pedal switch
14 Fuel pump, coolant pump
15 Engine control system
16 Starter
17 Engine control system
No. Power consumer
18
Additional electrical heating, radiator fan, wastegate, oil temperature
sensor, valve for activated charcoal filter, valve for intake manifold
19 Lambda probe
20 Preheating unit, crankcase ventilation heating, ignition coils
Bulbs
Introduction
This Owner's Manual only describes the replacement of bulbs where it is possi-
ble to replace the bulbs on your own without any complications arising. Other
bulbs or LED lights must be replaced by a specialist garage.
We recommend having bulbs replaced by a specialist garage or seeking other
expert help in the event of any uncertainties.
Switch off the ignition and all of the lights before replacing a bulb.
Faulty bulbs must only be replaced with the same type of bulbs. The designa-
tion is located on the light socket or the glass bulb.
We recommend having the headlight settings checked by a specialist garage
after replacing a bulb in the low, high or fog beam.
WARNING
Always read and observe the warnings before completing any work in the
engine compartment » page 209.
Accidents can be caused if the road in front of the vehicle is not suffi-
ciently illuminated and the vehicle cannot or can only be seen with difficulty
by other road users.
Bulbs H8, H7 and H4 are pressurised and may burst when changed - there
is a risk of injury! We therefore recommended wearing gloves and safety
glasses when changing a bulb.
236
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Do not take hold of the glass bulb with naked fingers (even the smallest
amount of dirt reduces the working life of the light bulb). Use a clean cloth,
napkin, or similar.
The cap of the filament bulb must always be seated correctly in the head-
light, otherwise this may allow water and debris to enter the headlight - risk of
damage to the headlights.
Note
We recommend that a box of replacement bulbs always be carried in the vehi-
cle.
Bulb arrangement in the halogen headlights
Fig. 295 Left headlamp: halogen/halogen projector headlights
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Bulb arrangement » Fig. 295
Dayl. dri. light
Low beam, high beam and parking light
Flashing
Low beam
High beam and turning signal switch
A
B
C
D
E
Cover the front wheel Removing / replacing
Fig. 296
Remove plastic cover
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
The cover in the front wheel well must be removed in order to change certain
light bulbs.
Details about removing the cover if needed, are given in the description of
each lamp change.
Removal
Adjust front wheels in the direction of centre of the vehicle.
Insert the clamp for removing the full wheel covers» page 221, Vehicle tool
kitinto the recess in the cover.
Remove the cover by pulling the hook in the direction of arrow » Fig. 296.
Inserting
Insert and push the cover into the corresponding opening.
The cover must engage securely.
237
Fuses and light bulbs
Remove/replace the mounting for the mopping water container
nozzle
Fig. 297
Remove the mounting for the mopping water container nozzle
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
The mounting for the mopping water container nozzle must be removed in or-
der to replace some light bulbs. The holder is located in the engine compart-
ment, front right.
Details about removing the mounting, if needed,are given in each lamp re-
placement description.
Removal
Remove the container nozzle
A
from the holder in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 297.
Insert a finger into the recess
B
in the direction of arrow
2
and lift the
catch
C
in the direction of arrow
3
.
Remove the holder of the container nozzle in the direction of arrow
4
.
Inserting
Slide the holder of the container nozzle in the opposite direction to the arrow
4
» Fig. 297.
The holder must engage firmly.
Push the container nozzle into the holder in the opposite direction to the ar-
row
1
.
Replacing the bulb for the daytime running lights light (Halogen
headlights)
Fig. 298
Changing the bulb for the day-
time running light
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the relevant cover in the front wheel well» page 237.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 298.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Replace the bulb in the holder.
Insert the holder with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
Turn the holder with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Insert the appropriate cover in the front wheel well again » page 237.
238
Do-it-yourself
Changing bulbs for low and main beam (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 299 Removing bulbs for low and main beam
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the relevant cover in the front wheel well» page 237.
To replace lamp, first remove the mounting for the mopping water container
nozzle in the right headlight » page 238.
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Press the connector latch and remove the plug connector by jiggling in the
direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 299.
Push in the spring in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Release the spring in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Remove the defective bulb in the direction of arrow
4
.
Fit a new bulb into the headlamp and secure the spring in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
3
.
Insert the plug in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
.
Fit the protective cap
B
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
After changing the bulb in the right headlamp, replace the mounting for the
mopping water container nozzle » page 238.
Insert the appropriate cover in the front wheel well again » page 237.
Replacing the bulb for the side light (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 300 Change the light bulb for the parking light
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Removing/inserting the bulb for the parking light
Remove the relevant cover in the front wheel well» page 237.
Remove the mounting for the mopping water container nozzle before replac-
ing the lamp in the right headlight » page 238.
Remove the protective cap
B
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Remove the holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 300.
Hold the housing containing the bulb in area
A
.
Remove the faulty bulb from the housing in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insert a new bulb in the housing until it stops.
Insert the housing with bulb into the headlight again.
Fit the protective cap
B
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
After changing the bulb in the right headlamp, replace the mounting for the
mopping water container nozzle » page 238.
Insert the appropriate cover in the front wheel well again » page 237.
239
Fuses and light bulbs
Replacing the bulb for the front turn signal light (Halogen
headlights)
Fig. 301
Changing the bulb for the front
turn signal light
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the mounting for the mopping water container nozzle before replac-
ing the lamp in the right headlight » page 238.
Remove the protective cap
C
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 301.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Replace the bulb in the holder.
Insert the holder with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite direc-
tion to the arrow
2
.
Turn the holder with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Fit the protective cap
C
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
After changing the bulb in the right headlamp, replace the mounting for the
mopping water container nozzle » page 238.
Replacing the bulb for the low beam (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 302 Changing the bulb for the low beam
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the relevant cover in the front wheel well» page 237.
Remove the protective cap
D
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 302.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the connector so that the lug
A
on the connector
snaps into the groove on the bulb.
Insert the connector with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
2
.
Turn the connector with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Fit the protective cap
D
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Insert the appropriate cover in the front wheel well again » page 237.
240
Do-it-yourself
Replacing the bulb for the main beam (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 303 Changing the bulb for the main beam
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the mounting for the mopping water container nozzle before replac-
ing the lamp in the right headlight » page 238.
Remove the protective cap
E
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Turn the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 303.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
2
.
Remove the bulb from the holder in the direction of the arrow
3
.
Insert a new bulb into the connector so that the lug
A
on the connector
snaps into the groove on the bulb.
Insert the connector with the new bulb into the headlight in the opposite di-
rection to the arrow
2
.
Turn the connector with the new bulb in the opposite direction to the arrow
1
until it stops.
Fit the protective cap
E
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
After changing the bulb in the right headlamp, replace the mounting for the
mopping water container nozzle » page 238.
Replacing the bulb for the turn signal light (Halogen headlights)
Fig. 304 Changing the bulb for the turn signal light
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
To replace lamp, first remove mounting for the mopping water container noz-
zle in the right headlight » page 238.
Remove the protective cap
E
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
Remove the holder with the bulb by jiggling it out in the direction of the ar-
row
1
» Fig. 304.
Hold the housing containing the bulb in area
A
.
Remove the faulty bulb from the housing in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Insert a new bulb in the housing until it stops.
Insert the housing with bulb into the headlight again.
Fit the protective cap
E
» Fig. 295 on page 237.
After changing the bulb in the right headlamp, replace the mounting for the
mopping water container nozzle » page 238.
241
Fuses and light bulbs
Changing light bulbs for fog lights
Fig. 305
Removing the number plate light / replacing the bulb
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Remove the protective grille and headlight
Insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims into opening
A
» Fig. 305.
By pulling the hook in direction of arrow
1
, remove the protective grille in
the direction of arrow
2
.
Unscrew the screws
B
using the screwdriver from the tool kit.
Remove the headlight in the direction of arrow
3
.
Replacing the light bulb
Press the latch on the connector in the direction of arrow
4
.
Remove the key in the direction of the arrow
5
.
Turn the holder with the bulb to the stop in the direction of the arrow
6
.
Remove the holder with the bulb in the direction of arrow
7
.
Insert a new holder with the bulb in the headlamp and turn it in the direction
of arrow
6
as far as the stop.
Attach the connector.
Refit the headlight and grille
Replace the fog light by inserting it in the opposite direction of the arrow
3
» Fig. 305 and tighten.
Insert the guard and push it gently until it locks into place.
Removing/installing tail light
Fig. 306
Remove light / pull out connector
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Removing
Open the tailgate.
Unscrew the screws
A
» Fig. 306 with the screwdriver from the tool kit.
Into the opening
B
insert the clamps for removing the full wheel trims, di-
rected with the eyelet downward (in the right light with the eyelet upward).
Grasp the light with the palm of your hand and remove carefully from pin
D
in the direction of the arrow
1
.
Press the latch
C
on the holder in the direction of the arrow
2
.
Press the latch in the direction of arrow
3
and pull out the holder in the di-
rection of arrow
4
.
Fitting
Insert the bulb holder into the lamp.
Tighten the lock in the opposite direction to the arrow
2
» Fig. 306.
Insert the lamp with the holes
D
onto the pins
E
in the body.
Carefully press the light into the pins on the bodywork » .
Screw the light into place.
Shut the boot lid.
242
Do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Ensure that the cable bundle does not become stuck between the body and
the lamp when it is being refitted – or there is a risk of damage to the electrical
installation and risk of water ingress.
If you are not sure whether the wiring harness has become pinched, we rec-
ommend that you have the light connection checked by a specialist garage.
Ensure that the vehicle paintwork and the tail lamp are not damaged when
removing and installing the tail lamp.
Replacing the bulbs in the tail lamp assembly
Fig. 307
Outer part of the lamp / removing the bulb / lamp holder
Read and observe and on page 236 first.
Outer part of the lamp
Turn the holder with the bulb
A
in the direction of arrow
1
» Fig. 307.
Remove the socket with the bulb from the lamp housing in the direction of
arrow
2
.
Jiggle the bulb to remove.
Insert a new bulb into the socket.
Reinsert the holder with the bulb into the lamp housing and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow
1
to the stop.
Inner part of the light
Turn the holders with the bulbs
A
in the direction of the arrow
1
» Fig. 307.
Remove the holders with the bulbs from the lamp housing in the direction of
the arrow
2
.
Unlock the bulb holder at the areas marked with arrows » Fig. 307 and re-
move the bulb holder from the light.
Turn the respective light bulb counter-clockwise to the stop and remove it
from the bulb holder.
Insert a new bulb into the holder and turn in a clockwise direction to the
stop.
Insert the bulb holder in the light. The holder must engage securely.
Reinsert the holders with the bulbs
A
into the lamp housing and turn in the
opposite direction of the arrow
1
up to the latch.
243
Fuses and light bulbs
Technical data
Technical data
Basic vehicle data
Introduction
The details given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take prece-
dence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The performance values listed were determined without performance-reduc-
ing equipment, e.g. air conditioning system.
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under
conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining opera-
tional and technical data for motor vehicles.
The listed values are for the basic model without optional equipment.
Abbreviations used
Abbreviation Meaning
AG Automatic gearbox
DSG Automatic double clutch gearbox
MG Manual gearbox
MPI Gasoline engine with a multi-point fuel injection
TDI CR
Diesel engine with turbocharger and common rail in-
jection system
TSI Petrol engine with turbocharging and direct injection
Vehicle data
Fig. 308
Type plate
Type plate
The type plate » Fig. 308 is located at the bottom of the B-pillar on the right-
hand driver's side.
The type plate contains the following data.
Vehicle manufacturers
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
Maximum permissible gross weight
Maximum permissible towed weight (towing vehicle and trailer)
Maximum permissible front axle load
Maximum permissible rear axle load
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
The vehicle identification number - VIN (vehicle body number) is stamped on
the right hand suspension strut dome in the engine compartment. This number
is also located on a sign on the lower left hand edge below the windscreen (to-
gether with a VIN bar code), together with a nameplate.
In Infotainment, the VIN number can also be displayed in the menu

Service
.
Engine number
The engine number is embossed in the engine block.
Supplementary Information (applies to Russia)
The full type approval number of the means of transport is indicated in the
registration documents, field 17.
1
2
3
4
5
6
244
Technical data
Maximum permissible trailer weight
The listed maximum permissible trailer weight is only valid for altitudes up to
1000 m above sea level.
The engine output falls as altitude increases, as does the ability to climb.
Therefore, for every additional 1,000 m in height (or part), the maximum per-
missible towed weight must be reduced by 10 %.
The towed weight comprises the actual weights of the (loaded) towing vehicle
and the (loaded) trailer.
WARNING
Do not exceed the specified maximum permissible weights – risk of an ac-
cident and damage.
Operating weight
This value is only a guide value and corresponds to the lowest possible operat-
ing weight without further weight-reducing equipment (e.g. spare wheel etc.).
This includes 75 kg driver's weight, the weight of the operating fluids and the
on-board tool kit and a fuel tank filled to min. 90%.
Operating weight - Fabia
Engine Gearbox Operating weight (kg)
1.0 l/44 kW MPI MG 1080
1.0 ltr./55 kW MPI
MG (EU6) 1080
MG (EU4) 1075
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI MG 1110
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI
MG 1130
DSG 1164
1.6 ltr./66 kW MPI MG 1096
1.6 ltr./81 kW MPI AG 1136
1.4 ltr./55 kW TDI CR MG 1175
1.4 ltr./66 kW TDI CR
MG 1175
DSG 1196
1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI CR MG 1184
Operating weight - Fabia Combi
Engine Gearbox Operating weight (kg)
1.0 l/55 kW MPI
MG (EU6) 1104
MG (EU4) 1099
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI MG 1134
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI
MG 1154
DSG 1188
1.6 ltr./66 kW MPI MG 1120
1.6 ltr./81 kW MPI AG 1160
1.4 ltr./55 kW TDI CR MG 1199
1.4 ltr./66 kW TDI CR
MG 1199
DSG 1220
1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI CR MG 1208
Note
If required, you can find out the precise weight of your vehicle by contacting a
specialist garage.
Payload
It is possible to calculate the approximate loading capacity from the difference
between the permissible total weight and the operating weight.
The payload consists of the following weights.
The weight of the passengers.
The weight of all items of luggage and other loads.
The weight of the roof, including the roof rack system.
The weight of the equipment that is excluded from the operating weight.
Trailer bearing load for trailer towing » page 193.
measurement of fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions according to
ECE Regulations and EU Directives
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions were not available at the
time of going to press.
The data on fuel consumption and CO
2
emissions are given on the ŠKODA
websites or in the sales and technical vehicle documentation.
245
Technical data
The measurement of the intra-urban cycle begins with a cold start of the en-
gine. Urban driving is then simulated.
In the extra-urban driving cycle, the vehicle is accelerated and decelerated in
all gears, corresponding to daily routine driving conditions. The driving speed
varies between 0 and 120 km/h.
The calculation of the combined fuel consumption considers a weighting of
about 37 % for the intra-urban cycle and 63 % for the extra-urban cycle.
Note
The emission and fuel consumption figures given on the ŠKODA websites or
in the commercial and technical vehicle documentation have been established
in accordance with rules and under conditions that are set out by statutory or
technical rules for the determination of operational and technical data of mo-
tor vehicles.
Depending on the extent of the equipment, the driving style, traffic condi-
tions, weather influences and vehicle condition, consumption values can in
practice result in fuel economy figures in the use of the vehicle that differ
from the fuel consumption values listed on the ŠKODA websites or in the
commercial and technical vehicle documentation.
246
Technical data
Dimensions
Fig. 309
Vehicle dimensions
The vehicle dimensions given in the vehicle's technical documentation always take precedence over the details in the Owner's Manual.
The dimensions listed below are for the basic model without any optional equipment.
Vehicle dimensions by operating weight without driver (in mm)
» Fig. 309 Specification Fabia Fabia Combi
A
Height 1467 1467
B
Front track
Basic dimension 1463 1463
Vehicles with the 1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI and 1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI engine 1457 1457
C
Width 1732 1732
D
Rear track
Basic dimension 1457 1457
Vehicles with the 1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI and 1.4 ltr./77 kW TDI engine 1451 1451
E
Width including exterior mirrors 1958 1958
F
Clearance 133 135
G
Wheelbase 2470 2470
H
Length 3992 4257
247
Technical data
Departure angle
Fig. 310
Overhang angle
Angle » Fig. 310
Overhang angle, front
Overhang angle, rear
The overhang angle values indicate the maximum incline of a slope, up which
the vehicle can drive at a slow speed without the bumper or underbody mak-
ing contact with the slope. The values listed correspond to the maximum axle
load, front or back.
Overhang angle (°)
Overhang angle, front Overhang angle, rear
Fabia Fabia Combi Fabia Fabia Combi
14.6 14.6 17.6 13.1
A
B
248
Technical data
Vehicle-specific details per engine type
Introduction
The specified values have been determined in accordance with rules and under conditions set out by legal or technical requirements for determining operational
and technical data for motor vehicles.
The exhaust gas standard is specified in the vehicle's technical documentation, as well as in the declaration of conformity (in the so-called COC document). The
declaration of conformity (the so-called COC document) can be obtained from a ŠKODA partner (only valid for some countries and some models).
1.0 l/44 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 44/5000-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 95/3000-4300
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Body Fabia
Gearbox MG
Top speed (km/h) 160
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 15.7
1.0 l/55 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 55/6200
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 95/3000-4300
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 172 175
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 14.7 14.9
249
Technical data
1.0 ltr./70 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 70/5000-5500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 160/1500-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 185 187
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.6 10.8
1.0 ltr./81 kW TSI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 81/5000-5500
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 200/2000-3500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/999
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Gearbox MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 196 196 199 199
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 9.5 9.8 9.6 9.9
1.6 l/66 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 66/4250-6000
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1598
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 181 184
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.0 11.1
250
Technical data
1.6 l/81 kW MPI engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 81/5800
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 155/3800-4000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 4/1598
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission AG AG
Top speed (km/h) 190 190
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.0 11.1
1.4 l/55 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 55/3000-3750
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 210/1500-2000
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/1422
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 172 175
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 13.1 13.3
1.4 l/66 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 66/3000-3250
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 230/1750-2500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/1422
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Transmission MG DSG MG DSG
Top speed (km/h) 182 182 184 184
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 11.1 11.1 11.3 11.3
251
Technical data
1.4 l/77 kW TDI CR engine
Output (kW at 1/min) 77/3500-3750
Maximum torque (Nm at 1/min) 250/1750-2500
Number of cylinders/displacement (cm
3
) 3/1422
Body Fabia Fabia Combi
Gearbox MG MG
Top speed (km/h) 193 196
Acceleration 0-100 km/h (s) 10.1 10.2
252
Technical data
Index
A
A2DP/AVRCP 134
Abort route guidance 159
ABS 40, 175
ACC 45
see Adaptive Cruise Control 184
Accessories 201
Activation of online services 14
Adaptive cruise control
Malfunctions 189
Overtaking 188
Setting/changing the desired speed 187
Special driving conditions 188
Stop/resume control
187
Trailer towing 188
Warning light 39
Adaptive Cruise Control 45, 184
automatic stopping and starting 186
Operation
185
Operation overview 186
Radar sensor 174
Settings in Infotainment 185
Setting the distance 187
Start control
187
Adjusting
Steering wheel
19
Advance warning / Emergency braking 45
Advice on tyre/wheel usage 216
AG 244
Air-conditioning system
Air outlet vents
94
air bag 24
airbag
warning light 41
Airbag
Adjustments and impairments to the airbag
system 202
Deactivation 26
Deployment 24
Airbag system 24
Air conditioning 91
Climatronic 92
Manual air conditioning 92
Recirculated air mode 93
Air outlet vents 94
Alarm 57
Trailer 200
All-year tyres 218
Alphanumeric keyboard 100
Alternative routes 110
AM 117, 118
Amundsen
External module
97
Infotainment description 95
Android Auto 142
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 175
Anti-theft alarm system 57
Trailer
200
Anti-theft wheel bolts 223
APN 108
Apple CarPlay 143
applications
Disclaimer 95
Armrest
Front
70
Ashtray 79
Assembling the
bar ball, Step 1 195
bar ball, Step 2
196
Assist systems 174
Audio source 124
Auto Check Control
Vehicle status 47
Automatic consumer shutdown 214
Automatic drive
Selector lever 170
Automatic driving light control 62
Automatic gearbox
Disengage selector lever 171
Kickdown 172
Malfunction 42
Selector lever lock 171
Start and drive 172
Warning light 42
Automatic switch-off of Infotainment 101
Automatic transmission 170
Selector lever emergency unlocking 231
Tiptronic 171
AUX 74, 125
Avoiding damage to your vehicle
173
B
ball bar
ready position 195
Ball head
Check fitting
196
Ready position 194
Battery
Changing in key 229, 230
Belts 21
Belt tensioners 23
bike carriers
88
Blues
Infotainment description 97
Bluetooth
A2DP/AVRCP 107
Name
107
Paired external devices 107
253
Index
Profiles 134
Set 110, 113
setting 107
Switching on/off 107, 113
Update 105, 108
Updates 113
Visibility 107, 113
Bluetooth Player 126
Bluetooth® update 133
Bolero
External module 97
Infotainment description 96
Bonnet 210
Boot
Cargo element 86
Class N1 vehicles 86
Hooks 83
see boot lid 58
Boot lid
58
Automatic locking 58
Open/Close 58
Brake Assist (HBA) 176
Brake booster 168
Brake fluid
213
Check 213
specification 213
Brake pads
New 168
Brake pedal (automatic gearbox)
Warning light
42
Brakes
Brake fluid 213
Braking and stabilisation systems 175
Handbrake 168
Information on braking
168
Run in 172
Warning lights 38
Brake system 175
Braking
Brake booster 168
Breakdown call 134
Breakdown kit 225
Broadcasting 117, 118
Bulbs
Replacing 236
Buttons in driver's door
Electric power windows 59
C
Call list
Call list 137
CAR
163
Car battery
Automatic consumer shutdown
214
Disconnecting and reconnecting 215
Replacing 215
CAR button 163
Car care
Exterior
204
Interior 206
Car computer
see multifunction display 48
Care and maintenance
201
Care Connect 15
Cargo element 86
Car park 150
Carrier 90
CarStick 139
Car washing
203
Exterior 204
Interior 206
washing 203
cellphone
Disclaimer
95
Central locking 52
Problems 56
Central locking button 54
Changing
Battery 229, 230
Windscreen wiper blades 232
Changing a wheel 221
Changing 221
Changing gear
Selector lever 170
Changing wheels
Wheels 221
Charging a vehicle battery 215
Check
Brake fluid 213
Engine oil 211
Fit ball head properly 196
Oil level 211
Checking
Battery condition 214
Coolant
212
Children and safety 28
Child safety lock 56
Child seat 28
Classification 30
Installation location
30, 31
in the passenger seat 30
ISOFIX 31
on the front passenger seat 29
TOP TETHER 32
Cigarette lighter 79
Clearing calls
110
Climatronic 91
Automatic operation 93
Operating elements 92
Recirculated air mode 93
Clock
115
Change display 101
Clothes hook 77
cockpit 35
254
Index
Cockpit
Lighting 64
Coin and card holders 74
Comfort flashing 62
COMING HOME 63
compartments 73
Compatible sources
Images 129
Component protection 202
Computer
see multifunction display 48
Conditions for pairing 133
Conference call 137
Configuration wizard 102
Connect external device to the Infotainment
hotspot 140
Connect Infotainment to the hotspot of the ex-
ternal device 140
Coolant
212
Checking 212
Refilling 212
Temperature display 37
Warning light 43
CORNER
See Fog lights with CORNER function
63
Correct routing of seat belt
21
Correct seating position 18, 20
Cruise Control System 181
Cup holders
75
Custom POI categories 153
D
DAB
117, 118
Additional information 117
Radio text and images presentation
117
Set 109, 114
DAB slideshow 117
Data connection
Amundsen 139
CarStick 139
Internet 139
Data roaming 108
Date 106, 112
DAY LIGHT
see Daytime running lights 61
Daytime running lights 61
Deactivation
Airbag 26
Defrosting rear window 65
Delayed locking of the boot lid
See boot lid 58
Delete destination 157
Demo mode 112, 158
Departure angle 248
Destination
Custom destination
153
Enter destination using the address 149
enter in map 149
Favourite 151, 157
Flagged destination 151
Home address
152
Image with GPS 154
Last destinations 151
Map point 150
Memory 157
Online destinations 151
search
148
Stored destination 151
Telephone contact 151
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 147
vCard
151
Destination details 157
Destination management
Destination details 157
Favourite 157
Storage 157
Destination memory 151
Device menu
Sound 106
Diesel 208
Diesel fuel 208
Diesel particle filter (DPF) 44
Digital clock 46
Digital service schedule 51
Dipped beam 61
Dipstick 211
Directive 2014/53/EU 8
Disclaimer
applications 95
external devices 95
Mobile phones
95
Display
Coolant temperature 37
Fuel level 37
Gear changes 47
In the instrument cluster
46
MAXI DOT 50
Display of a low temperature 45
Display POIs in the map 150
Distance warning 190
Diverting calls 110
Door
Child safety lock
56
Emergency locking 231
Emergency locking of the driver's door 230
Opening/ Closing 55
Door alarm
46
Drive Green 172
Driver information system 46
255
Index
driving
emissions 245
fuel consumption 245
Driving
Driving through water 173
Maximum speed 249
DSG 244
Dynamic route 162
E
Economical driving 172
Edit route 159
EDS 176
Electric power windows
58
Buttons in driver's door
59
Malfunctions 60
Electronic Differential Lock (EDL, XDS) 176
Electronic immobiliser 164
Elevation 145
emergency
Jump-starting
227
Emergency
Hazard warning light system 64
Jump-starting 227
Selector lever unlocking
231
Starting/stopping the engine at the push of a
button 165, 166
Towing the using the tow hitch 229
Towing the vehicle 228
Tyre repair 225
Unlocking/locking the door
230, 231
Emergency call 15, 134
Emergency equipment
Fire extinguisher 220
First aid kit 220
Jack
221
Reflective vest 220
Vehicle tool kit 221
Warning triangle 220
Emission control system 40
Emissions 245
Engine
Information messages 43
Run in 172
Engine compartment 209
Brake fluid 213
Coolant 212
Engine oil 211
Overview 210
Vehicle battery 213
Windscreen washer fluid 211
Engine drag torque control (MSR) 175
Engine number 244
Engine oil 211
Check 211
Oil changing
211
Refilling 211
Specification 211
Warning light 44
Enter destination 149
EPC
41
Equalizer 106
ESC
Operation 175
External device data transfer 102, 107
External devices
Disclaimer
95
External module 97
SD card 124
Extras
manual search 118
Scan
118
F
Factory settings 107, 113, 163
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle 2
Fastening elements 82
Fatigue detection
Fatigue detection system 191
Fatigue detection system 191
Favourite 151, 157
Favourite contacts 136
File formats
Images 129
Media 126
Requirements and restrictions 126
File Formats 128
Films 204
Find
Car park 150
Petrol station 150
Restaurant 150
Finish route guidance 159
Fire extinguisher
220
First aid kit 220
Flagged destination 151
Flashing 62
Flexible storage compartment 86
Floor mats
170
See Floor mats 170
FM 117, 118
Set 109, 114
Fog lights 63
Warning light 42
Fog lights/rear fog light
63
Fog lights with CORNER function 63
Force limiter
Window 60
Front assist
Warning light
45
Front Assist 189
Deactivation/activation 191
Distance warning 190
256
Index
Malfunctions 191
Operation 189
Radar sensor 174
Settings in Infotainment 189
Warning and automatic braking 190
Warning light 45
Front seats 69
Fuel 207
Diesel 208
Fuel gauge 37
refer to Fuel 207
Refuelling 207
Unleaded petrol 207
Warning light 42
fuel consumption 245
Fuel options 111
Fuel reserve 42
Functional surfaces 98
Fuses
233
in the dashboard 233, 234
in the engine compartment 235, 236
G
Gearbox
Information messages
42
Gear change
Gear recommendation 47
Information on the selected gear 47
Gear changing
lever 169
Genuine parts
201
Glasses storage box 76
GPS 145
Graphical driving recommendations 158
H
handbrake
warning light 38
Handbrake 168
Hazard warning light system 64
HBA 176
Headrests 71
Adjusting the height 71
Heater
Recirculated air mode 93
Heating 91, 92
Mirrors 68
Rear window 65
Seats 72
Heating rear window 65
Hill Start Assist 176
hitch 198
Hitch 193
Home address 111, 152
Hooks 83
horn 35
Hotspot
Connect
140
Set 140
I
I-PAD holder 80
Ignition lock
165
Images
Compatible sources
129
Display 109
File formats 129
Main menu 128
Operation
129
Requirements and restrictions 129
Safe removal of the data source 107
Selecting the image source 128
Set 109
Supported file formats
129
Image viewer 128
Immobiliser 164
Import
Destinations (online) 154
Destinations (vCard) 153
POI categories 153
POI categories (online) 146, 153
Routes (online) 160
Import contacts 114
Importing contacts 110
In an emergency
Changing a wheel 221
Inertia reels 23
Information about the towing process 228
Information call 134
Information system 46
Gear recommendation 47
MAXI DOT display 50
Multifunction display 48
Service interval display 51
Infotainment
95
Infotainment description
Amundsen 95
Bolero 96
Swing 96
Infotainment Description
Blues
97
Infotainment language 106, 113
Infotainment menus
Grid display 102
Horizontal display 102
Infotainment Online
16
Infotainment operation 98
Infotainment screen 98
Infotainment operation using an application in
the external device 102
Infotainment overview
95
Infotainment restart 101
257
Index
Infotainment screen 106, 112
Areas 98
Important information 97
Keyboard 100
Maintenance 97
Operation 98
Input screen
Language characters 113
Input screen with keyboard 100
Instrument cluster 36
Vehicle status 47
Warning lights 37
Interior lights 64, 65
Interior monitor 57
Internet 139
Amundsen 139
CarStick 139
ISOFIX 31
J
Jack 221
Jacking points
Raise vehicle 224
Journey data 49
Jump-starting
227
K
KESSY
deactivating 54
Starting/Stopping the engine 165
Switching the ignition on/off 165
Unlocking/locking
53
Key
Changing battery 229, 230
Lock 53
Starting/Stopping the engine 165
Switching the ignition on/off
165
Unlock 53
Keyboard 100
L
Lamp failure 44
Lamps
Warning light 44
Lane recommendation 158
Language characters 107
Last destinations 151
Latitude 145
LEAVING HOME 63
Lever
ACC 186
Cruise control
182
Front Assist
191
Operation of the information system 47
Speed limiter 184
Turn signal/main beam 62
Windscreen wipers 67
Liability for defects
6
Light 61
Cockpit 64
COMING HOME / LEAVING HOME 63
Daytime running lights 61
Flash
62
Fog lights/rear fog light 63
Fog lights with CORNER function 63
Hazard warning light system 64
Headlight cleaning system 67
Parking light 64
Replacing bulbs
236
Turn signal/main beam 62
Lighting
Interior lighting 64
Luggage compartment 81
Lights
Abroad
64
Automatic driving light control 62
Dipped beam 61
Headlight range control 61
Parking lights 61
Switching on and off 61
Warning lights 37
List
of available stations 119
of telephone contacts 135
With folder/track list 123
List of available hotspots 140
List of paired external devices 134
List of traffic reports 161
Load 245
Localisation services 15
Lock
Individual settings 55
KESSY 53
Key 53
Locking
Central locking button
54
in case of emergency 231
Remote control 53
Lock steering lock 164
Longitude 145
Luggage compartment
81
Cover 83
Fastening elements 82
Fixing nets 82
Flexible storage compartment 86
Lighting 81
Net partition
85
Roll-up cover 84
Storage compartments under the floor 86
unlocking manually 231
Unlocking the boot lid 231
Variable loading floor
87
Luggage compartment cover 83
Other positions 84
Roll-up cover 84
258
Index
Luggage Storage
bike carriers 88
Storage compartments 85
M
Main beam 62
Warning light 42
Main menu
Android Auto 143
Apple CarPlay 143
Images 128
Media 121, 122
Media Command 130
MirrorLink®
144
Navigation
146
Radio 117
SmartLink+ 142
SMS 138
WLAN 140
Make up mirror
66
Manage memory 111
Management of online services 14
Management of ŠKODA Connect Online Serv-
ices 108
Manage stored routes
160
Managing paired devices 134
Manoeuvre
Graphical driving recommendations 158
Navigation announcements 158
Manual air conditioning
Controls
92
Recirculated air mode 93
Manual gear changing
See Gear changing 169
Map
Automatic scale
155
Display 147
Display of traffic signs 110
Display options 154
Display POIs 150
Fast map view 155
Lane guidance 110
Main menu 147
Manual scale 155
Map centring 156
Operation 147
Orientation 155
POI display 110
Road signs 156
MAXI DOT
See MAXI DOT display 50
MAXI DOT display
assist systems menu item 51
Audio menu item 50
Main menu 50
Navigation menu item 50
Operation 47, 48
MAXI DOT Display
Apple CarPlay
51
Telephone menu 51
Maximum speed 249
MCB 177
Mechanical window lifter
58
opening/closing 59
Media
Audio source 124
AUX 74, 125
Bluetooth Audio 126
Browser
123
File formats 126
File Formats 128
List 123
Main menu 121, 122
Multimedia database
124
Operation 121
Playback control 122
Requirements and restrictions 126
Safe removal of the data source 107
Safe removal of the external data source 113
SD card 124
Select audio source 122
Set 114, 116
Setting 109
Supported Media 128
Supported sources 126
USB 74, 125
Voice control 103
WLAN 126
Media Command
Control 131
Main menu 130
Supported formats 131
Memory 49
MG 244
Mirror 66, 68
MirrorLink® 143
Modes of the automatic transmission
170
Modifications and technical alterations 201
More keypad languages 107, 113
Most frequent routes 159
MPI 244
MSR
175
Multicollision brake (MCB) 177
Multifunction display
Functions 48
Information Overview 48
Memory 49
Multifunction pocket
83
Multifunction steering wheel 48
Multimedia
see Media 121
Multimedia database 124
Multimedia holder
76
Mute 101
MyŠKODA App application 10
259
Index
N
N1 86
Navigation
Abort route guidance 159
Advanced settings 112
Alternative routes 110
Contacts 151
Demo mode 112, 158
Destination address 149
Destination details 157
Destination display 154
Destination in map 149
Destination memory 151
Destination search 148
Dynamic route 110
Edit route 159
Favourites 151
Finish route guidance 159
Foreword
145
Fuel options 111
GPS 145
Graphical driving recommendations 158
Home address 152
Image with GPS
154
Import destinations 153
Imported destinations 111
Last destinations 151
Main menu 146
Manage memory 111
Map
110
Map centring 156
Map display options 154
Map orientation 155
Map scale 155
Most frequent routes
159
Navigation announcements 111, 158
Navigation data 146
Preferred type of route 110
Route 156
Route calculation 157
Route details 159
Route display 154
Route guidance 156
Route information 159
Route list 160
Route options 110
Set 110
Speed limits 111
Split screen 147
Start route guidance 157
Status line 112
Stopover 156
Traffic obstruction 162
Trailer towing 158
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 147
Update navigation data 146
Update the navigation data
111
Updating the navigation data online 146
Version information 111
Voice control 103
Working with the navigation 145
Navigation announcements
111, 158
Navigation data 146
Net partition 85
Nets 82
Network
Data connection 108
Data roaming
108
Set 110
setting 108
Values of the downloaded data 108
New route 160
Notes
11
O
oil
see Engine oil 211
Oil changing
Engine oil 211
Onboard computer
see multifunction display 48
Online
Destination details 157
Destination import 151
Destination search 148
Details of the traffic report 162
Find car park 150
Find petrol station 150
Import destination 154
Importing POI categories 146, 153
List of traffic reports 161
Route import 160
Update navigation data 146
Updating the navigation data 146
Online destinations 151
Online services
Deleting the user
14
Electronic Owner's Manual 13
Instruction video 13
Localisation services 15
Private mode
14
Services Management 14
Switching user 14
ŠKODA Connect Portal website 12
Online Services 12
Activation in Infotainment 14
Care Connect
15
Infotainment Online 16
proactive service 15
Remote access to the vehicle 16
Service package 12
ŠKODA Connect website
12
Operating the Infotainment menus 100
Operating weight 245
260
Index
Operation
Images 129
Media 121
Radio 117
Telephone 132
Voice control 104
Original accessories 201
overview
cockpit 35
Overview
Engine compartment 210
Fuses 233
Warning lights 37
P
Pairing process 133
Parking 169
Parking aid 177
Parking aid 177
Automatic system activation when moving for-
ward
179
Operation 178
Settings in Infotainment 177
Parking assistance
Activation / deactivation
179
Parking lights 61
Parking sensors
Display Infotainment screen 178
Parking the vehicle
see Parking 169
ParkPilot
177
Parts replacement 201
Passive safety
Before every journey 18
Driving safety 18
Passive Safety
18
Pedals 170
Floor mats 170
Petrol 207
Petrol station 150
Petrol station logo 110
PIN
Set 110
Playback
Media 122
Pockets 78
Pockets in the luggage compartment 83
POI 153
POIs 150
Power steering 39
Practical features
Glasses storage box 76
Pockets 78
Storage compartment for umbrella 77
Waste container 75
Preheating unit 40
Preset list
120
Principles of Infotainment operation 98
Private mode 14
Proactive service 15
R
Radio
Broadcasting
118
List of available stations 119
Main menu 117
manual search 118
Operating 117
Preset buttons
120
Preset list 120
Radio station logo 120
Save station 120
Scan 118
Search for stations
118
Select station 120
Set 109, 113, 116
Traffic program (TP) 121
Voice control 103
Radio equipment
Information on Directive 2014/53/EU 8
Radio station
Save 120
Radio station logos 120
Update 108
Radio stations
Select stations and search 118
Raise vehicle 224
Rear fog light 63
Warning light 40
Rear seats 70
Rear view mirror 68
Recirculated air mode 93
Refilling
Coolant 212
Engine oil
211
Windscreen washer fluid 211
Reflective vest 220
Refuelling 207
Fuel 207
Register online services
Settings
108
Registration of online services
Electronic Owner's Manual 13
Instruction video 13
Regulation
Headlight beam
61
Remote access to the vehicle 16
Remote control
Changing battery 229, 230
Synchronisation process 56
Unlocking/locking the vehicle
53
Removing the
bar ball, Step 1 196
bar ball, Step 2 197
261
Index
Repairs and technical alterations 201
Replacing
Bulbs 236
Fuses 233
Windscreen wiper blades 232
Reset counter for distance driven (trip) 46
Restaurant 150
Rev counter 36
Rims 216
Road signs
Infotainment display 156
Roller blind
see Luggage compartment cover 84
Roof
Load 90
Roof rack 90
Route 156
New route 160
Online route import
160
Route list 160
Store route 159
Route calculation 157
Trailer towing 158
Route details
159
Route information 159
Route list 160
Route options 110
Run-in
Engine 172
Running in
Brake pads
168
Tyres 216
S
SafeLock
54
Safe removal of the data source
107
Safe removal of the external data source 113
safety
air bag 24
Safety 18
Child safety 28
Child safety seats 28
Correct seating position 18
Headrests 71
ISOFIX 31
TOP TETHER 32
SAFE, SAFELOCK
See SafeLock 54
Save station 120
Saving electrical energy 172
Saving fuel 172
Scan 118
Scraper 205
Screen
see Infotainment screen 97
Screen display
98
SD card 124
Safe removal 113
Search
Destination 148
Online destinations
148
Types of destination search/destination en-
try 147
Search for stations 118
Seat belt
height adjustment 21
Warning light
43
Seat belts 21
Belt tensioners 23
fastening and unfastening 22
Inertia reels 23
Warning light
39
Seats
Adjusting the front seats 69
front 69
Front armrest 70
Headrests 71
Heating 72
Rear 70
Rear seat 71
Rear seat backrests 70
Setting 69
see Instrument cluster
see Instrument cluster 36
Select audio source 122
Selector lever 170
Selector lever control 170
Selector lever lock 42
Select station 118, 120
service 201
Service
Service interval display 51
Warning light 45
Service interval
51
Service interval display 51
Service intervals 51
Service schedule 51
Setting
Headrests
71
Mirror 68
Seat belt height 21
Seats 69
Time 46
Settings
Advanced settings
112
APN 108
Bluetooth 107, 110, 113
Codecs 109
Configuration wizard 102
DAB
109, 114
Data connection 108
Equalizer 106
External device data transfer 107
FM 109, 114
262
Index
Fuel options 111
Images 109
Information regarding the navigation data ver-
sion 111
Infotainment 106, 112, 115
Infotainment language 106, 113
Infotainment screen 106, 112
Manage favourites 136
Manage memory 111
Map 110
Media 109, 114, 116
More keypad languages 107, 113
Navigation 110
Navigation announcements 111
Network 108
PIN 110
Radio 109, 113, 116
Reset to factory settings 107, 113, 163
Route options
110
SmartLink+ 110
Software update 105
Software updates 113
Sound 106, 112, 115
Sound system
106
Speed limits 111
Subwoofer 106
Surround 106
System information 105, 108, 113
ŠKODA Connect 108
Telephone
110, 114
Text messages 110
Time and date 106, 112
Units 107, 113
Update software 108
User profile
136
Vehicle 163
Voice control 107
Volume 101
WLAN 108
Set to
lower position of the variable loading floor 87
upper position of the variable loading floor 87
Setup 115
Shifting
Tiptronic 171
SmartLink+ 141
Android Auto 142
Apple CarPlay 143
Introduction to the subject 141
Main menu 142
MirrorLink® 143
Set 110
ŠKODA OneApp application 144
SMS
Main menu 138
New message 138
Received message 139
Snow chains
219
sockets
12-volt power socket in the luggage compart-
ment 79
12-volt socket in the interior 79
Software update
105
Software Update 108
Software updates 113
SOS button 15
Sound 106, 112, 115
Sound system 106
Spare wheel
217
Removing/stowing 222
Speed limiter 42, 183
Speed limits 111, 158
Speed regulating system
Warning light
42
Speed symbol 218
Split screen 147
Manoeuvre 158
Spoiler 202
SSID 108
Stabilisation system 175
Stability Control (ESC) 39, 175
Standby 101
START-STOP 166
Deactivate/activate the system manually 167
Functionality 166
Jump-starting 227
Warning light 45
START-STOP system 166
Start engine 165
Jump-starting 227
Starter button
Lock/unlock the steering lock 164
Problems with starting the engine 166
Starting/Stopping the engine 165
Switching the ignition on/off 165
Starting engine
Jump-starting
227
Starting the engine
Immobiliser 164
Start route guidance 157
Status bar
98, 147
Status line
Navigation 112
Telephone 132
Steering lock (KESSY system) 39
Steering wheel
Adjusting
19
Buttons 48
Proper posture 19
Stop engine 165
Stopover 156
Stopping
see Parking
169
Storage 73
263
Index
Storage compartments
see Practical features 73
Stored destinations
Destination memory 151
Last destinations 151
Store destination 157
Subwoofer 106
Sun visors 66
Supported audio sources 128
Supported files 128
Supported sources
Media 126
Surround 106
Swing
Infotainment description 96
Switch
Car battery 215
Switching off Infotainment 101
Switching off the ignition
165
Switching on Infotainment 101
Switching on the ignition 165
Switching the lights on and off 61
Switch off
Alarm
57
System information 105, 108, 113
T
Tablet holder 80
TCS 39, 40, 176
TDI CR 244
Technical data
244
Telephone
Additional telephone 134
Bluetooth profiles 134
Bluetooth® update 133
Breakdown call
134
Call list 137
Call settings 110
Clearing calls 110
Compatibility 133
Conditions for pairing 133
Conference call 137
Connecting to the infotainment 133
Connection types 134
Dialling the telephone number 134
Diverting calls 110
Emergency call 134
Enter telephone number 134
Favourite contacts 136
Functions 134
Import contacts 114
Importing contacts 110
Information service 134
Introductory information 132
Main menu 132
Main telephone
134
Manage favourites 114
Managing favourites 110
Operation 132
pairing 133
Pairing process
133
Premium 110
Set 110, 114
Setting text messages 110
Telephone 132
Telephone book 135
Telephone call
137
Text messages (SMS) 138
User profile 110, 114
Voice control 103
Voicemail 134
Telephone book
135
Telephone call 137
Telephone compatibility 133
Telephone connection types 134
Telephone functions 134
Telephone number 134
Text messages 138
Ticket holder 73
Time 46, 106, 112
see Clock 115
Time and date display in the Infotainment
screen 101
Tiptronic 171
TMC
Details of the traffic report 162
Dynamic route 162
List of traffic reports 161
Tools 221
TOP TETHER 32
Touch screen 97
Towing 229
Towing a trailer 200
Towing away 228
Towing device
Accessories
197
Description 194
Vertical load 193
Towing eye 229
Towing protection
57
Towing the vehicle 228
Traction control (TCS) 39, 176
Traffic
Details of the traffic report 162
Dynamic route 162
List of traffic reports
161
Traffic Information (TMC) 162
Traffic obstruction 162
Traffic program (TP) 121
Traffic reports (TMC) 161
Trailer
Connect and disconnect
198
Loading 198
Towing a trailer 200
264
Index
Trailer towing 193
Navigation 158
Transmitter
See main menu 117
Transport
Luggage compartment 81
Roof rack 90
Towing device and trailer 193
Transporting children 28
Triangle 220
TSI 244
Turn signal 62
Turn signal system
Warning light 42
Tutorial videos 10
Type plate 244
Tyre
Wear indicator 217
Tyre load capacity
218
Tyre pressure 216
Warning light 41
Tyre pressure monitor
refer to the tyre pressure monitoring 192
Tyre pressure monitoring
192
Storing the tyre pressure values and Infotain-
ment display 192
Warning light 41
Tyre repair 225
Tyres 216
damage
216
Explanation of the label 218
new 216
Tyre pressure 216
Tyre size 218
U
Units 107, 113
Unlock
Individual settings 55
KESSY 53
Key 53
Unlocking
Central locking button 54
In case of emergency 230
Remote control 53
Unlocking and locking 52
Unlock steering lock 164
Update navigation data 146
Update the navigation data 111
Updating the navigation data 146
USB 74, 125
Safe removal 113
Useful equipment
Clothes hook 77
Cup holders 75
Multimedia holder
76
Useful features
Storage compartment 73
Useful Features
12-volt power socket in the luggage compart-
ment
79
12-volt socket in the interior 79
Ashtray 79
Cigarette lighter 79
Coin and card holders 74
Pockets 78
Reflective vest
220
Ticket holder 73
Useful links 2
User account
Configuration wizard 102
User profile
110, 114
V
Variable loading floor 87
vCard 151, 153
Vehicle battery
Charging 215
Checking the condition 214
Safety instructions 213
Warning light 43
Winter operation 214
Vehicle care 202
Exterior 205
Vehicle cleaning 202
Exterior 205
Windscreens 205
Vehicle dimensions 247
Vehicle height 247
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 244
Vehicle length 247
Vehicle settings 163
Vehicle status
Auto Check Control
47
Vehicle systems 163
Vehicle tool kit 221
Vehicle width 247
Vest 220
VIN
Vehicle Identification Number
244
Visibility 65
Visors 66
Voice control 103
Commands 104
Correction of a voice command input
104
Help 104
Not recognising a voice command 104
Operation principle 104
Settings 107
Stopping/restoring entry
104
switching on/off 103
Voicemail 134
Volume 101
265
Index
Volume setting 101
W
Warning at when speeding 49
Warning lights 37
Warning symbols
see Warning lights 37
Warning triangle 220
Warranty 6
Waste container 75
Water
driving through 173
Weather conditions 201
Weights
244, 245
Wheel bolts
Anti-theft wheel bolts
223
Caps 223
Loosening and tightening 224
Wheels 216
Directional tyres
216
Full trim 223
Load Index 218
Snow chains 219
Speed symbol 218
Tyre age
216
Tyre damage 216
Tyre pressure 216
Tyre storage 216
Winter tyres 218
Window operation 58
Windows
operating
58
Windscreen washer fluid
Refilling 211
Warning light 45
Windscreen washing systems
66
Windscreen wipers and washers 66
Activation 67
Add fluid 211
Replacing the windscreen wiper blade 232
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades 232
Service position of the windscreen wiper
arms 232
Winter operation 218
All-year tyres 218
Diesel fuel 208
Snow chains 219
Vehicle battery 214
Winter tyres 218
Winter tyres 218
Wipers and washer
Warning light for windscreen washer fluid lev-
el 45
Wiping interval 67
Wireless Internet Hotspot
setting 108
WLAN
126, 140
Client 140
Connect 140
Connect to hotspot 140
Set hotspot 140
Switch hotspot on/off
140
WPS 108, 141
WLAN client
setting 108
WLAN Client 140
WPS 108, 141
X
XDS 176
Other Characters
ŠKODA Connect
Register
108
see Online Services
12
Services Manager 108
Set 108
ŠKODA Connect Online Services
Enable services 108
Register 108
ŠKODA OneApp application 144
266
Index
267
Index
Reprinting, reproduction, translation, or any other use, either in whole or in
part, is not permitted without the written consent of ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
ŠKODA AUTO a.s. expressly reserves all rights relating to copyright laws.
Subject to change.
Issued by: ŠKODA AUTO a.s.
© ŠKODA AUTO a.s. 2017
www.skoda-auto.com
Návod k obsluze
Fabia anglicky 11.2017
6V0012720AH

6V0012720AH
40

Brauchen Sie Hilfe? Stellen Sie Ihre Frage.

Forenregeln

Missbrauch melden von Frage und/oder Antwort

Libble nimmt den Missbrauch seiner Dienste sehr ernst. Wir setzen uns dafür ein, derartige Missbrauchsfälle gemäß den Gesetzen Ihres Heimatlandes zu behandeln. Wenn Sie eine Meldung übermitteln, überprüfen wir Ihre Informationen und ergreifen entsprechende Maßnahmen. Wir melden uns nur dann wieder bei Ihnen, wenn wir weitere Einzelheiten wissen müssen oder weitere Informationen für Sie haben.

Art des Missbrauchs:

Zum Beispiel antisemitische Inhalte, rassistische Inhalte oder Material, das zu einer Gewalttat führen könnte.

Beispielsweise eine Kreditkartennummer, persönliche Identifikationsnummer oder unveröffentlichte Privatadresse. Beachten Sie, dass E-Mail-Adressen und der vollständige Name nicht als private Informationen angesehen werden.

Forenregeln

Um zu sinnvolle Fragen zu kommen halten Sie sich bitte an folgende Spielregeln:

Neu registrieren

Registrieren auf E - Mails für Skoda Fabia - 2017 wenn:


Sie erhalten eine E-Mail, um sich für eine oder beide Optionen anzumelden.


Andere Handbücher von Skoda Fabia - 2017

Skoda Fabia - 2017 Bedienungsanleitung - Deutsch - 284 seiten

Skoda Fabia - 2017 Bedienungsanleitung - Holländisch - 280 seiten

Skoda Fabia - 2017 Bedienungsanleitung - Französisch - 284 seiten


Das Handbuch wird per E-Mail gesendet. Überprüfen Sie ihre E-Mail.

Wenn Sie innerhalb von 15 Minuten keine E-Mail mit dem Handbuch erhalten haben, kann es sein, dass Sie eine falsche E-Mail-Adresse eingegeben haben oder dass Ihr ISP eine maximale Größe eingestellt hat, um E-Mails zu erhalten, die kleiner als die Größe des Handbuchs sind.

Ihre Frage wurde zu diesem Forum hinzugefügt

Möchten Sie eine E-Mail erhalten, wenn neue Antworten und Fragen veröffentlicht werden? Geben Sie bitte Ihre Email-Adresse ein.



Info